EC2019s7s8 Syllabus

ELECTRONICS & COMMUNICATION ENGINEERING

SEMESTER VII

CATEGORY L T P CREDIT
ECT401 MICROWAVES AND ANTENNAS
PCC 2 1 0 3

Preamble: This course aims to impart knowledge on the basic parameters of antenna, design and
workingofvariousbroad band antennas,arraysand itsradiationpatterns.It also introduces various
microwave sources, their principle of operation and study of various microwave hybrid circuits and
microwave semiconductor devices.
Prerequisite: ECT 302 ELECTROMAGNETICS
Course Out Comes: After the completion of the course the student will be able to:
CO1-K2 Understand the basic conceptofantennas anditsparameters.
CO2-K3 Analyzethe far filed pattern of Short dipole and Half wave dipole antenna.
CO3-K3 Design of various broad band antennas, arrays and its radiation patterns.
Illustratethe principle of operation of cavity resonators and various microwave
CO4-K2
sources.
CO5-K2 Explain various microwave hybrid circuits and microwave semiconductor devices.
Mapping of course outcomes with program outcomes:
PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO1 3 3 1 2
CO2 3 3 3 1 2 2
CO3 3 3 3 1 3 2
CO4 3 3 2 1 2
CO5 3 3 2 1 2
Assessment Pattern:
Bloom’s Category Continuous Assessment

Tests End Semester Examination
1 2
Remember
Understand K2 20 20 40
Apply K3 30 30 60
Analyse
Evaluate
Create
Mark distribution:
Total Marks CIE ESE ESE Duration

150 50 100 3 Hours
Continuous Internal Evaluation Pattern:
Attendance : 10 marks
Continuous Assessment Test (2 numbers) : 25 marks
Assignment/Quiz/Course project : 15 marks
End Semester Examination Pattern
Maximum Marks: 100 Time: 3 hours
End Semester Examination Pattern: There will be two parts; Part A and Part B. Part A contain
10 questions with 2 questions from each module, having 3 marks for each question. Students
should answer all questions. Part B contains 2 questions from each module of which student should
answer any one. Each question can have maximum 2 subdivisions and carry 14 marks.
Course Level Assessment Questions
Course Outcome 1 (CO1):

1. Define isotropic radiator and derive the expression for its electric field strength.
2. Explain the terms
i) Antenna temperature ii) Antenna efficiency iii) Beam efficiency
iv) Radiation pattern v) Antenna Polarization
3. Show that the directivity of a half wave dipole is 4 (from the expression for average power).
4. Find the radiation intensity of a current element with corresponding field strength in the
60
direction of maximum radiation of E m = V /m
r 80
1. Show that the directivity of a half wave dipole is 4 (from the expression for average power).
2. Derive expressions for the Far Field components and Radiation Resistance and Directivity of a
short dipole antenna.
3. State and Prove Reciprocity Theorem.

1. Derive the relation for normalized electrical field in the case of ‘n’ isotropic array sources
En= (AF) n.
2. Explain the working of a horn antenna. Write down the expression for gain, HPBW and BWFN.
3. Design an Endfire Array and plot its radiation pattern.
4. Design a LPDA with τ = 0.85, σ = 0.03 for the frequency range 15-45 MHz.
1. Determine the resonant frequency of an air filled rectangular cavity operating in the dominant
mode with dimensions as,a=4cm, b=5cm and d=6cm.
2. Derive power output and efficiency of a reflex klystron.
3. What is the significance of slow wave structures used in microwave circuits?Explain different
slow wave structures with neat sketches.
4. With neat diagram explain the operation of a travelling wave tube.
5. With the help of figures explain the bunching process of an 8-cavity cylindrical magnetron.
1. Explain S-parameters and its properties.

2. With a schematic describe the operation of a four port circulator. Obtain the simplified S matrix
of a perfectly matched, lossless four port circulator.
3. Explain RWH theory of Gunn Oscillation.
4. Define Gunn Effect and with the help of figures explain different modes of operation of Gunn
diode.
Syllabus
Module Course contents Hours

Basic antenna parameters: gain, directivity, beam width and effective aperture
calculations, effective height, wave polarization, radiation resistance, radiation
I efficiency, antenna field zones. Duality and Principles of reciprocity, Helmholtz 7
theorem (derivation required), Field, directivity and radiation resistance of a short
dipole and half wave dipole (far field derivation).
Broad band antenna: Principle of Log periodic antenna array and design, Helical
antenna: types and design. Designof Microstrip RectangularPatchantennas and
II 6
feeding methods. Principles of Horn, Parabolic dish antenna (expression for E, H
and Gain without derivation), Mobile phone antenna – Inverted F antenna.
Arrays of point sources, field of two isotropic point sources, principle of pattern
multiplication, linear arrays of ‘n’ isotropic point sources. Array factor, Grating
III 8
lobes.DesignofBroadside,End fire andDolph Chebyshevarrays. Concept of Phase
array.
Microwaves:Introduction, advantages, Cavity Resonators- Derivation of resonance
frequency of Rectangular cavity. Single cavity klystron- Reflex Klystron
Oscillators: Derivation of Power output, efficiency and admittance. Magnetron
IV 8
oscillators: Cylindrical magnetron, Cyclotron angular frequency, Power output and
efficiency.Travelling Wave Tube: Slow wave structures, Helix TWT,Amplification
process, Derivation of convection current, axialelectric field, wave modes and gain.
Microwave Hybrid circuits: Scattering parameters, Waveguide Tees- Magic tees,

Hybrid rings.Formulation of S-matrix.Directional couplers: Two hole directional
V couplers, S-matrix. Circulators and Isolators. Phase Shifter. 6
Microwave Semiconductor Devices: Amplifiers using MESFET. Principle of
Gunn diodes: Different modes, Principle of operation Gunn Diode Oscillators.
Text Books:
1. Balanis, Antenna Theory and Design, 3/e, Wiley Publications.

2. John D. Krauss, Antennas for all Applications, 3/e, TMH.
3. K D Prasad, Antenna and Wave Propagation, Satyaprakash Publications
4. Samuel Y. Liao, Microwave Devices and Circuits, 3/e, Pearson Education, 2003.
5. Robert E. Collin, Foundation of Microwave Engineering, 2/e, Wiley India, 2012.
References:
1. Collin R.E, Antennas & Radio Wave Propagation, McGraw Hill. 1985.
2. Jordan E.C. & K. G. Balmain, Electromagnetic Waves & Radiating Systems, 2/e, PHI.
3. Raju G.S.N., Antenna and Wave Propagation, Pearson, 2013.
4. Sisir K.Das& Annapurna Das, Antenna and Wave Propagation, McGraw Hill,2012
5. Thomas A.Milligan, Modern Antenna Design, IEEE PRESS, 2/e, Wiley Inter science.
6. Das, Microwave Engineering, 3/e, McGraw Hill Education India Education , 2014
7. David M. Pozar, Microwave Engineering,4/e, Wiley India, 2012.
Course Contents and Lecture Schedule.
No.of.
No Topic
Lectures
Module I
Basicantennaparameters ( all parameters and related simple problems), Relation
1.1 2
between parameters (derivation required)
1.2 Principlesofreciprocity (proof required), Duality. Conceptofretardedpotential
1
1.3 Helmholtz theorem (derivation required)
1.4 Derivation of Field, directivity and radiation resistance of a short dipole 2
1.5 Derivation of Field, directivity and radiation resistance of a half wave dipole. 2
Module II
Principle of Log periodic antenna array and design, Helical antenna: types and
2.1 2
design
2.2 Design of Rectangular Patch antennas and feeding techniques 2
Principles of Horn,Parabolic dish antenna, (expression for E, H, G without
2.3 1
derivation).
2.4 Mobile phone antenna – Inverted F antenna. 1
Module III
Arrays of point sources, field of two isotropic point sources, principle of pattern
3.1 2
multiplication
Linear arrays of ‘n’ isotropic point sources. Grating lobes. Array factor
3.2 2
(derivation)
3.3 Design of Broadside, End fire and Dolph Chebyshev arrays. 3
3.4 Concept of Phase array. 1
Module IV
Microwaves:Introduction, advantages, Cavity Resonators-Types, Derivation of
4.1 1
resonance frequency of Rectangular cavity (problems required)
Single cavity klystron- Reflex Klystron Oscillators: Derivation of Power output,
4.2 2
efficiency and admittance.(problems required)
Magnetron oscillators: Cylindrical magnetron, Cyclotron angular frequency,
4.3 2
Power output and efficiency.(problems required)
Travelling Wave Tube: Slow wave structures, Helix TWT,Amplification
4.4 process, Derivation of convection current, axialelectric field, wave modes and 3
gain. (problems required)
Module V
Microwave Hybrid circuits: Scattering parameters, Waveguide Tees- Magic
5.1 1
tees, Hybrid rings.Formulation of S-matrix.
Directional couplers: Two hole directional couplers, S-matrix. Circulators and
5.2 2
Isolators. Phase Shifter.
5.3 Microwave Semiconductor Devices: Amplifiers using MESFET. 1
Principle of Gunn diodes: Different modes, Principle of operation Gunn Diode

5.4 2
Oscillators.
Simulation Assignments (ECT 401)
The following simulation assignments can be done with MATLAB/HFSS/CST Microwave Studioor
any Open software.
• Simulation of radiation pattern of
a) Microstrip patch antenna
b) Arrays
c) Helical antenna
Model Question paper
APJ ABDUL KALAM TECHNOLOGICAL UNIVERSITY

SEVENTH SEMESTER B. TECH DEGREE EXAMINATION
Course Code: ECT401
Course Name: MICROWAVES AND ANTENNAS
Max. Marks:100 Duration: 3 Hours

PART A
(Answer All Questions)
1 Derive an expression for aperture area of an antenna. (3)
2 (i) Obtain the radiation resistance of a thin dipole antenna of length λ/15. (3)
(ii) Find HPBW of an antenna which has a field given by:
E (θ ) = Cos 2θ , for 0 ≤ θ ≤ 90 0 .
3 Why Log Periodic antenna is called as Frequency Independent antenna, explain? (3)
4 Briefly explain about Inverted F antenna. (3)
5 Explain (i) Pattern Multiplication (ii) Grating lobes (3)
6 Demonstrate the working principle of Phase Arrays. (3)
7 Derive the resonant frequency of a rectangular cavity resonator. (3)
What are re-entrant cavities? Show that they support infinite number of resonant
8 (3)
frequencies.
9 Explain with figure a ferrite isolator can support only forward direction waves. (3)
10 Write a short note on Phase shifter. (3)
PART B
(Answer one question from each module. Each question carries 14 marks)
MODULE I
11 a) Define the terms (i) Retarded potential (ii) Antenna field zones (4)
Derive expressions for the Far Field components and Radiation Resistance and (10)
b)
Directivity of a short dipole antenna.
OR
12a) State and prove Helmholtz theorem (7)
b) (i) Compute the radiation resistance, power radiated and efficiency of an antenna (7)
having total resistance of 50Ω and effective height of 69.96m and a current of 50A
(rms) at 0.480MHz.
(ii) Calculate the effective aperture of a short dipole antenna operating at 100 MHz.
MODULE II
13 a) Explain the working of a parabolic dish antenna. Write down the expression for gain, (6)
HPBW and BWFN.
b) Design a rectangular microstrip antenna using a dielectric substrate with dielectric (8)
constant of 2.2, h = 0.1588 cm so as to resonate at 10 GHz.
OR
14 a) Explain the working of a Log periodic dipole array and explain its design steps. (7)
Explain axial mode helical antenna. Write down the expression for gain, (7)
b)
HPBW,BWFN and radiation resistance of axial mode helical antenna.
MODULE III
15 Derive expression for array factor of N isotropic sources for end-fire array and also (14)
the expression for major lobe, minor lobes and Nulls of the array.
OR
16 a) Explain Chebyshev array and write down the expression for array factor. (7)
b) Design a Broadside Array and plot its radiation pattern. (7)
MODULE IV
17a) A reflex klystron operates under the following conditions: Vo=500V, Rsh =10KΩ, (7)
fr= 8 GHz, L=1 mm, e/m = l.759 x 1011 (MKS system) The tube is oscillating at fr at
the peak of the n = 2 or mode. Assume that the transit time through the gap and beam
loading to be neglected. Determine: -
(a) The value of the repeller voltage Vr.
(b) The direct current necessary to give a microwave gap voltage of 200V.
(c) The electronic efficiency under this condition.
b) Assuming pi mode of oscillations explain how a magnetron can sustain its (7)
oscillations using the cross field.
OR
18 a) Show that the axial electric field of TWT varies with convection current. (7)
b) Explain the electronic admittance of the gap in the case of reflex klystron. With (7)
admittance diagram explain the condition required for oscillation in a reflex Klystron.
MODULE V
19 a) Explain the working of a microwave amplifiers using MESFET (8)
Explain the constructional features of two-hole directional coupler and derive the S (6)
b)
Matrix.
OR
20 a) Draw the J-E characteristics of Gunn diode and explain its operation. (10)
b) Discuss the constructional features of magic tees and derive its S Matrix. Why are (4)
they called so?
ECL411 ELECTROMAGNETICS LAB
PCC 0 0 3 2
Preamble: This course aims to

(i) Provide practical experience in design and analysis of few electronic devices and
circuits used for Microwave and Optical communication engineering.
(ii) Familiarize students with simulation of basic Antenna experiments with simulation
tools.
Prerequisite: Nil
Course Outcomes: After the completion of the course the student will be able to
Familiarize the basic Microwave components and to analyse few microwave

CO1
measurements and its parameters.
Understand the principles of fiber-optic communications and the different kind of
CO2
losses, signal distortion and other signal degradation factors.
CO3 Design and simulate basic antenna experiments with simulation tools.
Mapping of course outcomes with program outcomes
CO1 3 3 3 3 3
CO2 3 3 3 3 3
CO3 3 3 3 2 3 3 3
Assessment Mark distribution
150 75 75 3 hours
Continuous Assessment : 30 marks
Internal Test (Immediately before the second series test): 30 marks
End Semester Examination Pattern: The following guidelines should be followed regarding
award of marks
(a) Preliminary work : 15 Marks
(b) Implementing the work/ Conducting the experiment : 10 Marks
(c) Performance,result and inference (usage of equipments and troubleshooting) : 25 Marks
(d) Vivavoce : 20 Marks
(e) Record : 5 Marks
General instructions: End-semester practical examination is to be conducted immediately after

the second series test covering entire syllabus given below. Evaluation is to be conducted under
the equal responsibility of both the internal and external examiners. The number of candidates
evaluated per day should not exceed 20. Students shall be allowed for the examination only on
submitting the duly certified record. The external examiner shall endorse the record.
Course Level Assessment Questions (Examples only):
Course Outcome 1 (CO1): Microwave Experiments
1) Verify the relation λc = 2a .

2) Find the unknown impedance of the given load using Transmission line equation and
verify using Smith chart.
3) Compare the reflection coefficient of the given horn antenna and matched termination.
4) Find the coupling coefficient of the given Directional Coupler.
5) Plot Reflex Klystron repeller mode characteristics.
6) Find the threshold voltage of Gunn diode from its characteristics.
Course Outcome 2 (CO2): Optical Experiments

1) Find the numerical aperture and V number of the given fiber.
2) Obtain the bending loss and attenuation loss of the given fiber.
3) Plot the V-I characteristics of Laser diode.
4) Plot the V-I characteristics of LED.
List of Experiments:
I. MICROWAVE EXPERIMENTS (Minimum Four Experiments are mandatory)
1. Reflex Klystron Mode Characteristics.

2. GUNN diode characteristics.
3. VSWR and Frequency measurement.
4. Verify the relation between Guide wave length, free space wave length and cut off
wave length for rectangular wave guide.
5. Unknown load impedance measurement using smith chart and verification using
transmission line equation.
6. Measurement of Magic Tee characteristics.
7. Directional Coupler Characteristics.
8. Crystal Index Measurement.
II. OPTICAL EXPERIMENTS (Minimum Three Experiments are mandatory)
1. Setting up of Fiber optic Digital link.

2. Measurement of Numerical Aperture of a fiber.
3. Study of losses in Optical fiber.
4. Voltage vs. Current (V-I) characteristics of Laser Diode.
5. Voltage vs. Current (V-I) characteristics of LED.
6. Characteristics of Photodiode
III. ANTENNA EXPERIMENTS (Minimum Three Experiments are mandatory)
1. Familiarization of any antenna simulation software.

2. Simulation of Dipole Antenna.
3. Simulation of Patch Antenna.
4. Simulation of Antenna Array.
5. Study of Vector Network Analyzer.
6. Antenna Pattern Measurement
Text Books
2. Gred Keiser Optical Fiber Communication 5/e Mc Graw Hill, 2013
3. Balanis, Antenna Theory and Design, 3/e, Wiley Publications.
References
1. John D. Krauss, Antennas for all Applications, 3/e, TMH.
2. Thomas A. Milligan, Modern Antenna Design, IEEE PRESS, 2/e, Wiley Inter science.
3. N.O. Sadiku and S.V. Kulkarni, Principles of Electromagnetics, Sixth Edition, Oxford
University Press, India, 2015 (Asian adaptation of 'M.N.O. Sadiku, Elements of
Electromagnetics, Sixth International Edition, Oxford University Press')
ECQ413 SEMINAR
PWS 0 0 3 2
Preamble: The course ‘Seminar’ is intended to enable a B.Tech graduate to read, understand,
present and prepare report about an academic document. The learner shall search in the
literature including peer reviewed journals, conference, books, project reports etc., and
identify an appropriate paper/thesis/report in her/his area of interest, in consultation with
her/his seminar guide. This course can help the learner to experience how a presentation can
be made about a selected academic document and also empower her/him to prepare a
technical report.
Course Objectives:
 To do literature survey in a selected area of study.

 To understand an academic document from the literate and to give a presentation
about it.
 To prepare a technical report.
Course Outcomes [COs] : After successful completion of the course, the students will be able
to:
Identify academic documents from the literature which are related to her/his areas of
CO1
interest (Cognitive knowledge level: Apply).
Read and apprehend an academic document from the literature which is related to
CO2
her/ his areas of interest (Cognitive knowledge level: Analyze).
Prepare a presentation about an academic document (Cognitive knowledge
CO3
level: Create).
Give a presentation about an academic document (Cognitive knowledge level:
CO4
Apply).
CO5 Prepare a technical report (Cognitive knowledge level: Create).
CO1 2 2 1 1 2 1 3
CO2 3 3 2 3 2 1 3
CO3 3 2 3 1 2 3
CO4 3 2 1 3 3
CO5 3 3 3 3 2 2 2 3 3
Abstract POs defined by National Board of Accreditation
PO# Broad PO PO# Broad PO

PO1 Engineering Knowledge PO7 Environment and Sustainability
PO2 Problem Analysis PO8 Ethics
Design/Development of
PO3 PO9 Individual and team work
solutions
Conduct investigations of complex PO10 Communication
PO4 problems
PO5 Modern tool usage PO11 Project Management and Finance
PO6 The Engineer and Society PO12 Life long learning
General Guidelines
 The Department shall form an Internal Evaluation Committee (IEC) for the seminar
with academic coordinator for that program as the Chairperson/Chairman and seminar
coordinator & seminar guide as members. During the seminar presentation of a
student, all members of IEC shall be present.
 Formation of IEC and guide allotment shall be completed within a week after the
University examination (or last working day) of the previous semester.
 Guide shall provide required input to their students regarding the selection of topic/
paper.
 Choosing a seminar topic: The topic for a UG seminar should be current and broad
based rather than a very specific research work. It's advisable to choose a topic for the
Seminar to be closely linked to the final year project area. Every member of the project
team could choose or be assigned Seminar topics that covers various aspects linked to
the Project area.
 A topic/paper relevant to the discipline shall be selected by the student during the
semester break.
 Topic/Paper shall be finalized in the first week of the semester and shall be submitted
to the IEC.
 The IEC shall approve the selected topic/paper by the second week of the semester.
 Accurate references from genuine peer reviewed published material to be given in the
report and to be verified.
Evaluation pattern
Total marks: 100, only CIE, minimum required to pass 50
Seminar Guide: 20 marks (Background Knowledge – 10 (The guide shall give deserving
marks for a candidate based on the candidate's background knowledge about the topic
selected), Relevance of the paper/topic selected – 10).
Seminar Coordinator: 20 marks (Seminar Diary – 10 (Each student shall maintain a

seminar diary and the guide shall monitor the progress of the seminar work on a weekly
basis and shall approve the entries in the seminar diary during the weekly meeting with the
student), Attendance – 10).
Presentation: 40 marks to be awarded by the IEC (Clarity of presentation – 10,

Interactions – 10 (to be based on the candidate's ability to answer questions during the
interactive session of her/his presentation), Overall participation – 10 (to be given based on
her/his involvement during interactive sessions of presentations by other students), Quality
of the slides – 10).
Report: 20 marks to be awarded by the IEC (check for technical content, overall quality,
templates followed, adequacy of references etc.).
ECD415 PROJECT PHASE I
PWS 0 0 6 2
Preamble: The course ‘Project Work’ is mainly intended to evoke the innovation and invention
skills in a student. The course will provide an opportunity to synthesize and apply the knowledge
and analytical skills learned, to be developed as a prototype or simulation. The project extends to
2 semesters and will be evaluated in the 7th and 8th semester separately, based on the achieved
objectives. One third of the project credits shall be completed in 7th semester and two third in 8th
semester. It is recommended that the projects may be finalized in the thrust areas of the respective
engineering stream or as interdisciplinary projects. Importance should be given to address societal
problems and developing indigenous technologies.
Course Objectives
 To apply engineering knowledge in practical problem solving.
 To foster innovation in design of products, processes or systems.
 To develop creative thinking in finding viable solutions to engineering problems.
Course Outcomes [COs] :After successful completion of the course, the students will be able to:
Model and solve real world problems by applying knowledge across domains
CO1
(Cognitive knowledge level: Apply).
Develop products, processes or technologies for sustainable and socially relevant
CO2
applications (Cognitive knowledge level: Apply).
Function effectively as an individual and as a leader in diverse teams and to
CO3
comprehend and execute designated tasks (Cognitive knowledge level: Apply).
Plan and execute tasks utilizing available resources within timelines, following
CO4
ethical and professional norms (Cognitive knowledge level: Apply).
Identify technology/research gaps and propose innovative/creative solutions
CO5
(Cognitive knowledge level: Analyze).
Organize and communicate technical and scientific findings effectively in written
CO6
and oral forms (Cognitive knowledge level: Apply).
CO1 2 2 2 1 2 2 2 1 1 1 1 2
CO2 2 2 2 1 3 3 1 1 1 1
CO3 3 2 2 1
CO4 2 3 2 2 3 2
CO5 2 3 3 1 2 1
CO6 2 2 2 3 1 1
PO# Broad PO PO# Broad PO
PO3 Design/Development of solutions PO9 Individual and team work

Conduct investigations of PO10 Communication
PO4
complex problems
PO6 The Engineer and Society PO12 Lifelong learning
PROJECT PHASE I
Phase 1 Target
 Literature study/survey of published literature on the assigned topic

 Formulation of objectives
 Formulation of hypothesis/ design/ methodology
 Formulation of work plan and task allocation.
 Block level design documentation
 Seeking project funds from various agencies
 Preliminary Analysis/Modeling/Simulation/Experiment/Design/Feasibility study
 Preparation of Phase 1 report
Evaluation Guidelines & Rubrics
Total: 100 marks (Minimum required to pass: 50 marks).
 Project progress evaluation by guide: 30 Marks.

 Interim evaluation by the Evaluation Committee: 20 Marks.
 Final Evaluation by the Evaluation Committee: 30 Marks.
 Project Phase - I Report (By Evaluation Committee): 20 Marks.
(The evaluation committee comprises HoD or a senior faculty member, Project coordinator
and project supervisor).
Evaluation by the Guide
The guide/supervisor shall monitor the progress being carried out by the project groups on a
regular basis. In case it is found that progress is unsatisfactory it shall be reported to the
Department Evaluation Committee for necessary action. The presence of each student in the group
and their involvement in all stages of execution of the project shall be ensured by the guide.
Project evaluation by the guide: 30 Marks. This mark shall be awarded to the students in his/her
group by considering the following aspects:
Topic Selection: innovativeness, social relevance etc. (2)
Problem definition: Identification of the social, environmental and ethical issues of the project
problem. (2)
Purpose and need of the project: Detailed and extensive explanation of the purpose and need of
the project. (3)
Project Objectives: All objectives of the proposed work are well defined; Steps to be followed to
solve the defined problem are clearly specified. (2)
Project Scheduling & Distribution of Work among Team members: Detailed and extensive
Scheduling with timelines provided for each phase of project. Work breakdown structure well
defined. (3)
Literature survey: Outstanding investigation in all aspects. (4)
Student’s Diary/ Daily Log: The main purpose of writing daily diary is to cultivate the habit of
documenting and to encourage the students to search for details. It develops the students’ thought
process and reasoning abilities. The students should record in the daily/weekly activity diary the
day to day account of the observations, impressions, information gathered and suggestions given,
if any. It should contain the sketches & drawings related to the observations made by the students.
The daily/weekly activity diary shall be signed after every day/week by the guide. (7)
Individual Contribution: The contribution of each student at various stages. (7)
EVALUATION RUBRICS for PROJECT Phase I: Interim Evaluation
No. Parameters Marks Poor Fair Very Good Outstanding

The team has identified a topic.
Topic The team has failed to come Good evidence of the group The group has brainstormed in an
The originally selected topic
identification, with a relevant topic in time. thinking and brainstorming on excellent manner on what they were
lacks substance and needs to
selection, Needed full assistance to find what they are going to build. The going to build. The topic selected is
be revised. There were
formulation of a topic from the guide. They results of the brainstorming are highly relevant, real world problem
suggestions given to improve
objectives do not respond to documented and the selection of and is potentially innovative. The
1-a 10 the relevance and quality of the
and/or suggestions from the topic is relevant. The review of group shows extreme interest in the
project topic. Only a few
literature evaluation committee and/or related references was good, but topic and has conducted extensive
relevant references were
survey. the guide. No literature there is scope of improvement. literature survey in connection with
consulted/ studied and there is
(Group review was conducted. The Objectives formed with good the topic. The team has come up
no clear evidence to show the
assessment) team tried to gather easy clarity, however some objectives with clear objectives which are
team's understanding on the
information without verifying are not realistic enough. feasible.
same. Some objectives
[CO1] the authenticity. No
identified, but not clear enough.
objectives formed yet.
(0 – 3 Marks) (4 – 6 Marks) (7 - 9 Marks) (10 Marks)

Excellent evidence of enterprising
and extensive project planning.
Gantt charts were used to depict
Project detailed project scheduling. A
Good evidence of planning
Planning, No evidence of planning or Some evidence of a primary project management/version
done. Materials were listed and
Scheduling scheduling of the project. plan. There were some ideas on control tool is used to track the
thought out, but the plan
and The students did not plan the materials /resources project, which shows familiarity
wasn't quite complete.
Resource/ what they were going to required, but not really thought with modern tools. All materials /
Schedules were prepared, but
Tasks build or plan on what out. The students have some resources were identified and listed
not detailed, and needs
Identification materials / resources to use idea on the finances required, and anticipation of procuring time
1-b 10 improvement. Project journal is
and in the project. The students but they have not formalized a is done. Detailed budgeting is done.
presented but it is not complete
allocation. do not have any idea on the budget plan. Schedules were All tasks were identified and
in all respect / detailed. There
(Group budget required. The team not prepared. The project incorporated in the schedule. A
is better task allocation and
assessment) has not yet decided on who journal has no details. Some well-kept project journal shows
individual members understand
does what. No project journal evidence on task allocation evidence for all the above, in
[CO4] about their tasks. There is
kept. among the team members. addition to the interaction with the
room for improvement.
project guide. Each member knows
well about their individual tasks.

Phase 1 Interim Evaluation Total Marks: 20
EVALUATION RUBRICS for PROJECT Phase I: Final Evaluation
Sl.
Formulation
None of the team members The students have some The students are comfortable Shows clear evidence of having a
of Design
show any evidence of knowledge on the design with design methods adopted, well- defined design methodology and
and/or
knowledge about the design procedure to be adopted, and and they have made some adherence to it. Excellent knowledge
Methodology
and and the methodology adopted the methodologies. However, the progress as per the plan. The in design procedure and its
1-c 5 till now/ to be adopted in the team has not made much methodologies are understood adaptation. Adherence to project
Progress.
(Group later stages. The team has progress in the design, and yet to a large extent. plan is commendable.
assessment) not progressed from the to catch up with the project
[CO1] previous stage of evaluation. plan.
(0 – 1 Marks) (2 – 3 Marks) (4 Marks) (5 Marks)
The student show some interest The student shows very good
Individual and The student does not show interest in project, and takes up The student takes a leadership
and participates in some of the
any interest in the project tasks and attempts to complete position and supports the other
Teamwork activities. However, the activities
1-d activities, and is a passive them. Shows excellent team members and leads the project.
Leadership are mostly easy and superficial
10 member. responsibility and team skills. Shows clear evidence of leadership.
( Individual in nature.
assessment) Supports the other members
[CO3] well.
Preliminary The team has not done any The team has started doing There is some evidence to show Strong evidence for excellent
Analysis/ preliminary work with respect some preliminary work with that the team has done good progress in the project. The team
Modeling / to the analysis/modeling/ respect to the project. The amount of preliminary has completed the required
1-e
Simulation/ simulation/experiment/desig students however are not investigation and design/ preliminary work already and are
10
Experiment / n/feasibility study/ algorithm prepared enough for the work analysis/ modeling etc. poised to finish the phase I in an
Design/ development. and they need to improve a lot. They can improve further. excellent manner. They have shown
Feasibility results to prove their progress.
study
[CO1]
The project stages are extensively
documented in the report.
Professional documentation tools
The team did not document
Some documentation is done, like LaTeX were used to document
Documentatio the work at all. The project
but not extensive. Interaction Most of the project details were the progress of the project along
n and journal/diary is not
1-f with the guide is minimal. documented well enough. with the project journal. The
presentation. 5 presented. The presentation
Presentation include some There is scope for documentation structure is well-
(Individual & was shallow in content and
points of interest, but overall improvement. The presentation planned and can easily grow into the
group dull in appearance.
quality needs to be improved. is satisfactory. Individual project report.
assessment). The individual student has no
Individual performance to be performance is good.
idea on the presentation of
improved. The presentation is done
[CO6] his/her part.
professionally and with great clarity.
The individual’s performance is
excellent.
Total 30 Phase - I Final Evaluation Marks: 30

EVALUATION RUBRICS for PROJECT Phase I: Report Evaluation
Sl.
Project report shows

The prepared report is Project report follows the
evidence of systematic
shallow and not as per standard format to some The report is exceptionally good. Neatly
documentation. Report is
standard format. It does not extent. However, its organized. All references cited
1-g Report [CO6] 20 following the standard
follow proper organization. organization is not very good. properly. Diagrams/Figures, Tables and
format and there are only a
Contains mostly Language needs to be equations are properly numbered, and
few issues. Organization of
Unacknowledged content. improved. All references are listed and clearly shown. Language is
the report is good. Most
Lack of effort in preparation not cited properly in the excellent and follows standard styles.
of references are cited
is evident. report.
properly.
(0 - 7 Marks) (8 - 12 Marks) (13 - 19 Marks) (20 Marks)
Phase - I Project Report Marks: 20
SEMESTER VII
PROGRAM ELECTIVE II
OPTICAL FIBER CATEGORY L T P CREDITS

ECT413
COMMUNICATION PEC 2 1 0 3
Preamble: This course aims to introduce the concepts of light transmission through optical
fibers and introduce the working of optical components.
Prerequisite: Basic concepts of Solid State Devices
Understand the working and classification of optical fibers in terms of propagation

CO 1
modes
CO 2 Solve problems of transmission characteristics and losses in optical fiber
Explain the constructional features and the characteristics of optical sources and
CO 3
detectors
CO4 Describe the operations of optical amplifiers
CO5 Understand the concept of WDM, FSO and LiFi

PO PO PO 3 PO 4 PO 5 PO 6 PO 7 PO 8 PO 9 PO PO PO
1 2 10 11 12
CO 1 3 3 1 1
CO 2 3 3 2 1
CO 3 3 3 2 1
CO 4 3 3 1 1
CO 5 3 3 2 1
Assessment Pattern
Bloom’s Category Continuous Assessment End Semester Examination
Tests
1 2
Remember K1 10 10 10
Apply K3 10 10 30
Analyse K4
Evaluate
Create
Mark distribution
Total CIE ESE ESE Duration
Marks
150 50 100 3 hours
Attendance : 10marks
Continuous Assessment Test(2numbers) : 25 marks
Assignment/Quiz/Course project : 15marks
End Semester Examination Pattern: There will be two parts; Part A and Part B. Part A
contain 10 questions with 2 questions from each module, having 3 marks for each question.
Students should answer all questions. Part B contains 2 questions from each module of which
student should answer any one. Each question can have maximum 2 sub-divisions and carry
14 marks.
Course Outcome 1 (CO1): Know the classification and working of optical fiber with
different modes of signal propagation
1. Illustrate the types of optical fibers with refractive index profiles.
2. Define Photonic Crystal Fibers and list the types.
3. What is the necessity of cladding for an optical fiber?
Course Outcome 2 (CO2): Understand the transmission characteristics and losses in optical
fiber
1. Describe the various attenuation losses incurred by light signal while transmitting
through a fiber.
2. What is meant by group velocity dispersion?
3. An optical fiber has an attenuation coefficient of 0.5dB/km at 1310nm. Find the optical
power at 25km if 500µW of optical power is launched into the fiber.
Course Outcome 3 (CO3): Describe the constructional features and the characteristics of
optical sources and detectors
1. What is a heterojunction? How it increases the radiance and efficiency of LEDs?
2. Draw the basic block diagram of an optical receiver and explain.
Course Outcome 4 (CO4): Describe the performance of optical amplifiers

1. What are salient features of semiconductor optical amplifiers?
2. Explain the amplification mechanism with energy level diagram in an EDFA.
Course Outcome 5 (CO5): Know the concept of WDM, FSO and LiFi
1. What are the underlying principles of the WDM techniques?
2. Explain in detail diffraction gratings.
3. Write a note on optical Add / Drop multiplexers.
SYLLABUS
Module 1:
Optical fiber Communications: The general system, Advantages of optical fiber communication,
Optical fiber waveguides: Ray theory transmission, Modes in planar guide, Phase and group velocity
Fibres: Types and refractive index profiles, Step index fibers, Graded index fibers, Single mode
fibers, Cutoff wavelength, Mode field diameter, effective refractive index. Fibre materials, photonic
crystal fibre, index guiding PCF, photonic band-gap fibres, fibre cables.
Module 2:
Transmission characteristics of optical fiber: Attenuation, Material absorption losses, Linear
scattering losses, Nonlinear scattering losses, Fiber bend loss, Dispersion, Chromatic dispersion,
Intermodal dispersion: Multimode step index fiber.
Optical Fiber Connectors: Fiber alignment and joint loss, Fiber splices, Fiber connectors, Fiber
couplers.
Module 3:
Optical sources:LEDs and LDs, structures, characteristics,modulators using LEDs and LDs.
coupling with fibres, noise in Laser diodes, Amplified Spontaneous Emission noise, effects of Laser
diode noise in fibre communications
Optical detectors:Types and characteristics, structure and workingof PIN and AP, noise in
detectors, comparison of performance.Optical receivers, Ideal photo receiver and quantum limit
ofdetection.
Module 4:
Optical Amplifiers:basic concept, applications, types, doped fibre amplifiers, EDFA, basic theory,
structure and working, Semiconductor laser amplifier, Raman amplifiers, TDFA, amplifier
configurations, performance comparison.
Module 5:
The WDM concept, WDM standards, WDM components, couplers, splitters, Add/ Drop
multiplexers, gratings, tunable filters. Introduction to free space optics, LiFi technology and VLC.
Optical Time Domain Reflectometer (OTDR) – fault detection length and refractive index
measurements.
Text Books
1. Gerd Keiser, Optical Fiber Communications, 5/e, McGraw Hill, 2013.
2. Mishra and Ugale, Fibre optic Communication, Wiley, 2013.
Reference Books
1. Chakrabarthi, Optical Fibre Communication, McGraw Hill, 2015.
2. Hebbar, Optical fibre communication, Elsevier, 2014
3. John M Senior- Optical communications, 3/e, Pearson, 2009.
4. Joseph C. Palais, Fibre Optic Communications, 5/e Pearson, 2013.
5. Keiser, Optical Communication Essentials (SIE), 1/e McGraw Hill Education New Delhi,
2008.
Course Contents and Lecture Schedule
No. of
No Topic
Lectures
1 Optical fiber Communications (8)
1.1 The general system, Advantages of optical fiber communication 1
1.2 Optical fiber waveguides: Ray theory transmission 1
1.3 Modes in planar guide, Phase and group velocity 1
Fibres: Types and refractive index profiles, Step index fibers, Graded 2
1.4
index fibers, Single mode fibers
1.5 Cutoff wavelength, Mode field diameter, effective refractive index 1
Fibre materials, photonic crystal fibre, index guiding PCF, photonic 2
1.6
band-gap fibres, fibre cables.
2 Transmission characteristics of optical fiber: (7)
2.1 Attenuation, Material absorption losses 1
2.2 Linear scattering losses 1
2.3 Nonlinear scattering losses, Fiber bend loss 1
Dispersion, Chromatic dispersion, Intermodal dispersion: Multimode 2
2.4
step index fiber
2.5 Optical Fiber Connectors: Fiber alignment and joint loss 1
2.6 Fiber splices, Fiber connectors, Fiber couplers 1
3 Optical sources and detectors: (8)
LEDs and LDs, structures, characteristics, modulators using LEDs 2
3.1
and LDs
3.2 coupling with fibres, noise in Laser diodes 1
Amplified Spontaneous Emission noise, effects of Laser diode noise 1
3.3
in fibre communications
Optical detectors: Types and characteristics, structure and working of 2
3.4
PIN and AP
3.5 noise in detectors, comparison of performance 1
3.6 Optical receivers, Ideal photo receiver and quantum limit of detection. 1
4 Optical Amplifiers: (6)

4.1 basic concept, applications, types 1
4.2 doped fibre amplifiers, EDFA, basic theory, structure and working 2
4.3 Semiconductor laser amplifier 1
4.4 Raman amplifiers, TDFA 1
4.5 amplifier configurations, performance comparison 1
5 The WDM concept (6)

5.1 WDM standards, WDM components 1
5.2 couplers, splitters, Add/ Drop multiplexers 1
5.3 gratings, tunable filters 1
5.4 Introduction to free space optics, LiFi technology and VLC 1
Optical Time Domain Reflectometer (OTDR) – fault detection length 2

5.5
and refractive index measurements.
Total 35

SEVENTH SEMESTER B.TECH DEGREE EXAMINATION, (Model Question Paper)
Course Code: ECT413

Program: Electronics and Communication Engineering
Course Name: Optical Fiber Communication
Max.Marks: 100 Duration: 3Hours
PART- A
Answer ALL Questions. Each Carries 3 mark.
1. Define acceptance angle and critical angle. K1

2. What is the necessity of cladding for an optical fiber? K3
3. What is meant by group velocity dispersion? K2
4. Explain intermodal dispersion? K2
5. Differentiate between spontaneous and stimulated emission. K1
6. Draw the three key transition process involved in LASER action. K1
7. Compare EDFA and TDFA. K2
8. What is the principle of Raman amplifiers? K2
9. Define FSO concept. List the advantages. K2
10. Write short note on LiFi technology. K2
PART – B
Answer one question from each module; each question carries 14 marks.
Module – I
11. With block diagram explain a general light wave system. What are 7 CO1 K2
a) the advantages of optical communication?
11. i) Define Photonic Crystal Fibers . 7 CO1 K2
b) ii) Consider an optical fiber of 50 µm diameter, core index n1 = 1.5,
and cladding index n2 = 1.49 for operation at λ = 1.31 µm. How
many modes does this fiber support?
OR
12.a) Illustrate the types of optical fibers with refractive index profiles. 6 CO1 K2
12.b) Explain the following : 8 CO1 K2
(i) Acceptance angle (ii) Numerical aperture
If for a given optical fiber the refractive index of cladding and core
are 1.45 and 1.47 respectively, calculate the numerical aperture and
angle of acceptance in air.
Module – II
13. Explain macro bending and micro bending losses with a neat 10 CO2 K2
a) diagram.
13. An optical fiber has an attenuation coefficient of 0.5dB/km at 4 CO2 K3
b) 1310nm. Find the optical power at 25km if 500µW of optical power
is launched into the fiber.
OR
14.a) Describe the various attenuation losses incurred by light signal 9 CO2 K2
while transmitting through a fiber.
14.b) Given an optical fiber of 50 µm diameter, core index of 1.5, and 5 CO2 K2
cladding index 1.49 for operation at λ = 1.31 µm, What would be
the pulse spread due to modal dispersion over a distance of 10 km?
Module-III
15 a) With neat sketch explain the working of pin photodiode and APD 10 CO3 K2
15 b) What is meant by responsivity? How it is related to quantum 4 CO3 K3
efficiency?
OR
16a What is a heterojunction? How it increases the radiance and 7 CO3 K3
efficiency of LEDs?
16b Draw the basic block diagram of an optical receiver and explain. 7 CO3 K2
Module-IV
17 a) Explain the amplification mechanism with energy level diagram in 8 CO4 K2

an EDFA.
17 b) Compare the performance of different optical amplifiers 6 CO4 K2
OR
18 a) Explain the working of semiconductor optical amplifiers. What are 7 CO4 K2
salient features of semiconductor optical amplifiers?
18 b) What are different amplifier configurations? Explain the basic 7 CO4 K2
working principle of optical amplifiers.
Module-V
19 a) With neat sketch explain WDM scheme. 7 CO5 K2
19 b) Illustrate the working principle of diffraction gratings. 7 CO5 K2

OR
20 a) Explain with block diagram the working of optical add / drop 7 CO5 K2
multiplexer. Explain why it is required in optical
communication system.
20 b) How does an OTDR works? Explain the fault detection and 7 CO5 K2
refractive index measurement.
–
ECT423 COMPUTER NETWORKS
PEC 2 1 0 3
.
Preamble: The course aims to expose students to computer networks taking a top-down
approach of viewing from the layer of user applications and zooming into link layer
protocols. The principles of various protocols used in every layer are studied in detail. A brief
introduction to mathematical modelling of queues with an application to a single example is
included.
Prerequisite: MAT 204 Probability, Random Process and Numerical Methods
CO1 K2 Describe the protocols used in web and email applications.

CO2 K4 Analyse problems pertaining to reliable data transfer, flow control and
congestion over a TCP network.
CO3 K3 Apply Dijkstra’s algorithm and distance-vector algorithm in the context of
routing over computer networks.
CO4 K4 Analyze the performance of collision avoidance algorithms in random
access protocols such as ALOHA.
CO5 K4 Analyze the delay performance of an ARQ system using standard queueing
models.
PO PO PO PO
PO 2 PO 3 PO 4 PO 5 PO 6 PO 7 PO 8 PO 9
1 10 11 12
CO 1 3 3 3 2
CO 2 3 3 3 2
CO 3 3 3 3 2
CO 4 3 3 3 2
CO 5
Assessment Pattern

Tests
1 2
Remember
Apply K3 20 20 40
Analyse K4 20 20 30
Evaluate
Create
Mark distribution
150 50 100 3 hours
14 marks. Mark patterns are as per the syllabus with 60 % for theory and 40% for
logical/numerical problems, derivation and proof.
Course Outcome 1 (CO1): Describe the protocols used in web and email applications.
1. Describe the HTTP message format
2. Compare and contrast two application layer protocols SMTP and HTTP
Course Outcome 2 (CO2: Analyse problems pertaining to reliale data transfer, flow control
and congestion over a TCP network.
1. Why is it that voice and video traffic is often sent over TCP rather than UDP in
today’s Internet?
2. Suppose two TCP connections are present over some bottleneck link of rate R bps.
Both connections have a huge file to send (in the same direction over the bottleneck
link). The transmissions of the files start at the same time. What transmission rate
would TCP like to give to each of the connections?
Course Outcome 3 (CO3): Apply Dijkstra’s algorithm and distance-vector algorithm in the
context of routing over computer networks.
1. Consider the following network. Compute the shortest-path from the node D to all
other nodes using Dijkstra’s shortest path algorithm. (Numbers indicated shows the
link costs).
2. Consider a router that interconnects three subnets: Subnet 1, Subnet 2, and Subnet 3.
Suppose all of the interfaces in each of these three subnets are required to have the
prefix 223.1.17/24. Also suppose that Subnet 1 is required to support at least 60
interfaces, Subnet 2 is to support at least 90 interfaces, and Subnet 3 is to support at
least 12 interfaces. Provide three network addresses (of the form a.b.c.d/x) that satisfy
these constraints.
Course Outcome 4 (CO4):Analyze the performance of link-layer protocols in general,

random access protocols in particular in terms of efficiency and collision avoidance
capability.
1. Describe how slotted ALOHA achieves multiple access.
2. Distinguish between TDM, FDM and random access.
Course Outcome 5 (CO5):Analyze the delay performance of an ARQ system using standard
queueing models.
1. Consider a network where packets arrive via N different nodes with different arrivate
rates. Illustrate the use of Littles law in this scenario to calcualte the average packet
delay inside the network.
2. Customers arrive in a restaurant at a rate of 5 per minute, and wait to receive their
order for an average of 5 minutes. Customers eat in the restaurant with a probability
of 0.5, and carry their order out without eating with probability 0.5. What is the
average number of customers in the restaurant?
SYLLABUS

Components of computer networks Components of computer
network, Applications of computer network – the Internet, Definition
of protocol. Protocal standardization.
Network edges, Network core and Network links Client and server
hosts, connectionless and connection-oriented services provided to
hosts, circuit-switched versus packet-swtiched network cores, FDM,
TDM versus statistical multiplexing, Datagram versus Virtual-circuit
networks. Access and physical media.
I 8
Delay and loss in packet-swtiched networks Types of delay, Packet
loss. Layered Architecture: Protocol layering, Internet protocol stack,
Message encapsulation.
Application Layer Communication between processes, Web

application: HTTP, Mssage format, Email application: SMTP,
Message format, MIME, POP3, IMAP and Web-based email. Domain
Name System (DNS)
Transport Layer Multiplexing and demultiplexing: connectionless

and connection-oriented. UDP. Procols for reliable data transfer: ARQ
protocols, stop-and-wait protocol, alternating-bit protocol, Go-back-
II N, Selective Repeat. 7
TCP Connection, segment structure, RTT estimate, Flow control.

Congestion Control General approaches. TCP congestion control.
Network Layer Datagram versus virtual-circuit network service,

Router architecture, IPv4: datagram format, addressing, address
assignement – manual and DHCP, NAT. ICMP. IPv6.
III 7
Routing Algorithms Link-State (Dijkstra’s) Algorithm, Distance-
vector algorithm. Routing in Internet – RIP, OSPF, BGP. Broadcast
and Multicast.
Link Layer Services of link layer, Error detection and corretion –

checksum, CRC. Multiple access protocols – Channel partitioning,
random access, taking-turns. ALOHA – pure and slotted, efficiency,
IV 7
CSMA, CSMA/CA, CSMA/CD. Link layer addressing: MAC
address, ARP, DHCP. Ethernet. Link virtualization: ATM, MPLS
Wireless Networks IEEE 802.11 wireless LAN
Queueing models in computer networks Littles theorem and

V 8
examples. Review of Poisson process. M/G/1 Queue. Delay analysis
of Go-Back-N ARQ system.
Text Books
1. James F. Kurose, Keith W. Ross, Computer Networking: A Top-Down Approach
Featuring the Internet, 3rd edition, Pearson
2. D. Bertsekas, RG Gallager, Data Networks, Prentice Hal
Reference Books
1. Larry L. Peterson, Bruce S. Davie, Computer Networks – A Systems Approach, Morgan
Kauffman
2. N. Abramson, F. Kuo, Computer Communication Networks, Prentice Hall
3. A. S. Tanenbaum, D. J. Wetherall, Computer Networks, Pearson
4. A. Kumar, D. Manjunath, J. Kuri, Communication Networking – An Analytical Approach,
Morgan Kauffman Series.
Course content and Lecture plan
No TOPIC No of Lectures
MODULE 1
1.1 Components of computer networks, Applications, Protocol, 1
Protocol standrdization
1.2 Hosts, connectionless and connection-oriented, circuit- 1
switching versus packet-swtiching in network core design,
FDM, TDM versus statistical multiplexing,
1.3 Datagram versus Virtual-circuit networks. Examples of access 1
networks, and examples of physical media.
1.4 Types of delay, Packet loss. 1
1.5 Layered Architecture, Protocol layering, Internet protocol 1
stack, Message encapsulation.
1.6 Communication between processes, HTTP, Mssage format 1
1.7 Email application: SMTP, Message format, MIME, POP3, 1
IMAP and Web-based email.
1.8 Domain Name System (DNS) 1
MODULE II
2.1 Services of transport layer, Multiplexing and demultiplexing. 1
Connectionless and connection-oriented transport. UDP.
2.2 Procols for reliable data transfer: ARQ protocols, stop-and- 3
wait protocol, alternating-bit protocol, Go-back-N, Selective
Repeat.
2.3 TCP Connection, TCP segment, RTT, Flow control. 1
2.4 Congestion, Congestion control. TCP congestion control. 2
MODULE III
3.1 Services of Network Layer,Recap of Datagram versus virtual- 1
circuit network service, Router.
3.2 IPv4 addressing, Address assignement – manual and DHCP, 2

NAT. ICMP. IPv6.
3.3 Link-State (Dijkstra’s) Algorithm, Distance-vector algorithm. 2
3.4 Routing in Internet – RIP, OSPF, BGP. Distinction between 2
Broadcast and Multicast routing.
MODULE IV
4.1 Services of link layer, Parity checks, checksum, CRC. 1
4.2 Multiple access protocols – Channel partitioning, random 1
access, taking-turns.
4.3 ALOHA – pure and slotted, efficiency, CSMA, CSMA/CA, 2
CSMA/CD.
4.4 Link layer addressing: MAC address, ARP, DHCP. 1
4.5 Ethernet 1
4.6 Link virtualization: ATM, MPLS 1
MODULE V
5.1 IEEE 802.11 wireless LAN 1
5.2 Mathematical modeling of queues/buffers. 1
5.3 Littles theorem and examples. 2
5.4 Review of Poisson process. M/G/1 Queue 1
5.5 Delay analysis of Go-Back-N ARQ system. 3
Simulation Assignments
Assignment 1:
1. Understanding protocols using Wireshark.
2. Wireshark is a standard network packet analyzer tool which can be used to analyze
how the different protocol layers work (by adding headers and other meta
information) to an application layer message.
3. Students can download Wireshark for their OS from

https://www.wireshark.org/download.html
4. Sample packet traces can be obtained from https://wiki.wireshark.org/SampleCaptures

or https://gitlab.com/wireshark/wireshark/-/wikis/SampleCaptures. Examples such as
TCP, DHCP, DNS can be viewed.
5. https://gaia.cs.umass.edu/kurose_ross/wireshark.php
Assignment 2: (requires Python/Matlab)
1. Programming/Implementation of Dijsktra’s and distance vector algorithm for shortest

path on a graph.
2. Representation of networks in a programming language – Sstudents can use

NetworkX library in Python for this.
3. Generation of random graphs (students can use inbuilt functions of NetworkX – see
for example https://networkx.org/documentation/stable/reference/generators.html)
4. Visualization of the generated graphs can be done using

https://networkx.org/documentation/stable/reference/drawing.html
5. Use inbuilt shortest path functions to obtain a baseline to test self-written code
https://networkx.org/documentation/stable/reference/algorithms/shortest_paths.html)
6. Implementation of Dijsktra’s algorithm (see

https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Dijkstra%27s_algorithm)
7. Implementation of Bellman Ford’s algorithm (https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Distance-

vector_routing_protocol)
8. Compare your answers with that of the inbuilt functions.
9. Do the assignment following the instructions here:

https://media.pearsoncmg.com/aw/aw_kurose_network_3/labs/lab6/lab6.html
Assignment 3: (understanding TCP)
1. Fully fledged simulation using NS3 can be given as a demonstration by the instructor
https://www.cse.iitb.ac.in/~mythili/teaching/cs224m_autumn2017/tcpsimpa/index.ht
ml

https://media.pearsoncmg.com/aw/aw_kurose_network_3/labs/lab5/lab5.html

https://media.pearsoncmg.com/ph/esm/ecs_kurose_compnetwork_8/cw/#interactivean
imations

https://media.pearsoncmg.com/ph/esm/ecs_kurose_compnetwork_8/cw/content/intera
ctiveanimations/tcp-congestion/index.html
Assignment 4: (basic queueing model and Little’s law)
1. Assignment 4 in the attached collection is a good to understand Littles law.

https://drive.google.com/file/d/1CXauy0ehYno1ih6Zwllc_2XFLIe7cH6s/view
https://media.pearsoncmg.com/ph/esm/ecs_kurose_compnetwork_8/cw/content/intera
ctiveanimations/queuing-loss-applet/index.html

VII SEMESTER B. TECH DEGREE EXAMINATION, (Model Question Paper)
Course Code: ECT423
Course Name: COMPUTER NETWORKS
Max. Marks: 100 Duration: 3 Hours
PART A
Answer all questions, each carries3marks

1 Compare and contrast circuit switching and packet switching. 3
2 Explain the concept of FTTH internet access. 3
3 How does the process-to-process delivery service is achieved in transport layer? 3
4 Describe stop-and-wait protocol for reliable data transfer. 3
5 Give the basic blocks in router architecture. 3
6 What are the different error reporting messages in ICMP? 3
7 Explain the frame structure of Ethernet. 3
8 Compare and contrast different random-access protocols. 3
9 Customers arrive in a restaurant at a rate of 5 per minute, and wait to receive their 3
order for an average of 5 minutes. Customers eat in the restaurant with a probability
of 0.5, and carry their order out without eating with probability 0.5. What is the
average number of customers in the restaurant?
10 Define M/G/1 queue. 3
PART B
Answer any one full question from each module carries14marks.
MODULE 1
11(a) How layered architecture helps in the efficient communication between hosts? 4
11(b) Explain the functions performed by the layers in the internet protocol stack. 10
OR
12(a) Two hosts A and B separated by a distance of m meters, connected by a single link 8
of rate R bps. The speed of propagation along the link is s m/s and host A is to send
a packet of size L bits to host B.
i) Express the propagation delay (𝑑𝑑𝑝𝑝 ) in terms of m and s.
ii) Express the transmission delay 𝑑𝑑𝑡𝑡 ) in terms of L and R.
iii) If m=1000meters, s=2.9 × 108 m/s, L=100bits. Find the transmission rate
of the link. (Assuming 𝑑𝑑𝑝𝑝 = 𝑑𝑑𝑡𝑡 )
12(b) Describe any one of the mail access protocols. 6
MODULE II
13(a) Explain how TCP provides a flow control service to its applications. 5
13(b) Compare and contrast TCP and UDP. Also explain the TCP segment structure. 9
OR
14(a) Host A and B are communicating over a TCP connection, and Host B has already 7
received from A all bytes up through byte 248. Suppose Host A then sends two
segments to Host B back-to-back. The first and second segments contain 40 and 60
bytes respectively. In the first segment, the sequence number is 249, the source port
number is 503, and the destination port number is 80. Host B sends an
acknowledgement whenever it receives a segment from Host A.
i) In the second segment, sent from Host A to B, what are the sequence
number, source port number, and destination port number?
ii) If the second segment arrives before the first segment, in the
acknowledgement of the first arriving segment. What is the
acknowledgement number?
iii) If the first segment arrives before the second segment, in the
acknowledgement of the first arriving segment, what is the
acknowledgement number, the source port number, and the destination
port number?
14(b) With the help of a neat diagram explain the operation of selective repeat ARQ. 7
MODULE III
15(a) Explain the datagram format in IPv4 7
15(b) Describe the Internet’s address assignment strategy using classless interdomain 7
routing.
OR
16(a) Describe the process of assigning IP address to a host in an organization using 5
DHCP protocol.
16(b) Consider the following network. Compute the shortest-path from the node D to all 9
other nodes using Dijkstra’s shortest path algorithm. (Numbers indicated shows the
link costs).
MODULE IV
17(a) Explain the multiple access protocol used in IEEE 802.3. 7
17(b) Explain the error detection mechanism using CRC with an example. 7
OR
18(a) Derive the efficiency of slotted ALOHA. 7
18(b) Explain how the physical address of a host is being mapped from its IP address 7
using address resolution protocol.
MODULE V
19(a) State and prove Littles theorem. 7
19(b) Explain the IEEE 802.11 MAC protocol. 7
OR
20(a) Derive an expression for the average packet delay in a Go-Back-N ARQ system. 7
20(b) Describe how a wireless station associates with an access point (AP) as per IEEE 7
802.11 protocol.
ECT433 OPTO-ELECTRONIC DEVICES
PEC 2 1 0 3
Preamble: This course aims to develop an insight over the working principles and performance
parameters of various optoelectronics devices used for optical networks and communication.
Prerequisite:ECT 201 Solid State Devices
CO 1 Understand physics of optical processes in semiconductors.
CO 2 Distinguish different optical sources used in optoelectronic applications.
CO 3 Analyse different types of photodetectors based on their performance parameters
CO 4 Explain various optical modulators and optoelectronic devices.
CO 5 Explain various optical devices used for optical communication.

PO 1 PO 2 PO 3 PO 4 PO 5 PO 6 PO 7 PO 8 PO 9 PO 10 PO 11 PO 12
CO 1 3 3 2
CO 2 3 3 3 1
CO 3 3 3 3 1
CO 4 3 3 2 2 2 2
CO 5 3 3 2 2 2 2
Assessment Pattern
Bloom’s Category Continuous End Semester
Assessment Tests Examination
1 2
Remember 10 10 20
Understand 30 30 60
Apply 10 10 20
Analyse
Evaluate
Create
Mark distribution
Total CIE ESE ESE
Marks Duration
150 50 100 3 hours

End Semester Examination Pattern:

There will be two parts; Part A and Part B. Part A contain 10 questions with 2 questions from each
module, having 3 marks for each question. Students should answer all questions. Part B contains 2
questions from each module of which student should answer any one. Each question can have
maximum 2 sub-divisions and carry 14 marks.
Course Outcome 1 (CO1): Understand physics of optical processes in semiconductors.

1. Explain radiative and non radiative recombination
2. Describe Band to Band Recombination
3. Explain various Light Production mechanisms
Course Outcome 2 (CO2): Distinguish different optical sources used in optoelectronic

applications
1. Explain the principle of operation of LED and LASER .
2. Explain DFB and DBR LASERS
Course Outcome 3 (CO3): Analyse different types of photodetectors based on their performance
parameters
1. Describe the characteristics of APD
2. Explain the different type of Noise and its effect in the performance of Photodetectors
Course Outcome 4 (CO4): Explain various optical modulators and optoelectronic devices.
1. Explain the principle of operation of Electro-Optic Modulators and Acousto-Optic Modulators.
2. Explain different types of solar cells and its characteristics
Course Outcome 5 (CO5): Explain various optical devices used for optical communication.
1. Explain Fiber Bragg Grating and its refractive index profile.
2. Describe Optical Bistable Devices. Explain various methods for achieving optical bistability
SYLLABUS
Module 1 – Fundamentals of Semiconductor Optoelectronics

Optical processes in semiconductors: electron-hole generation and recombination, Absorption,
Auger recombination, Heat generation and dissipation, Heat sources.Various light production
mechanisms,Indirect band gap materials, Semiconductors used for optical Applications, Basic
principle of LED and LASER, Spontaneous emission and Stimulated Emission, Coherence of
sources.
Module 2 – Optical Sources

Construction and Operation of LEDs, Heterojunctios, Surface Emitter and Edge Emitter LEDs,
Characteristics of LEDs, LASERs, Threshold Condition for lasing, Line Broadening Mechanisms,
Fabry-Perot Lasers, Distributed Feedback(DFB) Lasers, Distributed Bragg Reflector(DBR) Lasers,
Vertical Cavity Surface Emitting Lasers (VCSELs), In-Fibre Lasers.
Module 3 – Optical Detectors

Principle of Photo Detection,Working of LDR, PN diode, PIN diode, Avalanche Photodiode
(APD), Characteristics of APD, Resonant Cavity Photo detector, Photo Transistor, Quantum
efficiency, Responsivity, Noise in Photo detectors, Thermal Noise, Dark Current, Shot Noise,
Quantum limit of Optical Detection.
Module 4 – Optoelectronic Devices and Modulators

Optoelectronic ICs, Advantages, Liquid Crystal Display, Structure, TFT display, Structure,
Polymer LED, Organic LED, Optical Modulators using PN junction, Electro-Optic Modulators,
Acousto-Optic Modulators, Raman-Nath Modulators, Optical switching and Logic devices,Optical
Memory.
Solar Cells: basic working principle, VI Characteristics, Different types of solar cells, Dye
sensitized solar cells (DSSC), Perovskite Solar cells.
Module 5 – Optical Devices in Optoelectronic Networks

Introduction to optical components, Splitters and Couplers, Directional Couplers, Fiber Bragg
Gratings, Multiplexers, Attenuators, Isolators, Circulators, Fixed Filters, Tunable Filters, Add
Drop Multiplexers, Waveguide Grating Routers, Optical Cross Connects, Wavelength Convertors,
Optical Bistable Devices.
Text Book
1. Pallab Bhattacharya: Semiconductor Optoelectronic Devices, Pearson, 2009
References
1. Mark Csele, Fundamentals of Light Sources and Lasers, Wiley-Interscience, 2004
2. W.Koechner,M.Bass, Solid State Lasers, Springer, 2003
3. Yariv, Photonics Optical Electronics in modern communication, 6/e ,Oxford University
Press,2006.
4. Harry J R Dutton, Understanding Optical Communications, IBM 1/e 1998
5. Alastair Buckley, Organic Light-Emitting Diodes, Woodhead, 2013
6. Stephen J Fonash, Solar Cell Device Physics, Elsevier 2/e, 2010
No Topic No. of
Lectures
1 Fundamentals of Semiconductor Optoelectronics
1.1 Optical processes in semiconductors: electron-hole generation and 1
recombination, Absorption.
1.2 Auger recombination, Heat generation and dissipation, Heat sources. 2
1.3 Various light production mechanisms 1
1.4 Indirect band gap materials, Semiconductors used for optical Applications 1
1.5 Basic principle of LED and LASER, Spontaneous emission and Stimulated 2
Emission, Coherence of sources.
2 Optical Sources
2.1 Construction and Operation of LEDs, Heterojunctios 1
2.2 Surface Emitter and Edge Emitter LEDs, Characteristics of LEDs 1
2.3 LASERs, Threshold Condition for lasing, Line Broadening Mechanisms 1
2.4 Fabry-Perot Lasers, Distributed Feedback(DFB) Lasers 1
2.5 Distributed Bragg Reflector (DBR) Lasers, Vertical Cavity Surface Emitting 2
Lasers (VCSELs), In-Fibre Lasers.
3 Optical Detectors
3.1 Principle of Photo Detection, Working of LDR, PN diode, PIN diode 1
3.2 Avalanche Photodiode (APD), Characteristics of APD 1
3.3 Resonant Cavity Photo detector, Photo Transistor 1
3.4 Quantum efficiency, Responsivity 1
3.5 Noise in Photo detectors, Thermal Noise, Dark Current, Shot Noise, 2
Quantum limit of Optical Detection
4 Optoelectronic Devices and Modulators

4.1 Optoelectronic ICs, Advantages 1
4.2 Liquid Crystal Display, Structure, TFT display, Structure 1
4.3 Polymer LED, Organic LED, Optical Modulators using PN junction 1
4.4 Electro-Optic Modulators, Acousto-Optic Modulators, Raman-Nath 2
Modulators
4.5 Optical switching and Logic devices, Optical Memory 2
4.6 Solar Cells: basic working principle, VI Characteristics, Different types of 1
solar cells
4.7 Dye sensitized solar cells (DSSC), Perovskite Solar cells 1
5 Optical Devices in Optoelectronic Networks

5.1 Introduction to optical components, Splitters and Couplers, 1
5.2 Directional Couplers, Fiber Bragg Gratings, Multiplexers, Attenuators, 3
Isolators, Circulators, Fixed Filters, Tunable Filters

5.3 Add Drop Multiplexers, Waveguide Grating Routers, Optical Cross 2
Connects
5.4 Wavelength Convertors, Optical Bistable Devices 1
Model Question Paper
MODEL QUESTION PAPER
ECT433 OPTO-ELECTRONIC DEVICES
Time: 3 hours Max. Marks:100
PART A
Answer all questions. Each question carries 3 marks.
1. State the differences between Spontaneous emission and Stimulated

emission.
2. Find the wavelength of light emitted by GaAs LED. Take band gap of GaAs
to be 1.44eV at 300K
3. Explain surface emitter LED.
4. Explain any one line broadening mechanism in LASER Sources.
5. Calculate the photo current generated for an incident optical signal strength
600 nW on a PIN photodiode with responsivity 7.5 A/W
6. What is meant by dark current?
7. What is electro-optic effect?
8. Discuss the principle of optical memory.
9. List the different types of Wavelength division multiplexers and
demultiplexers used of optical field access.
10. Explain the working principle of circulators.
PART B
MODULE - 1
11 a Distinguish between radiative and non-radiative recombinations 7
.
b Briefly explain what is meant by coherence of optical sources 7
.
OR
12 a Discuss the various light production mechanisms in materials 7
.
b Explain the basic principle of LED. 7

.
MODULE - 2
13 a With the help of a suitable diagram, explain the working principle of DFB 9
. Laser.
b List the various features and characteristics of LEDs 5
.
OR
14 a With neat diagram, explain the principle of Surface Emitting LEDs and 6
. compare its features with edge emitting LEDs.
b .A Light Emitting Diode gives 500µw output power when minority carrier 8
. lifetime is 4ns.Determine the output optical power when LED is modulated
with 50MHz frequency with rms current equal to same dc current
MODULE - 3
15 a. Explain various noise mechanisms in optical detectors 5
b. Discuss the construction and working principle of PIN photodiode. 9
OR
16 a. Elucidate different techniques commonly used for measuring high speed 6
response of photodetectors
b. Calculate the photocurrent density of a Si p-i-n photodiode with 8 µm i- 8
region when 0.87 µm light power density 0.5W/cm2 is incident upon it. It is
assumed the top illuminated surface is coated with anti-reflection coating.
Given that absorption coefficient at 0.87 µm is 600.
MODULE - 4
17 a. What is meant by acousto-optic effect? Explain Raman-Nath modulator. 9
b. Explain the working principle of organic LEDs. 5

OR
18 a. Write a short note on Perovskite Solar cells 5
b. Describe the structure of Polymer LED. List the advantages and 9
disadvantages of Polymer LED.
MODULE - 5
19 a. Discuss the principle of tunable filters. 8
b. Explain the principle and working of waveguide grating routers 6
OR
20 a. Explain different types of fixed optical filters. 9
b. Calculate the physical grating period required for FBG for rejecting 980 nm 5
optical signals. Take average refractive index of the core = 1.45
ECT443 INSTRUMENTATION
PEC 2 1 0 3
Preamble: This course aims to introduce the basic concepts of electronic measuring instruments
for measuring physical variables using transducers and to familiarize the concepts of the control
systems PLC,DCS and SCADA.
Prerequisite: Nil
Interpret the basic concepts of measuring instruments, its classification, and

CO 1
selection criteria, static and dynamic characteristics.
Understand the principle, construction and working of transducers for measuring
CO 2
physical variables.
Comprehend the principle, construction and working of various electronic measuring
CO 3
instruments.
CO 4 Explainthe hardware architecture for PLC, DCS and SCADA.
CO 5 Apply PLC programming for selected industrial processes.

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO 4 PO 5 PO 6 PO 7 PO 8 PO 9 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO 1 3 3
CO 2 3 3 3
CO 3 3 3 3
CO 4 3 3
CO 5 3 3 3
Assessment Pattern
Continuous Assessment
End Semester Examination
Bloom’s Category Tests
1 2
Remember 10 10 20
Understand 30 20 50
Apply 10 20 30
Analyse
Evaluate
Create
Mark distribution

150 50 100 3 hours

Continuous Assessment Test (2numbers) : 25 marks
Assignment : 15marks
should answer all questions. Part B contains 2 questions from each module of which student
should answer any one. Each question can have maximum 2 sub-divisions and carry 14 marks.
Course Outcome 1 (CO1): Basics of measuring instruments

1. Explain the difference between accuracy and precision.
2. With neat block diagram explain the functional elements of a measuring instrument.
3. Explain the following static characteristics of a measuring instruments in details :-
Sensitivity, Resolution, Selectivity, Linearity
Course Outcome 2 (CO2): Basics of transducers

1. Explain the working of a piezoelectric transducer.
2. Explain the principle of Hall Effect. How a proximity sensor works on the basis of Hall
Effect?
3. Explain the construction, working principle, application, advantages and disadvantages of
LVDT.
Course Outcome 3 (CO3): Basics of Electronics measuring instruments

1. With neat block diagram explain the working of a DSO
2. Explain ramp type digital voltmeter
3. With neat sketch explain the working of a frequency counter
Course Outcome 4 (CO4): Basics of PLC, DCS, SCADA

1. Explain the hardware components of a DCS
2. What are the various Input Output devices connected to a PLC?
3. Explain in details the SCADA architecture
Course Outcome 5 (CO5): PLC Programming

1. Two motors are to be controlled in a sequence. The second motor starts 30 seconds after the
starting of first motor by a push switch. Develop a PLC ladder diagram for the following
cases and describe the circuit.
Case (A): Only one motor operates at a time.
Case (B): Both the motor gets off together after 50 seconds.
Syllabus
Module 1
Introduction to measuring instruments
Generalized Configurations and Functional elements of Instrumentation systems, Need for

Measurement Systems, Classification of Types of Measuring instruments. Static and Dynamic
characteristics of measuring instruments. Sensors and Transducers: - Need, Classification and
selection criteria.
Module 2
Transducer
Principles of operation, construction, theory, advantages and disadvantages, applications of-
Resistive Transducers: Potentiometers, strain gauges, (metallic and semi-conductor type),
Resistance Thermometer, Thermistors.
Inductive Transducers: LVDT (Linear variable differential transformer).
Capacitive Transducers:various capacitive transducers based upon familiar equation of
capacitance (capacitive microphone)
Active Transducers: Thermocouple, Piezo-electric transducer, Hall Effect transducer,Flow meter
Module 3
Electronic Measuring Instruments

Digital storage oscilloscope,Working principle and applications of waveform analyser, digital
frequency meter, harmonic distortion meter, harmonic analyser, spectrum analyser and logic state
analyserIEEE - 488 General Purpose Interface Bus (GPIB) Instruments with application.EMI,
Grounding and Shielding
Module 4
PLC, DCS and SCADA
PLC Basics: An Overall looks at PLCs, General PLC Programming Procedures, Devices to
which PLC Inputs and Outputs are connected.
Distributed Control System: Meaning and necessity of distributed control; hardware
components of DCS; DCS software.
Introduction to SCADA: SCADA overview, SCADA Architecture – Monolithic, Distributed
and Networked, SCADA Protocols- IEC 60870-5-101, DNP-3, Profibus, Modbus
Module 5
PLC Programming
Basic PLC Programming : Programming ON/OFF Inputs, Creating Ladder diagrams, Register
Basics, PLC Timers and Counters, PLC Arithmetic functions, Number comparison functions,
Data handling Functions: Skip function and applications; master control relay function and
applications; jump with non-return and return; data table, register and other move functions, PLC
functions with BITS.
Text Book
1. Ernest Doebelin, Dhanesh N. Manik, ‘Doebelin's Measurement Systems’, McGraw Hill,
7th Edition, 2019
2. Kalsi HS, “Electronic Instrumentation,” Tata McGraw Hill, Third Edition
3. John R Hackworth, Frederick D Hackworth, Jr, “Programmable Logic controllers
Programming Methods and Applications”, Pearson Education.
Reference
1. Sawhney AK, “Electrical and Electronics Measurements and Instrumentation,” Dhanpat
Rai and Sons
2. John W Webb, Ronald A. Reis, “Programmable Logic Controllers- Principles and
applications”, PHI , ND, 2006
No. of
No Topic
Lectures
1 Introduction to measuring instruments
Generalised Configurations and Functional elements of Instrumentation 1
1.1
systems
Need for Measurement Systems, Classification of Types of Measuring 3
1.2
instruments, Static and Dynamic characteristics of measuring instruments
1.3 Sensors and Transducers: - Need, Classification and selection criteria. 1
2 Transducers
Principles of operation, construction, theory, advantages and disadvantages, 3
2.1 applications of- Resistive Transducers: Potentiometers, strain gauges,
(metallic and semi-conductor type), Resistance Thermometer, Thermistors.
2.2 applications of- Inductive Transducers: LVDT (Linear variable differential
transformer).
2.3 applications of- Capacitive Transducers:various Capacitive transducers
based upon familiar equation of capacitance (capacitive microphone)
2.4 applications of-, Active Transducers: Thermocouple, Piezo-electric
transducer, Hall effect transducer, Flow meter
3 Electronic Measuring Instruments

3.1 Digital storage oscilloscope:- Working, Applications 1
Working principle and applications of waveform analyzer, digital frequency 3
3.2 meter, harmonic distortion meter, harmonic analyser, spectrum analyser and
logic state analyser
IEEE - 488 General Purpose Interface Bus (GPIB) Instruments with 1
3.3
application
3.4 EMI, Grounding and Shielding 1
4 PLC,DCS,SCADA
PLC Basics: An Overall looks at PLCs, General PLC Programming 2
4.1
Procedures, Devices to which PLC Inputs and Outputs are connected.
Distributed Control System: Meaning and necessity of distributed control; 2
4.2
hardware components of DCS; DCS software
Introduction to SCADA: SCADA overview, SCADA Architecture – 2
4.3 Monolithic, Distributed and Networked, SCADA Protocols- IEC 60870-5-
101, DNP-3, Modbus, Profibus
5 PLC Programming
Basic PLC Programming : Programming ON/OFF Inputs, Creating Ladder 2
5.1
diagrams, Register Basics
PLC Timers and Counters, PLC Arithmetic functions, Data handling 3
5.2
Functions: Skip function and applications
master control relay function and applications; jump with non-return and 2
5.3
return;
5.4 Data table, register and other move functions, PLC functions with BITS 2
A P J ABDUL KALAM TECHNOLOGICAL UNIVERSITY

EIGHTH SEMESTER B TECH DEGREE EXAMINATION
BRANCH: ELECTRONICS AND COMMUNICATION
COURSE: ECT443 INSTRUMENTATION
Time:3 Hrs. Max. Marks:100

PART A
Answer All Questions
1 Explain the difference between accuracy and precision. (3) K2

2 Compare transducer and sensor. (3) K2
3 Explain the working of a piezoelectric transducer. (3) K2
4 Differentiate between RTD and thermocouple. (3) K2
5 Explain the need for grounding and shielding (3) K2
6 What are the applications of a DSO? (3) K3
7 What are the essential elements of a PLC system? (3) K2
8 Explain any two applications of SCADA. (3) K2
9 With suitable example explain latching in PLC Ladder logic (3) K3
10 Draw the ladder diagram for the following logic functions. (3) K3
(i) XOR (ii) NAND (iii) NOR
PART B
Answer one question from each module. Each question carries 14 mark.
Module I
11(A) With neat block diagram explain the functional elements of a (8) K2
measuring instrument.
11(B) Explain the parameters for selection of a transducer. (6) K2
OR
12(A) Explain the following static characteristics of a measuring (8) K2

instruments in details:- Sensitivity, Resolution, Selectivity,
Linearity
12(B) How are transducers classified? (6) K2
Module II
13(A) Derive the expression for finding gauge factor of a strain gauge (8) K3
13(B) Explain the principle of Hall effect. How a proximity sensor (6) K2
works on the basis of Hall effect?
OR
14 Explain the construction , working principle, application, (14) K2

advantages and disadvantages of LVDT
Module III
15(A)With neat block diagram explain the working of a DSO (7) K2

15(B) Explain the working principle of a frequency analyzer (7) K2
OR
16(A)With neat sketch explainthe working of a frequency counter (8) K2

16(B) Explain the working principle of a Logic State analyzer (6) K2
Module IV
17(A) Explain the hardware components of a DCS (8) K2

17(B) What are the various Input Output devices connected to a (6) K2
PLC?
OR
18(A) Explain in details the SCADA architecture (8) K2

18(B) Differentiate between Profibus and Modbus (6) K2
Module V
19 Two motors are to be controlled in a sequence. The second motor (14) K3

starts 30 seconds after the starting of first motor by a push
switch. Develop a PLC ladder diagram for the following cases
and describe the circuit.
Case (A): Only one motor operates at a time.
Case (B): Both the motor gets off together after 50 seconds.
OR
20 Saw, Fan and oil pump all go ON when a start button is pressed. (14) K3
If the saw has operated less than 20s, the oil pump should go off
when the saw is turned off and the fan is to run for an additional
5s after the shutdown of the saw.
If the saw has operated for more than 20s, the fan should remain
on until reset by a separate fan reset button and the oil pump
should remain on for an additional 10 s after the saw is turned off.
Write a program that will implement this process.
ECT453 ERROR CONTROL CODES
PEC 2 1 0 3
Preamble: This course aims to give an insight into the various codes used for error control in
data transmission
Course Outcomes: On completion of the course the student will be able to
CO 1
Describethe principles of block codes, types and their bounds
K3
CO2 Illustrate the principles of cyclic codes and Galois Fields, encoding and decoding of
K3 binary BCH codes and algorithms for finding the error location polynomial
CO 3 Demonstrate encoding, decoding and error locationof Reed Solomon codes and Reed
K3 Muller codes
CO 4
Illustrate the encoding and decoding of Convolution Codes and Turbo Codes
K3
CO 5
Describe the encoding, decoding and applications of LDPC Codes
K3
CO 6
Discuss the concepts of polar codes and its applications in 5G
K3
PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
CO 1 3 3 2 2
CO 2 3 3 2 2
CO 3 3 3 2 2
CO 4 3 3 2 2
CO 5 3 3 2 2
CO6 3 3 2 2
Assessment Pattern

Tests
1 2
Apply K3 20 20 70
Analyse
Evaluate
Create
Mark distribution
150 50 100 3 hours
14 marks.
Course Outcome 1 (CO1): Describethe principles of block codes, types and their bounds
1. Define Code Rate, Hamming Distance and Error detection and correction capabilities of
Block codes
2. Construct Hamming Codes for a given Generator Matrix
3. State and prove Gilbert Varshamov bound
Course Outcome 2 (CO2):Illustrate the principles of cyclic codes and Galois Fields,
encoding and decoding of binary BCH codes and algorithms for finding the error location
polynomial
1. Design a (n,k) cyclic code in systematic form using a given generator polynomial g(X)
2. Determine all the conjugacy classes in an extended GF with respect to a give GF
3. Describe the Chein search algorithm for finding the error locator polynomial for Binary
BCH Codes
Course Outcome 3 (CO3):Demonstrate encoding, decoding and error location of Reed

Solomon codes and Reed Muller codes
1. Differentiate between the BCH and Vandermonde viewpoints of Reed Solomon Codes
2. Explain Sudan’s algorithm for decoding RS codes
3. Devise an encoding circuit for RM (1, m) code
Course Outcome 4 (CO4):Illustrate the encoding and decoding of Convolution Codes and
Turbo Codes
1. Construct an encoder, state diagram and trellis for a convolution encoder using a given
generator polynomial.
2. Decode convolution codes using Viterbi decoder
3. Construct a Turbo encoder for a given generator polynomial
Course Outcome 5 (CO5): Describe the encoding, decoding and applications of LDPC
Codes
1. Determine if a given matrix satisfies the conditions of the parity check matrix of an LDPC
code.
2. Construct the Tanner graph for a given LDPC code. Determine the girth of the Tanner
graph
3Discuss the message passing decoding over binary erasure channels
Course Outcome 6 (CO6): Discuss the encoding, decoding and applications in 5G of polar
codes
1. Explain the basic ideas of polarization

2. Discuss polarization of BEC channels
3. Explain how polar codes can be applied in 5G
SYLLABUS
Error Control Codes
Module 1: Block Codes and Bounds.
Error Control Coding – Relevance of error control codes in Communication System,

concepts of Code rate, Hamming Distance, Minimum Distance, Error detecting and
correcting capability.
Repetition Codes, Hamming Codes, Review of Groups, Fields, Vector Spaces. Linear Block
Codes - Generator matrix, Parity Check Matrix. Dual Codes, Error Detection and Correction
over hard output channels. Dual of binary Hamming codes. Maximum Likelihood Decoding
Simple bounds on block codes - Singleton bound, Hamming Bound, Gilbert-Varshamov

bound. Maximum-distance-separable (MDS) codes.
Module 2: Cyclic Codes
Review of basic concepts of cyclic codes – generator matrix, parity-check matrix. Polynomial
view point. Encoding, systematic encoding, syndrome decoding.
Galois Fields -- Irreducible and Primitive Polynomials, Primitive elements, Field extension,
Conjugate elements and Minimal Polynomials. Cyclotomic cosets.
BCH Codes - Design, BCH Bound, Decoding BCH codes – Decoding BCH – the general
outline, computation of the syndrome, error locator polynomial, Chien Search algorithm,
Finding the error locator polynomial. Berlekamp Massey Algorithm. Burst-error correction
capability of BCH codes.
Module 3: Reed-Solomon and Reed-Muller Codes
Reed Solomon Codes – BCH code viewpoint. Vandermonde matrix view point. MDS
property. Generalized Reed-Solomon codes. Application of BCH decoding algorithms to
Reed-Solomon decoding. Sudan’s algorithm for decoding. Use of RS codes in disks and
cloud storage.
Reed Muller Codes, Encoding and decoding of RM (1, m) codes. Majority-logic decoding of
Reed-Muller codes.
Module 4: Convolutional and Turbo Codes
Convolution Codes, State Diagram, Systematic Encoders, Decoding of Convolution Codes –

Viterbi algorithm, Turbo Codes, Encoding parallel concatenated codes.
Module 5: LDPC and Polar Codes
Low Density Parity Codes, Construction, Tanner Graphs, Message passing decoding.
Example of message passing decoding over binary erasure channels. Message passing of
LLR and decoding over AWGN channels.
Polar Codes – Introduction, polarization of BEC channels, Polar transform and frozen bits.
LDPC and Polar codes in 5G.
Textbooks and References
1. Shu Lin, D. J Costello Jr. Error Control Coding: Fundaments and Applications, Prentice
Hall
2. Ron M Roth, Introduction to Coding Theory, Cambridge University Press
3. Todd K. Moon, Error Correction Coding: Mathematical Methods and Algorithms, Wiley.
4. T. Richardson, R. Urbanke, Modern Coding Theory, Cambridge University Press
5. H. Pfister, A Brief Introduction to Polar Codes, Lec. Notes
6. O. Gazi, Polar Codes: A Non-Trivial Approach to Channel Coding, Springer, 2018.
7. A. Thangaraj, LDPC and Polar Codes in 5G Standard, NPTEL Course

No. of
S.No Topic
Lectures
1 Module 1: Block Codes and Bounds.
Error Control Coding – Relevance of error control codes in
1.1 Communication System, concepts of Code rate, Hamming Distance, 2
Minimum Distance, Error detecting and correcting capability.
Repetition Codes, Hamming Codes, Review of Groups, Fields, Vector
Spaces. Linear Block Codes - Generator matrix, Parity Check Matrix.
1.2 2
Dual Codes, Error Detection and Correction over hard output channels.
Dual of binary Hamming codes. Maximum Likelihood Decoding
Simple bounds on block codes - Singleton bound, Hamming Bound,
1.3 2
Gilbert-Varshamov bound. Maximum-distance-separable (MDS) codes.
2 Module 2: Cyclic Codes

Review of basic concepts of cyclic codes – generator matrix, parity-
2.1 check matrix. Polynomial view point. Encoding, systematic encoding, 2
syndrome decoding.
Galois Fields -- Irreducible and Primitive Polynomials, Primitive
2.2 elements, Field extension, Conjugate elements and Minimal 2
Polynomials. Cyclotomic cosets.
BCH Codes - Design, BCH Bound, Decoding BCH codes – Decoding
BCH – the general outline, computation of the syndrome, error locator
2.3 polynomial, Chien Search algorithm, Finding the error locator 4
polynomial. Berlekamp Massey Algorithm. Burst-error correction
capability of BCH codes.
3 Module 3: Reed-Solomon and Reed-Muller Codes

Reed Solomon Codes – BCH code viewpoint. Vandermonde matrix view
point. MDS property. Generalized Reed-Solomon codes. Application of
3.1 4
BCH decoding algorithms to Reed-Solomon decoding. Sudan’s
algorithm for decoding. Use of RS codes in disks and cloud storage.
Reed Muller Codes, Encoding and decoding of RM (1, m) codes.
3.2 3
Majority-logic decoding of Reed-Muller codes.
4 Module 4: Convolutional and Turbo Codes

Convolution Codes, State Diagram, Systematic Encoders, Decoding of
4.1 4
Convolution Codes – Viterbi algorithm
4.2 Turbo Codes, Encoding parallel concatenated codes. 3
5 Module 5: LDPC and Polar Codes

Low Density Parity Codes, Construction, Tanner Graphs, Message
passing decoding. Example of message passing decoding over binary
5.1 4
erasure channels. Message passing of LLR and decoding over AWGN
channels.
Polar Codes – Introduction, polarization of BEC channels, Polar
5.2 3
transform and frozen bits. LDPC and Polar codes in 5G.
Using GAP,
a) Determine if a given polynomial is reducible
b) Generate Hamming codes, Reed Muller Codes
c) Generate the Standard Array of a given code C
d) Generate the generator matrix of a given code C
e) Generate the parity check matrix of a given code C
f) Determine the Hamming Distance and minimum distance of a given code C
Similar exercises may be given


SEVENTH SEMESTER B. TECH DEGREE EXAMINATION, (Model Question Paper)
Course Code: ECT453
Course Name: ERROR CONTROL CODES
PART A
Generate all the code polynomials for the (7,4) Hamming Code generator
1 K3
polynomial g(x) =1+x+x3
2 Define (a) MDS Code (b) Minimum Distance (c) Repetition Code K1
3 Determine if x5+x3+1 is irreducible over GF (2) K3
4 Illustrate the general outline for decoding BCH codes K2
5 Prove that the minimum distance of an (n,k) RS code is n-k+1 K2
6 Construct the Generator matrix of a RM(1,3) code K3
7 Describe a catastrophic encoder K2
8 Discuss the applications of turbo codes in 5G K2
9 Explain the method of construction of LDPC Codes K2
10 Describe the applications of polar codes in 5G K2
PART – B
Module - I
11 7
Define and prove Hamming bound and Gilbert Varshamov bounds CO1
a.
K2
For the (7,4) Hamming code generator polynomial g(x) =1+x+x3, generate all 7
b. possible code polynomials c(x). Determine the parity check matrix h(x) for this CO1
code. Calculate the miniumum distance of the Hamming code generated K3
OR
Consider a systematic block code whose parity check equations are:
p1 = m1+m2+m4
12 p2 = m1+m3+m4 14
p3 = m1+m2+m3 CO1
p4 = m2+m3+m4 K3
where mi are the message digits and pi are the check digits
a) Find the generator matrix and parity check matrix for this code
b) How many errors can the code correct?
c) Is the vector 10101010 a code word?
Module - II
For a binary, narrow sense, triple error correcting BCH code of length 15,
constructed using the polynomial x4+x+1 7
13 a (a) Compute a generator polynomial for this code CO2
(b) Determine the rate of the code K3
(c) Construct the parity check matrix and generator matrix for this code
7
b Define and prove the BCH bound CO2
K2
OR
7
14a
Construct the systematic encoder for cyclic codes and explain its working CO2
K2
7
b Describe the Chien search algorithm for BCH codes CO2
K2
Module - III
7
15 a Explain Sudan’s algorithm for Reed Solomon Codes CO3
K2
7
Differentiate between the BCH Viewpoint and Vandermondeviewpoints of Reed
b CO3
Solomon Codes
K2
OR
Form the generator matrix of the first order RM code RM (1,3) of length 8. What is 14
16 the minimum distance of the code? Determine its parity check sums and devise a CO3
majority logic decoder for the code. Decode the received vector r = (01000101) K3
Module - IV
For the R=1/2 convolution encoder with G(x) = [1+x2+x3 1+x+x3]
(a) Draw a hardware realization of the encoder
(b) Determine the convolution generator matrix G
14
(c) For the input sequence m = [1,0,1,1,0,1,1] determine the coded output
17 CO4
sequence
K2
(d) Draw the state diagram
(e) Draw the trellis
(f) Is this a catastrophic realization? Justify your answer
OR
7
18
Illustrate Turbo encoding without and with puncturing CO4
a.
K2
b. Explain the Viterbi algorithm and the schematic of add compare select hardware 7
implementation CO4
K2
Module - V
For the parity check matrix
1 1 0 1 0 0 0
0 1 1 0 1 0 0
� �
0 0 1 1 0 1 0 8
19 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 CO5
a. (a) Construct the Tanner graph for the code K3
(b) Determine the girth of the minimum girth cycle
(c) Determine the number of cycles of length 6
(d) Determine a generator matrix for this code
6
b. Explain message passing decoding of LDPC codes over binary erasure channels CO5
K2
OR
6
20
Describe the basic ideas of polarization CO6
a
K2
8
b Explain channel polarization for N=2 channel CO6
K2
ECT463 MACHINE LEARNING
PEC 2 1 0 3
Preamble: This course aims to impart the fundamentals of machine learning techniques.
Prerequisite: MAT 101 Linear Algebra and Calculus

MAT 204 Probability, Random Process, and Numerical Methods
CO1 K2 Understand the basics of machine learning and different types.
CO2 K3 Differentiate regression and classification, apply Bayes’ decision theory in classification
CO3 K3 Apply linear algebra and statistical methods in discriminant based algorithms
CO4 K2 Understand the basics of unsupervised learning and non-metric methods
CO5 K2 Understand ensemble methods, dimensionality reduction, evaluation, model selection.
PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO1
PO1 PO11 PO12
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0
CO 1 3
CO 2 3 3 3 3 3
CO 3 3 3 3 3 3
CO 4 3
CO 5 3 3 3
Assessment Pattern

Tests
1 2
Remember
Apply K3 20 20 40
Analyse
Evaluate
Create
Mark distribution
Total Marks CIE ES ESE Duration

E
150 50 100 3 hours

14 marks.
Course Outcome 1 (CO1): Understand the basics of machine learning and different types.
(K2)
1. Differentiate supervised and unsupervised learning using examples.
2. Understand different terms and methods used in machine learning.
Course Outcome 2 (CO2): Differentiate regression and classification, apply Bayes’ decision
theory in classification (K3)
1. Differentiate regression and classification using examples
2. To apply Bayes’ decision theory in classification for normal distributions
Course Outcome 3 (CO3): Apply linear algebra and statistical methods in discriminant
based algorithms (K3)
1. Use statistical methods to obtain perceptron algorithm
2. Use support vector machines for separable classes and non separable classes
Course Outcome 4 (CO4): Understand the basics of unsupervised learning, ensemble

methods and non-metric methods (K2)
1. Explain unsupervised learning with examples
2. Differentiate boosting and bagging.

3. Describe decision trees with examples.
Course Outcome 5 (CO5): Understand dimensionality reduction, evaluation and model

selection techniques (K2)
1. Significance of dimensionality reduction.
2. Describe principal component analysis, Fischer's discriminant analysis.
3. Explain ROC curves, evaluation measures, validation set, bias-variance trade-off.
SYLLABUS
Module I
Basics of machine learning, supervised and unsupervised learning, examples, features, feature
vector, training set, target vector, test set, feature extraction, over-fitting, curse of
dimensionality. Review of probability theory, Gaussian distribution, decision theory.
Module II
Regression: linear regression, error functions in regression, multivariate regression,
regression applications, bias and variance. Classification : Bayes’ decision theory,
discriminant functions and decision surfaces, Bayesian classification for normal distributions,
classification applications.
Module III
Linear discriminant based algorithm: perceptron, gradient descent method, perceptron
algorithm, support vector machines, separable classes, non-separable classes, multiclass case.
Module IV :
Unsupervised learning: Clustering, examples, criterion functions for clustering, proximity
measures, algorithms for clustering. Ensemble methods: boosting, bagging. Basics of
decision trees, random forest, examples.
Module V :
Dimensionality reduction: principal component analysis, Fischer's discriminant analysis.
Evaluation and model Selection: ROC curves, evaluation measures, validation set, bias-
variance trade-off. Confusion matrix, recall, precision, accuracy.
Text Books:
1. Bishop, C. M. “Pattern Recognition and Machine Learning” Springer, New York,

2006.
2. Theodoridis, S. and Koutroumbas, K. “Pattern Recognition”. Academic Press, San
Diego, 2003.
References:
1. Hastie, T., Tibshirani, R. and Friedman, J. “The Elements of Statistical Learning”.

Springer. 2001.
2. Duda, R.O., Hart, P.E., and Stork, D.G. “Pattern Classification”. Wiley, New York,
2001.
No Topic No. of
Lectures
1 Module I
1.1 Basics of machine learning, supervised and unsupervised learning, examples, 2
1.2 features, feature vector, training set, target vector, test set 2
1.3 feature extraction, over-fitting, curse of dimensionality. 1
1.4 Review of probability theory, Gaussian distribution, decision theory. 2
2 Module II
2.1 Regression: linear regression, error functions in regression 2
2.2 multivariate regression, regression applications, bias and variance. 2
2.3 Classification : Bayes’ decision theory, 1
2.4 discriminant functions and decision surfaces, 1
2.5 Bayesian classification for normal distributions, classification applications. 2
3 Module III
3.1 Linear discriminant based algorithm: perceptron, 1
3.2 gradient descent method, perceptron algorithm, 2
3.3 support vector machines , 1
3.4 SVM for separable classes and non-separable classes, multiclass case. 2
4 Module IV
4.1 Unsupervised learning: Clustering, examples, criterion functions for 2
clustering,
4.2 proximity measures, algorithms for clustering. 2
4.3 Ensemble methods: boosting, bagging. 1
4.4 Basics of decision trees, random forest, examples. 2
5 Module V
5.1 Dimensionality reduction: principal component analysis, 2
5.2 Fischer's discriminant analysis. 1
5.3 Evaluation and model selection: ROC curves, evaluation measures, 2
5.4 validation set, bias-variance trade-off. 1
5.5 confusion matrix, recall, precision, accuracy. 1
Simulation Assignments (using Python or Matlab)
• Working with Probability Distributions, Gaussian pdf generation
• Regression examples
• Classification examples
• Perceptron
• SVM
• Unsupervised learning techniques to find natural groupings and patterns in data
• Dimensionality reduction techniques

APJ ABDULKALAM TECHNOLOGICAL UNIVERSITY

ECT463 MACHINE LEARNING
Time: 3 hours Max. Marks:100
PART A
1. Explain machine learning with examples.
2. Explain over-fitting in machine learning
3. Explain regression with examples
4. State Bayes decision theory
5. Draw a simple perceptron model
6. How SVM is used for multiclass problem?
7. Explain clustering with examples.
8. Explain decision trees with examples.
9. Explain ROC curves.
10. Explain bias-variance trade-off.
PART B
Answer anyone question from each module. Each question carries 14 marks.
MODULE I
11. (a) Explain the terms features, training set, target vector, and test set (8 marks)
(b) Distinguish supervised and unsupervised machine learning with examples. (6 marks)
OR
12. (a) Explain a multi-variate Gaussian distribution along with its parameters (6 marks)
(b) Explain curse of dimensionality in machine learning? (8 marks)
MODULE II
13. (a) Differentiate regression and classification with examples (8 marks)
(b) Explain bias and variance for regression (6 marks)
OR
14. (a) Obtain the decision surface for an equi-probable two class system, where the
probability density functions of l-dimensional feature vectors in both classes are
normally distributed. (8 marks)
(b) Show that the Bayesian classifier is optimal with respect to minimizing the
classification error probability. (6 marks)
MODULE III
13. (a) Give a step by step description of the perceptron algorithm in classification.
(8 marks)
(b) Explain the significance of gradient descent method in machine learning algorithms.
(6 marks)
OR
14. (a) Obtain the cost function for optimization in SVM for separable classes. (8 marks)
(b) How SVM is used in non-separable classes? (6 marks)
MODULE IV
13. (a) Explain different criterion functions for clustering (8 marks)
(b) Give a description of different clustering algorithms (6 marks)
OR
14. (a) Explain different ensemble methods in classification. (8 marks)
(b) Illustrate random forest algorithm. (6 marks)
MODULE V
13. (a) Explain the significance of dimensionality reduction in machine learning. (6 marks)
(b) Describe Fisher Discriminant Analysis. (8 marks)
OR
14. (a) How performance evaluation and model selection is done in machine learning
(8 marks)
(b) Explain confusion matrix, recall, precision, and accuracy. (6 marks)
ELECTRONICS & COMMUNICATION
CATEGORY L T PENGINEERING
CREDIT
ECT473 DSP ARCHITECTURES
PEC 2 1 0 3
Preamble: The aim of the course is to give an overview of the commonly used DSP
algorithms, their applications and various techniques for the algorithmic and architecture
level optimisations through various algorithm to architecture mapping which can lead to
efficient hardware implementations. The course also introduces the basic features in Digital
Signal Processors, DSP Architecture with case studies, the latest architectural trends in DSPs
and their programming tools.
Prerequisite: ECT 303 Digital Signal Processing
Identify the basic resource constraints in a practical DSP system and solve them
CO 1
using various techniques/transformations that map the DSP algorithms to efficient
architectures.
CO 2 Illustrate various single core and multicore Digital Signal Processor architectures and
identify the optimal processor for solving real life signal processing problems.
Develop algorithms to solve signal processing problems using the latest hardware
CO 3
platforms and software tools.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
CO
3 3 3 3 2
1
CO
3 3 3 3 2
2
CO
3 3 3 3 3 1 2 2 1 2
3
Assessment Pattern

1 2
Apply K3 10 20 50
Analyse 10 10 20
Evaluate
Create
Mark distribution
Total Marks CIE ESE ESE

Duration
150 50 100 3 hours
14 marks.

Course Outcome 1 (CO1): Identify the basic resource constraints in a practical DSP system
and solve them using various techniques/transformations that map the DSP algorithms to
efficient architectures.
1. Compare and contrast various DSP Algorithm representations

2. Demonstrate the algorithmic representation of typical DSP algorithms (Convolution,
Various Filters, Transforms and filterbanks etc.) using Block Diagram, Signal Flow
Graph, Data Flow Graph and Dependence Graph.
3. Explain the popular filter structures for efficient hardware implementations.
4. Define Loop bound, Iteration bound, critical path and explain their significance in the
design of hardware systems.
5. Apply various algorithms to compute the iteration bound of a given Data Flow Graph
(DFG).
6. Design efficient architectures for implementing DSP algorithms using pipelining, parallel
processing, folding and unfolding techniques that meets various requirements such as
low computational complexity, power and area.
Course Outcome 2 (CO2): Illustrate various single core and multicore Digital Signal
Processor architectures and identify the optimal processor for solving real life signal
processing problems.
1. Explain the basic architectural features of Digital Signal Processors

2. Explain the role of ILP in designing Digital Signal Processor architectures.
3. Compare and contrast Harvard and VLIW architectures of DSPs.
4. Explain the architecture of various ELECTRONICS & COMMUNICATION
single and multicore DSPs. ENGINEERING
5. Give a brief description of the peripherals available for implementing DSP tasks in
various single and multicore DSPs.
Course Outcome 3 (CO3): Develop algorithms to solve signal processing problems using
the latest hardware platforms and software tools.
1. Explain various steps involved in implementing a signal processing task using CSS.
2. Explain the role of Open CL in the development of portable codes that take advantage of
the parallel computing power of modern electronic hardwares,
3. Explain the role of Open MP Application Programming Interface (API) and Inter-
Processor Communication (IPC) in implementing DSP applications in realtime.
SYLLABUS
Module 1: Basics ofDSP Algorithm Representation to Architecture Mapping

DSP Algorithm representations –Block Diagram, Signal Flow Graph, Data Flow Graph,
Dependence Graph;
Introduction to Filter structures- Recursive, Non-recursive and Lattice structures;
Fundamentals of DSP algorithm to architecture mapping - Loop bound, Iteration Bound,
Critical Path, Algorithms for computing Iteration Bound – Longest Path Matrix Algorithm,
Minimum Cycle Mean Algorithm.
Module 2: Transformations for Improved DSP Architectures

VLSI performance measures - area, power, and speed; Transformations for improved DSP
architectures: Pipelining - Pipelining of FIR filters, Concept of Fine Grain Pipelining; Parallel
Processing – Designing Parallel FIR systems, Pipelining and Parallel Processing for low
power. Folding and Unfolding Transformations and its applications.
Module 3: Single Core DSP Architectures

Introduction to General Purpose Processors (GPP), Microcontroller Units (MCU), Digital
Signal Processors (DSP) – comparison and Applications. The key features of a Digital Signal
Processors – Dedicated hardware units, circular buffers, Modified bus structures and Memory
access schemes. Introduction to Harvard, Super Harvard DSP architectures, Concept of
Instruction Level Parallelism, VLIW Architecture and Single Instruction Multiple Data
(SIMD) processor architecture.
Case Study: Introduction to a popular DSP from Texas Instruments, The
TMS320C67xxSeries Processor - CPU Architecture - CPU Data Paths and Control - Timers -
Internal Data/ Program Memory - External Memory Interface.
Module 4: Homogeneous Multicore DSPs

Introduction to multicore processors and their applications, A brief comparison between DSP
SoCs, Field-Programmable Gate Arrays (FPGAs), Graphic Processors and CPUs.
Introduction to Multicore DSP Architectures: The TMS320C66x architecture: The CPU,
Overview of the peripherals, Useful instructions, Overview of the memory organization.
Module 5: Programming the DSPs ELECTRONICS & COMMUNICATION ENGINEERING
Introduction to Code Composer Studio (CCS) software development tool and the
TMS320C6678 EVM kit. Introduction to OpenMP Application Programming Interface (API)
and Open Computing Language (OpenCL). Implementation of simple DSP algorithms – Dot
Product.
Latest architectural trends in digital signal processing: Introduction to Heterogeneous
Multicore DSP Architecture and FPGA SoCs.
Text Books
1. Keshab K. Parhi, "VLSI Signal Processing Systems, Design and Implementation",
John Wiley &Sons,1999
2. Naim Dahnoun, “Multicore DSP: from algorithms to real-time implementation on the
TMS320C66x SoC”. John Wiley & Sons, 2018.
3. Steven W. Smith, “The Scientist and Engineer’s Guide to Digital Signal Processing”
Second Edition, California Technical Publishing , 1999.
4. Reference Link for Overview of Latest Processor Architectures–
Digital signal processors (DSPs) | Overview | Processors | TI.com,
https://training.ti.com/system/files/docs/c66x-corepac-instruction-set-reference-
guide.pdf
Reference Books
1. Rulph Chassaing, “Digital Signal Processing and Applications with the C6713 and
C6416 DSK”, John Wiley & Sons, 2005.
2. Sen M. Kuo, Woon-Seng S. Gan, Digal Signal Processors: Architectures,
Implementations, and Applications, Prentice Hall, 2004.
3. Lars Wanhammar, DSP Integrated Circuits, Academic Press, 1999.
4. B Venkataramani, M Bhaskar, “Digital Signal Processors: Architecture, Programming
and Applications”, 2nd Ed., Tata McGraw-Hill Education, 2002.
5. A. Kharin, S. Vityazev and V. Vityazev, "Teaching multi-core DSP implementation
on EVM C6678 board," 2017 25th European Signal Processing Conference
(EUSIPCO), 2017, pp. 2359-2363, doi: 10.23919/EUSIPCO.2017.8081632
No Topic No. of
Lecture
s
1 Basics of DSP Algorithm Representation to Architecture Mapping
1.1 DSP Algorithm representations –Block Diagram, Signal Flow Graph, 2
Data Flow Graph, Dependence Graph.
1.2 Introduction to Filter structures- Recursive, Non-recursive and Lattice 1
structures.
1.3 Fundamentals of DSP algorithm to architecture mapping - Loop bound, 2
Iteration Bound, Critical Path,
1.4 Algorithms for computing Iteration Bound – Longest Path Matrix 2
ELECTRONICS
Algorithm, Minimum Cycle Mean Algorithm. & COMMUNICATION ENGINEERING
2 Transformations for Improved DSP Architectures

2.1 VLSI performance measures - area, power, and speed 1
2.2 Pipelining - Pipelining of FIR filters, Concept of Fine Grain Pipelining. 2
2.3 Parallel Processing – Designing Parallel FIR systems. 2
2.4 Pipelining and Parallel Processing for low power. 1
2.5 Folding and Unfolding Transformations and its applications. 3
3 Single Core DSP Architectures

3.1 Introduction to General Purpose Processors (GPP), Microcontroller Units 1
(MCU), Digital Signal Processors (DSP) - comparison and Applications.
3.2 The key features of a Digital Signal Processors – Dedicated hardware 1
units, Circular Buffers, Modified bus structures and Memory access
schemes.
3.3 Introduction to Harvard, Super HarvardDSP architectures, Concept of 1
Instruction Level Parallelism, VLIW Architecture and Single Instruction
Multiple Data (SIMD) processor architecture.
3.4 Case Study: Introduction to a popular DSP from Texas Instruments, The 4
TMS320C67xx Series Processor- CPU Architecture - CPU Data Paths and
Control - Timers – Multichannel Buffered Serial Ports (McBSPs)- Internal
Data/ Program Memory - External Memory Interface.
4 Homogeneous Multicore DSPs

4.1 Introduction to multicore processors and their applications, A brief 1
comparison between DSP SoCs, Field-Programmable Gate Arrays
(FPGAs), Graphic Processors and CPUs
4.2 Introduction to Multicore DSP Architectures: The TMS320C66x 5
architecture: The CPU, Overview of the peripherals, Useful instructions,
Overview of the memory organization.
5 Programming the DSPs

5.1 Introduction to Code Composer Studio (CCS) software development tool 2
and the TMS320C6678 EVM kit.
5.2 Introduction to Open MP Application Programming Interface (API) and 2
Open Computing Language (OpenCL).
5.3 Implementation of simple DSP algorithms - Dot Product 1
5.4 Latest architectural trends in digital signal processing: Introduction to 1
Heterogeneous Multicore DSP Architecture and FPGA SoCs.
Simulation Assignments/Course Projects:
1. Design an n-tap FIR filter. Apply pipelining to reduce the effective critical path.
Simulate both using CCS and study the effect of pipelining.
2. Design an n-tap FIR filter. Construct a parallel FIR system. Simulate both using CCS
and study the effect of parallel processing.
3. Consider a 6-tap FIR filter with data-broadcast structure. Apply folding using a
folding factor of 2 on the structure. Implement both the filters and verify the
functionality. Analyse the effect of folding.
4. Design a 4-bit bit-serial adder. Apply unfolding by 2 to make it a digit-serial adder.
Implement both the filters and verify the functionality. Analyse and study the effect of
unfolding.
5. Implement and realise the n-tap FIR filter utilising the multicore architecture of the
TMS320C6678 processor. Implement and check the functionality by applying real
time signals such as voice or recorded. Study the performance parameters.
6. Implement FFT algorithm using a single core on a TMS320C6678 processor. Extend
it for the implementation of a 2-D FFT algorithm on an 8x8 data utilising themulticore
architecture of the same processor. Study the performance parameters.
7. Study and implementation of a Real-Time Synthetic Aperture Radar (SAR) Algorithm
Using TMS320C6678.
8. Design and implementation of a very large FFT algorithm using TMS320C6678 SoC.

Course Code: ECT473
Course Name: DSP ARCHITECTURES
PART A
Answer all Questions. Each Carries 3 mark.
1 Differentiate between Signal Flow Graph (SFG) and Data Flow Graph (DFG) with K2
example.
2 Define the terms Loop Bound and Iteration Bound. Explain the role of Iteration K2
Bound in determining the speed of execution of a hardware.
3 What is pipelining? Explain with an example, how it helps in reducing the critical K2
path delay in implementing the DSP systems.
4 What is Fine-Grain pipelining? Explain K2
5 In what way the Super Harvard architecture based DSPs differs from the normal K2
microprocessors?
6 Explain with a suitable example, the role of circular buffers in implementing DSP K3
algorithm.
7 Compare and contrast DSP SoCs and FPGAs. K2
8 Explain the CCS tools available for data visualisation. K2
9 What is the concept of Heterogeneous Multicore DSP Architecture? Quote an K1

example processor?
10 Quoting a suitable example, explain the architectural advantages of an FPGA SoC. K2
PART – B
Module - I
11 ELECTRONICS & COMMUNICATION ENGINEERING
a. Explain the Longest Path Matrix (LPM) Algorithm for computing the iteration 7
bound of a DFG.
b. For the DFG shown in figure below, the computation times of the nodes are shown 7
in parentheses. Compute the iteration bound of this DFG using the LPM algorithm.
CO1
K3
OR
12 14
a. What are the advantages of lattice structure compared to other filter structures as far CO1
as implementation aspects are concerned. K3
b. For the following transfer function given, Derive the basic lattice filter and draw its
structure
3.9 + 2.3 z −1 + z −2
H ( z) =
1 + 0.3 z −1 + 0.5 z − 2
− 3 + 5.192 z −1 − 3.56 z −2 + 2 z −1
H ( z) =
1 + 0.28 z −1 + 0.056 z − 2 + 0.4 z −3
.
Module - II
13 14
a. Consider the non-recursive signal processing structure shown below.
CO1
i. Calculate the minimum sample period required to implement the algorithm K3
using the given structure. Assume that TA and TM are the computation time
required for addition and multiplication operations respectively.
ii. Find an equivalent implementation of this algorithm to improve the speed of
the system using only 4 latches. Calculate the sample speed of the structure.
iii. How much improvement in sample speed is possible for the new structure if
all the latches in the original structure (8 latches) are used?
iv. Is there any method for further improvements without adding any more
registers? Explain. ELECTRONICS & COMMUNICATION ENGINEERING
x1(n)
D D D D
a1 a2 a3 a5
a4
X X X X X
0 y(n)
+ + + + +
b1 b2 b3 b4 b5
X X X X X
x2(n)
D D D D
OR
14 Consider a direct-form implementation of the FIR filter 14
y(n) = ax(n) + bx(n-2) +cx(n-3)
Assume that the time required for 1 multiply-add operation is T CO1
i. Pipeline this filter such that the clock period is approximately T K3
ii. Draw block filter architecture for a block size of three. Pipeline this
block filter such that clock period is about T.What is the system sample
Module - III
15 The TMS320C6713 processor is used for an application where, it has to read the CO2
audio data inputted through the codec and has to send the data which is band limited K3
to 1 KHz, to another external device for further processing. If the processor is
connected to the audio codec through the McBSPs of the TMS320C6713 processor.
6
a. Draw the interconnection diagram showing all the necessary signals, for inputting
an analog signal to the processor for the processing and to send the result there
after, with the entire data transfer initiated through the McBSPs. 8
b. What are the various registers need to be programmed in order to effect the data
transfer. Explain the role and functionality of each.
OR
16
a. Explain the role of a timer in a Digital Signal Processor with suitable examples. 10
With reference to the Timer Control Register (Register fields given), explain the
various facilities provided by the Timers in the TMS3206713 DSP processor.
CO2
K3
The 6713 processor is used to control a device which is to be triggered every 5msec.
b. 5
If the Timer 0 peripheral of theELECTRONICS
processor is used& for
COMMUNICATION
the purpose, what ENGINEERING
are the
values to be loaded into the Timer 0 Period and Timer 0 Count registers to perform
the required operation?
Module - IV
17 Draw a neat block schematic of the architecture of TMS320C66x series of 14

processor. Briefly explain the role of each block. CO2
K3
OR
18 Give an overview of the memory organisation in TMS320C66xx series of 14

processors. Explain the role of various memory controllers and interfaces in CO3
relieving the CPU load.. K2
Module - V
19 Explain the role of OpenMP Application Programming Interface and Open 14

Computing Language (OpenCL) in implementing DSP applications that requires CO3
multithreading. Explain with reference to a case study project that you have
implemented. K2
OR
20 Give an overview of the latest architectural trends for implementing DSP 14

algorithms. How will you compare FPGA SoCs and DSP SoCs? CO3
K3
SEMESTER VII
OPEN ELECTIVE
ECT415 MECHATRONICS
OEC 2 1 0 3
Preamble: This course introduces students to the rapidly emerging, multi-disciplinary, and
exciting field of Mechatronics.
Prerequisite: Nil
Course Outcome: After the successful completion of the course the student will be able to :
Understand the working principles of various sensors and actuators in Mechatronics

CO1
systems and be able to choose the suitable one for the real world application
CO2 Formulate and simulate models of mechatronics systems
CO3 Explain the implementation of PLC in mechatronics applications
Explain the standard fabrication techniques and principle of operation of MEMS
CO4
devices
Design and Analysis of commonly encountered mechatronics systems for real time
CO5
application
CO1 3 3
CO2 3 3
CO3 3 3 2
CO4 3 3
CO5 3 3
Assessment Pattern
Bloom’s Continuous Assessment Tests End Semester

Category 1 2 Examination
Remember 10 10 20
Understand 30 30 60
Apply 10 10 20
Analyse
Evaluate
Create
Mark distribution
Total ESE
CIE ESE
Marks Duration
150 50 100 3 hours

: 10 marks
Attendance
: 25 marks
Continuous Assessment Test (2 numbers)
: 15 marks
Assignment/Quiz/Course project
Course Outcome 1 (CO1):Understand the working principles of various sensors and actuators in
Mechatronics systems and be able to choose the suitable one for the real world application
1. Illustrate the working of a strain gauged load cell

2. Explain the working of any one non-contact temperature measurement system
3. Explain the principle of operation and suggest two applications of Hall effect sensor in
mechatronic systems.
4. With neat sketches explain the working of a double acting hydraulic actuator.
5. Design a hydraulic circuit to operate a winch fitted with a hydraulic motor. The
motor should be run clockwise, counter clockwise and stopped. Use a manually
operated valve.
6. Explain any two situations when pneumatic actuators are preferred over
hydraulic ones.
Course Outcome 2 (CO2): Formulate models of mechatronics systems
1. Derive the mathematical model of a general electrical system and draw its analogy with a
mechanical system.
2. Explain the working of a mechanical device using closed loop control system
with the help of a suitable example.
Course Outcome 3 (CO3): Explain the implementation of PLC in mechatronics applications
1. Explain ‘latching’ in PLC logic with an example.

2. Illustrate the significance of Internal Relays in PLC program
3. Consider a pneumatic system with single-solenoid controlled valves and
involving two cylinders A and B, with limit switches a–, a+, b–, b+ detecting
the limits of the piston rod movements. Design a ladder programme with the
requirement being when the start switch is triggered, the sequence A+, B+, A–,
10s time delay, B– occurs and stop at that point until the start switch is triggered
again.
Course Outcome 4(CO4): Explain the standard fabrication techniques and principle of operation
of MEMS devices
1. Explain the steps involved in photolithography. State the chemicals used in each
of the stages along with the operating conditions.
2. Explain the criteria for choice of surface or bulk micromachining techniques in the design
of micro systems.
3. Explain with block diagram the steps in LIGA process. State two advantages of LIGA
process over other micro machining techniques.
Course Outcome 5 (CO5): Design and Analysis of commonly encountered mechatronics systems
for real time applications
1. With the help of a neat sketch explain the different mechatronics modules used
in automatic car park barrier system
2. Explain with a neat sketch the mechatronic implementation of a household weighing
machine
3. With a neat sketch, explain the physical system and working of a pick and place
robot.
SYLLABUS
MODULE I
Introduction to Mechatronics: Structure of Mechatronics system. Comparison between traditional

and mechatronics approach. Sensors - Characteristics -Temperature, flow, pressure sensors.
Displacement, position and proximity sensing by magnetic, optical, ultrasonic, inductive,
capacitive and eddy current methods. Encoders: incremental and absolute. Resolvers and
synchros. Piezoelectric sensors. Acoustic Emission sensors. vibration sensors.Force and tactile
sensors. Range finders: ultrasonic and light based range finders
MODULE II
Actuators: Hydraulic and Pneumatic actuators - Directional control valves,

pressure control valves, process control valves. Rotary actuators.
Development of simple hydraulic and pneumatic circuits using standard
Symbols. Electrical drives: DC, AC, brushless, servo and stepper motors. Harmonic
drive.Magnetostrictive actuators and piezoelectric actuators.
MODULE III
System modeling - Mathematical models and basic building blocks of general mechanical,
electrical, fluid and thermal systems. Typical elements of open and closed loop control systems.
Adaptive controllers for machine tools.
Programmable Logic Controllers (PLC) –Basic structure, input/ output processing. Programming:
Timers, Internal Relays, Counters and Shift registers. Development of simple ladder programs for
specific purposes.
MODULE IV
Micro Electro Mechanical Systems (MEMS): Fabrication: Deposition, Lithography,

Micromachining methods for MEMS -Surface and Bulk, Deep Reactive Ion Etching (DRIE) and
LIGA processes. Principle, fabrication and working of MEMS based pressure sensor,
accelerometer and gyroscope.
MODULE V
Mechatronics in Robotics- choice of Sensors and Actuators. Robotic vision system - Image
acquisition: Vidicon, charge coupled device (CCD) and charge injection device (CID) cameras.
Image processing techniques: histogram processing: sliding, stretching, equalization and
thresholding.
Case studies of Mechatronics systems: Automatic camera, bar code reader, simple weighing
machine, pick and place robot, automatic car park barrier system, automobile engine management
system.
Text Books:
1.Bolton W., Mechatronics: Electronic Control Systems in Mechanical and Electrical Engineering,
Person Education Limited, New Delhi, 2007
2.Ramachandran K. P., G. K. Vijayaraghavan, M. S. Balasundaram, Mechatronics:

IntegratedMechanical Electronic Systems, Wiley India Pvt. Ltd., New Delhi, 2008.
3.Saeed B. Niku, Introduction to Robotics: Analysis, Systems, Applications, Person Education

,Inc., New Delhi, 2006.
4.Devdas Shetty, Richard A. Kolk, “Mechatronics System Design”, Thomson Learning Publishing
Company, Vikas publishing house, Second edition, 2001.
Reference Books:
1. David G. Aldatore, Michael B. Histand, Introduction to Mechatronics and Measurement

Systems, McGraw-Hill Inc., USA, 2003.
2. Gordon M. Mair, Industrial Robotics, Prentice Hall International, UK, 1998.
3. HMT, Mechatronics, Tata McGraw-Hill Publishing Company Ltd., New Delhi, 2004.
4. Vijay K. Varadan, K. J. Vinoy, S. Gopalakrishnan, Smart Material Systems and MEMS: Design
and Development Methodologies, John Wiley & Sons Ltd., England, 2006.
5. Bishop, Robert H. The Mechatronics Handbook-2 Volume Set. CRC press, 2002.
Course Plan Course Contents and Lecture Schedule
Module No. of
Topic
No Lectures
Introduction to Mechatronics: Structure of Mechatronics system.
2
Comparison between traditional and mechatronics approach
Sensors - Characteristics -Temperature, flow, pressure sensors. 1
Displacement, position and proximity sensing by magnetic, optical,
1
ultrasonic, inductive, capacitive and eddy current methods
Encoders: incremental and absolute. Resolvers and synchros. 1
1 Piezoelectric sensors. Acoustic Emission sensors. vibration sensors,
2
Force and tactile sensors
Range finders: ultrasonic and light based range finders 1
Actuators: Hydraulic and Pneumatic actuators - Directional control

1
valves
pressure control valves, process control valves, 1
2 Rotary actuators. 1
Development of simple hydraulic and pneumatic circuits using
1
standard Symbols.
Electrical drives: DC, AC, and brushless, servo stepper motors 2
Harmonic drive. 1
System modeling - Mathematical models and basic building blocks of

2
general mechanical, electrical, fluid and thermal systems.
Typical elements of open and closed loop control systems. 1
Adaptive controllers for machine tools. 1
3 Programmable Logic Controllers (PLC) –Basic structure, input/
1
output processing.
Programming: Timers, Internal Relays, Counters and Shift registers.
2
Development of simple ladder programs for specific purposes 1
Micro Electro Mechanical Systems (MEMS): Fabrication:

1
Deposition, Lithography
4 Micromachining methods for MEMS -Surface and Bulk, 1
Deep Reactive Ion Etching (DRIE) and LIGA processes. 1
Principle, fabrication and working of MEMS based pressure sensor,
2
accelerometer and gyroscope
Mechatronics in Robotics- choice of Sensors and Actuators. 1

Robotic vision system - Image acquisition: Vidicon, charge coupled
1
device (CCD) and charge injection device (CID) cameras.
Image processing techniques: histogram processing: sliding,
2
stretching, equalization and thresholding.
5 Case studies of Mechatronics systems: Automatic camera, bar code
2
reader, simple weighing machine, picks and place robot,
automatic car park barrier system, automobile engine management
1
system.
Total 35

SEVENTH SEMESTER B TECH DEGREE EXAMINATION
COURSE: ECT415 MECHATRONICS
TIME: 3 HRS MAX. MARKS: 100
PART A
1 Differentiate between absolute and incremental encoders 3

2 List six examples of temperature sensors 3
3 Explain how cushioning is achieved in pneumatic actuators with a sketch. 3
4 Mention any two differences between finite position and infinite position 3
valves
5 List any 2 controlling factors in wet etching. 3
6 Sketch and label a MEMS based pressure sensor 3
7 What is latching? Draw a simple latched circuit 3
8 Write down the describing equations of basic mechanical building blocks 3
9 Illustrate the histogram processing technique for enhancing the image 3
contrast
10 Bring out any 3 difference between CCD and CID camera. 3
PART B
Answer one question from each module. Each question carries 14 marks.
Module I
11(A) Explain the working of an optical absolute encoder. How the number of 6
tracks and sectors of absolute encoder is related to the resolution of the
encoder?
11(B) Explain the structure of a mechatronics system. How is it different form 8
the traditional approach?
OR
12(A) Explain the sensor characteristics to be considered when choosing a 8
sensor for a mechatronics application
12(B) Compare the working of resolver and synchro 6
Module II
13(A) Develop a pneumatic circuit with standard symbols, to operate two 8
cylinders in sequence. Explain its working.
13(B) Explain the constructional features and working of brushless DC motor 6

OR
14(A) Illustrate the working of Harmonic Drives with neat sketches 8
14(B) Design a hydraulic circuit to operate a winch fitted with a hydraulic motor. 6
The motor should be run clockwise, counter clockwise and stopped. Use a
manually operated valve.
Module III
15(A) Draw and explain the block diagram of a feedback control system. 4
15(B) Develop a PLC ladder program for the following sequence: Start a motor 10
with push switch, and then after a delay of 90s, start a pump. When the
motor is switched off, the pump will get switched off after a delay of 5s.
Mention the logic used for each rung in the program to substantiate your
answer.
OR
16(A) Explain how a PLC can be used to handle analog inputs? 4
16(B) Explain the model a fluid flow system with basic building blocks, clearly 10
mention all assumptions
Module IV
17(A) Explain the steps involved in photolithography. State the chemicals used 6
in each of the stages along with the operating conditions
17(B) Compare and contrast various micro manufacturing techniques 8
OR
18(A) Describe the various mechanical problems associated with surface 6
micromachining
18(B) Explain the LIGA process associated with MEMS fabrication 8
Module V
19(A) With the help of a neat sketch explain the different mechatronics modules 10
used in automatic car park barrier system
19(B) List any four applications of robotic vision systems 4
OR
20(A) Explain the working of Barcode reader with reference to the coding 10
schemes. Mention the steps to process the digits in a barcode for a
particular product. Develop the steps in a program for reading the barcode.
20(B) List the steps in thresholding technique in image processing 4

BIOMEDICAL CATEGORY L T P CREDIT
ECT425
INSTRUMENTATION OEC 2 1 0 3
Preamble: This course aims to give a brief introduction to human physiology and various
instrumentations system used formeasurement and analysis of physiological parameters.
Prerequisite: Nil
CO 1 Explainthe human anatomy and physiological signal Measurements.

Illustrate various techniques used for measurement of Blood flow, blood pressure,
CO 2
and respiration rate and body temperature.
CO 3 Analyze the recording of ECG, EEG, EMG and ERG signals.
CO 4 Summarizethe concept of assisting and therapeutic devices.
CO 5 Describe the advances in medical imaging techniques.
CO 1 3 3
CO 2 3 3
CO 3 3 3
CO 4 3 3
CO 5 3 3
Assessment Pattern
End Semester Examination
Bloom’s Category Tests
1 2
Remember 10 10 20
Understand 30 30 60
Apply 10 10 20
Analyse
Evaluate
Create
Mark distribution
150 50 100 3 hours
Continuous Assessment Test(2 numbers) : 25 marks
Assignment : 15marks
Course Outcome 1 (CO1):Introduction to human physiological system

1. Describe in detail the formation of resting potential and action potential in human body.
2. Briefly explain the physiological functions of human circulatory system
3. Briefly explain the physiological functions of human respiratory system
Course Outcome 2 (CO2):Bio potential electrodes and ECG

1. Describe different bio-potential electrode used to measure bioelectric events.
2. Explain in details the electro conduction system of a human heart. Illustrate the same
with PQRS waveform of the ECG.
Course Outcome 3 (CO3):Measurement of blood pressure, blood flow and heart sound
1. With help of neat diagram explain how the oscilloetric method helps to measure blood
pressure.
2. Write a short note on phonocardiography.
Course Outcome 4 (CO4):Measurement of EEG, EMG and Respiratory Parameters and

therapeutic aid
1. Write a short note on tidal volume and vital capacity in breathing mechanism with neat
diagram.
2. Explain heart lung machine with the help of neat diagram.
3. Explain spirometer for measurement of respiratory parameters
4. Explain standard 10-20 electrode placement system for EEG measurement.
Course Outcome 5 (CO5):Advances in Radiological Imaging andElectrical safety

1. Draw the block diagram and explain the principle of ultrasound imaging.
2. What are the biological effects of NMR imaging over CT?
3. What is the basic principle of CT? How image reconstruction is done in CT
Syllabus
Module 1
Introduction to human physiological system
Physiological systems of the body (brief discussion on Heart and cardio vascularsystem, Anatomy
of nervous system, Physiology of respiratorysystems) problems encountered in biomedical
measurements.Sources of bioelectric potentials – resting and action potentials -propagation of
action potentials – bio electric potentials example(ECG, EEG, EMG, ERG, EOG, EGG etc.)
Module 2
Bio potential electrodes and ECG
Bio potential electrodes – theory – microelectrodes – skin surfaceelectrodes – needle electrodes –
biochemical transducers –transducers for biomedical applications. Electro conduction system of
the heart. Electro cardiograph –electrodes and leads – Einthoven triangle, ECG read out
devices,ECG machine – block diagram.
Module 3
Measurement of blood pressure, blood flow and heart sound
Measurement of blood pressure – direct and indirect measurement– oscillometric measurement –
ultrasonic method, measurement of blood flow and cardiac output, plethysmography –photo
electricand impedance plethysmographs.Measurement of heart sounds –phonocardiography
Module 4
Measurement of EEG, EMG and Respiratory Parameters
Electro encephalogram –neuronal communication – EEGmeasurement, recording and analysis.
Muscle response– Electromyogram (EMG) – NerveConduction velocity measurements-
Electromyogram Measurements. Respiratory parameters – Spiro meter,pneumograph
Therapeutic Aid
Cardiac pacemakers – internal and external pacemakers,defibrillators.Ventilators, heart lung
machine, hemodialysis, lithotripsy, infantincubators
Module 5
Advances in Radiological Imaging
X-rays- principles of generation, uses of X-rays- diagnostic stillpicture, fluoroscopy, angiography,
endoscopy, and diathermy.Basic principle of computed tomography, magnetic resonanceimaging
system and nuclear medicine system – radiation therapy.Ultrasonic imaging system - int roduction
and basic principle.
Electrical safety
Electrical safety– physiological effects of electric current –shock hazards from electrical
equipment –method of accident prevention, introduction to tele-medicine
Text Book
1. J. G. Webster, Medical Instrumentation, Application and Design, John Wiley and Sons
2. L. Cromwell, F. J. Weibell and L. A. Pfeiffer, Biomedical Instrumentation Measurements,
Pearson education, Delhi, 1990.
3. R. S. Khandpur, Handbook of Biomedical Instrumentation, Tata Mc Graw Hill
4. J. J. Carr and J. M. Brown, Introduction to Biomedical Equipment Technology, Pearson
Education
References:
1. John Enderele , Susan Blanchard, Joseph Bronzino, Introduction to Biomedical
Engg,Academic Press
2. Welkovitz, Biomedical Instruments, Theory and Design,Elselvier
3. Jerry L Prince, Jonathan M Links,Medical Imaging Signals & Systems,Pearson Education

No Topic No. of
Lectures
1 Introduction to human physiological system
1.1 Physiologicalsystems of the body (brief discussion on Heart and cardio

vascularsystem, Anatomy of nervous system, Physiology of 3
respiratorysystems) problems encountered in biomedical measurements.
1.2 Sources of bioelectric potentials – resting and action potentials 1
1.3 Propagation of action potentials – bio electric potentials example(ECG, EEG,
2
EMG, ERG, EOG, EGG etc.)
2 Bio potential electrodes and ECG

2.1 Bio potential electrodes –basic theory – microelectrodes – skin 2
surfaceelectrodes – needle electrodes
2.2 Biochemical transducers –transducers for biomedical applications 1
2.3 Instrumentation for clinical laboratory: Bio Potential amplifiers- 2
instrumentation amplifiers, isolation amplifiers, chopper amplifier
2.4 Electro conduction system of the heart, Electro cardiograph –electrodes and 2
leads – Einthoven triangle,
2.5 ECG read out devices,ECG machine – block diagram. 1
3 Measurement of blood pressure, blood flow and heart sound
3.1 Measurement of blood pressure – direct and indirect measurement– 2

oscillometric measurement –ultrasonic method
3.2 Measurement of blood flow and cardiac output, plethysmography –photo 2
electricand impedance plethysmographs
3.3 Measurement of heart sounds –phonocardiography 1
4 Measurement of EEG,EMG and Respiratory Parameters, Therapeutic

Aid
4.1 Electro encephalogram –neuronal communication – EEGmeasurement, 2
recording and analysis
4.2 Muscle response– Electromyogram (EMG) – NerveConduction velocity 2
measurements- Electromyogram Measurements.
4.3 Respiratory parameters – Spiro meter,pneumograph 1
4.4 Cardiac pacemakers – internal and external pacemakers,defibrillators. 1
4.5 Ventilators, heart lung machine, hemodialysis, lithotripsy, infantincubators 3
5 Advances in Radiological Imaging and Electrical Safety
5.1 X-rays- principles of generation, uses of X-rays- diagnostic stillpicture, 2

fluoroscopy, angiography, endoscopy, diathermy
5.2 Basic principle of computed tomography, magnetic resonanceimaging system 3
and nuclear medicine system
5.3 Ultrasonic imaging system - introduction and basic principle 1
5.4 Electrical safety– physiological effects of electric current –shock hazards 2
from electrical equipment –method of accident prevention, introduction to
tele- medicine

Course: ECT425 BIOMEDICAL INSTRUMENTATION
Time:3Hrs. Max. Marks:100
PART A
1 Enumerate different rhythms in EEG with frequency ranges. (3) K1

2 Write short notes on the formation of bio potential signal (3) K2
3 What is the difference between microelectrodes and needle (3) K2
electrodes?
4 With the help of a neat diagram of the Einthoven triangle, mention (3) K2
the necessity of the Einthoven triangle.
5 With the help of neat diagram explain ultrasonic method of blood (3) K2
pressure measurement.
6 Explain photoplethysmography. (3) K2
7 Explain DC defibrillator with the help of neat diagram (3) K2
8 What is infant incubator? How it works? (3) K2
9 Mention any three applications of telemetry medicine. (3) K1
10 Explain different methods of electric accident prevention. (3) K2
PART B
Answer one question from each module. Each question carries 14 mark.
Module I
11(A) Describe in detail the formation of resting potential and action (7) K2
potential in human body
11(B) Briefly explain the physiological functions of human circulatory (7) K2
system
OR
12(A) Explain the problems encountered in the biomedical measurements (6) K2

12(B) Briefly explain the physiological functions of human respiratory (8) K2
system.
Module II
13(A) Describe different bio-potential electrode used to measure (6) K2
bioelectric events.
13(B) Explain chopper amplifier with a neat diagram? (8) K2
OR
14 Explain in details the electro conduction system of a human (14) K2

heart. Illustrate the same with PQRS waveform of the ECG
Module III
15(A)With help of neat diagram explain how the oscillometric method (9) K2
helps to measure Blood Pressure.
15(B) Write a short note on phonocardiography. (5) K2
OR
16(A) What is blood pressure? How it is measured? (7) K2

16(B) Explain with the help of neat diagram, impedance plethysmograph (7) K2
for measurement of blood flow
Module IV
17(A) Write a short note on tidal volume and vital capacity in (7) K2
breathing mechanism with neat diagram.
17(B) Explain heart lung machine with the help of neat diagram. (7) K2
OR
18(A) Explain spirometer for measurement of respiratory parameters (7) K2

18(B) Explain standard 10-20 electrode placement system for EEG (7) K2
measurement.
Module V
19(A)Draw the block diagram and explain the principle of ultrasound (8) K2
imaging.
19(B) What are the biological effects of NMR imaging over CT? (6) K2
OR
20(A) What is the basic principle of CT? How image reconstruction is (8) K2
done in CT
20(B) How X-rays are produced? What are its properties? (6) K2
ELECTRONIC HARDWARE FOR CATEGORY L T P CREDIT

ECT435
ENGINEERS OEC 2 1 0 3
Preamble: This course will introduce students the exciting field of electronic hardware
designing and prototyping. This will help students to innovate faster with electronics
technology.
Prerequisite: Nil
Course Outcome: After the successful completion of the course the student will be able to
CO1 Identify various electronic components along with their specifications.

CO2 Design PCB using modern software tools.
CO3 Explain various testing procedures of electronic products.
CO4 Experiment and debug various software and hardware issues of a PC.
CO1 3 1 1
CO2 3 2 2 3
CO3 3 2 2 1
CO4 3 3 2 1
Assessment Pattern
Remember 10 10 20
Understand 30 30 60
Apply 10 10 20
Analyse
Evaluate
Create
Mark distribution
Total ESE
CIE ESE
Marks Duration
150 50 100 3 hours
14 marks.
Course Outcome 1 (CO1):Identify various electronic components along with their

specifications.
1. Describe the colour coding of a 4 band resistor and find the colour code for a 470k
resistor.
2. Compute the value of capacitors coded as 104 and 47K.
Course Outcome 2 (CO2): Design PCB using modern software tools.
1. Explain PCB design flow chart.

2. Design PCB layout of a regulated full wave rectifier circuit.
Course Outcome 3(CO3): Explain various testing procedures of electronic products.
1. Explain Acceptance testing and Type testing of a product.

2. Explain the testing procedure of a UPS.
Course Outcome 4 (CO4): Experiment and debug various software and hardware issues of a
PC.
1. Why is it important to backup files securely? Explain the different types of backup
techniques used.
SYLLABUS
MODULE I
Types of Components
Active Components: Diode, Transistor, MOSFET, LED, SCR, Integrated Circuits(ICs)
Passive Components: Resistor, Capacitor, Inductor, Transformer, Speaker/Buzzer.
Component Package Types

Axial lead, Radial Lead, Single Inline Package(SIP), Dual Inline Package (DIP), Transistor
Outline (TO), Pin Grid Array (PGA), Metal Electrode Face (MELF), Leadless Chip Carrier
(LCC), Small Outline Integrated Circuit (SOIC), Quad Flat Pack(QPF) and Thin
QFP(TQFP), Ball Grid Array (BGA), Plastic Leaded Chip Carrier (PLCC).
Introduction & Brief History
What is PCB, Difference between PWB and PCB, Types of PCBs: Single Sided (Single
Layer), Multi-Layer (Double Layer), PCB Materials.
MODULE II
Introduction to Electronic Design Automation (EDA)

Brief History of EDA, Latest Trends in Market, How it helps and why it requires, Different
EDA tools, Introduction to SPICE and PSPICE Environment, Introduction and Working of
PROTEUS
Introduction to PCB Design using OrCAD tool
PCB Designing Flow Chart: Schematic Entry, Net listing, PCB Layout Designing, Prototype
Designing, Design Rule Check(DRC), Design For Manufacturing(DFM)
PCB Making: Printing, Etching, Drilling, Assembly of components
Introduction to PCB Design using PROTEUS tool
Assembly of simple circuits
MODULE III
Types of Product Testing

Acceptance Testing, Type Testing , Safety Testing, Safety, safety standards, safety
certificates (CE, UL and VDE), Effect of environmental testing( refer to IEC 60068-1 for
guidance)
Quality Standards
General awareness of quality standards, quality management systems & documentation,
Awareness on ISO 17025, ISO 9001, Calibration and Uncertainty of measurements,
Awareness on disposal of Electronic waste
MODULE IV ELECTRONICS & COMMUNICATION ENGINEERING
Testing Procedures: Switch Mode Power Supply - (Applicable Standard: IS 14886) Safety
Testing(Earth Leakage current Test, Dielectric Test, Short Circuit Protection), Performance
Testing (Line Regulation, Load Regulation for a variation of Load Min to Max load and vice
versa)
Inverter, UPS - Inverter (Applicable Standard: IS 13314) Visual Inspection, High Voltage
Test, Insulation Resistance Test, No Load Test, Output Test. UPS (Applicable Standard: IEC
62040-3) Steady State Input Voltage Tolerance, Output-Normal Mode – No Load, Full Load,
Overload, Short Circuit
Safety Testing of Household Appliances: (Applicable Standard IS 302-1) Definitions and

Terminology, Protection against Shock, Power Input and Current, Leakage Current and
Electric Strength at Operating Temperature
Testing of Electric Iron/Electric Kettle: (Applicable Standard: IS 302-2) Ground bond

resistance, Touch Current, Temperature (Thermostatic Cut off) Power Consumption.
MODULE V
Assembly and Maintenance of PC: Introduction to Computer - Difference between

Hardware & Software, Booting concept, Different input and output devices/ cables,
connectors, different types of motherboard, controller cards, Ethernet cards, Different types
of RAM used in PC’s.
Installation: BIOS setting, Formatting of Hard Disk, Installation of Windows, Off-line drive
installation / online drive installation / Windows file repairing / BIOS password break /
Administrative password break / Data recovery. Application Software Installation, Dual
Booting Installation.
Assembly and dismantling: Assembly and dismantling of PCs front panel connection,
servicing of computer, Type of Backup, Taking Backup files and fine tuning the system,
running diagnostics tool, running of virus protection program.
Text Books:
1. C. Robertson. PCB Designer´s Reference. Prentice Hall, 2003.

2. D. Brooks, Signal Integrity Issues and Printed Circuit Board Design, Prentice Hall,
2003.
3. Advances in Electronic Testing, edited by D Gizopoulos, 2006
Reference Books:
1. C. Coombs, Printed Circuits Handbook, McGraw-Hill Professional, 6 edition, 2007.

2. Electronic Testing Handbook, McGraw-Hill, Dec 1993
3. PC Repair and Maintenance, A Practical Guide, Joel Rosenthal, Kevin Irwin, 2003
4. A Simple Guide to Computer Maintenance and Troubleshooting,
AdaneNegaTarekegn, Alemu KumilachewTegegne, 2015
Module Topic No. of

No Lectures
Active Components, Passive Components 3
Packages: Axial lead, Radial Lead, SIP, DIP, TO,PGA, MELF,
2
1 LCC, SOIC, QPF and TQFP, BGA, PLCC.
PCB, Difference between PWB and PCB, Types of PCBs 1
Brief History of EDA, Latest Trends in Market, How? Why?

1
Different EDA tools
Introduction to SPICE and PSPICE Environment 1
Introduction and Working of PROTEUS 2
PCB Designing Flow Chart: Schematic Entry, Net listing, PCB
Layout Designing, Prototype Designing, Design Rule Check(DRC), 2
Design For Manufacturing(DFM)
2 PCB Making: Printing, Etching, Drilling, Assembly of components 1
Introduction to PCB Design using PROTEUS tool: Assembly of
2
simple circuits
Acceptance Testing, Type Testing , Safety Testing, Safety, safety

standards, safety certificates (CE, UL and VDE), Effect of 3
environmental testing( refer to IEC 60068-1 for guidance)
General awareness of quality standards, quality management
systems & documentation, Awareness on ISO 17025, ISO 9001,
1
3 Calibration and Uncertainty of measurements, Awareness on
disposal of Electronic waste
SMPS Testing: (Applicable Standard: IS 14886) Safety

Testing(Earth Leakage current Test, Dielectric Test, Short Circuit
2
Protection), Performance Testing (Line Regulation, Load
Regulation for a variation of Load Min to Max load and vice versa)
Inverter (Applicable Standard: IS 13314) Visual Inspection, High
Voltage Test, Insulation Resistance Test, No Load Test, Output
Test. UPS (Applicable Standard: IEC 62040-3) Steady State Input 2
Voltage Tolerance, Output-Normal Mode – No Load, Full Load,
Overload, Short Circuit
(Applicable Standard IS 302-1) Definitions and Terminology,
4 Protection against Shock, Power Input and Current, Leakage 1
Current and Electric Strength at Operating Temperature
(Applicable Standard: IS 302-2) Ground bond resistance, Touch
1
Current, Temperature (Thermostatic Cut off) Power Consumption.
Difference between Hardware & Software, Booting concept 1

Different input and output devices/ cables, connectors 1
ELECTRONICS
Different types of motherboard, & Ethernet
controller cards, COMMUNICATION
cards, ENGINEERING
1
Different types of RAM used in PC’s.
BIOS setting, Formatting of Hard Disk 1
Installation of Windows, Off-line drive installation / online drive
installation / Windows file repairing / BIOS password break / 2
Administrative password break / Data recovery
5 Application Software Installation, Dual Booting Installation. 1
Assembly and dismantling of PCs front panel connection, servicing
1
of computer
Type of Backup, Taking Backup files and fine tuning the system,
1
running diagnostics tool
Running of virus protection program. 1

COURSE: ECT435 ELECTRONIC HARDWARE FOR ENGINEERS
PART A
1 Differentiate between active and passive components. 3

2 List any six type of electronic component packages. 3
3 State Moore’s law and how it is related to electronic design automation. 3
4 What is a Gerber file? How it is used while making a PCB? 3
5 What does CE certification in electronic product mean? 3
6 What does ISO IEC stand for? 3
7 What do you mean by line regulation in a power supply? 3
8 How is leakage current of a device related to temperature? 3
9 Write the operations taking place during the booting of a system 3
10 Does Windows have a data recovery tool? If so, Explain. 3
PART B
Module I
11(A) Compare Dual InlinePackage and Ball Grid Array IC Package. 8

11(B) Compute the value of capacitors coded as 103 and 4K7. 6
OR
12(A) Describe the colour coding of a 4 band resistor and find the colour code 7
for a 2.2k resistor.
12(B) Make a note on different types of PCBs. 7
Module II
13(A) Explain the process of manufacturing PCB from a PCB layout. 6
13(B) Explain the relevance of Design Rule Check and Design For 8
Manufacturing in PCB development.
OR
14(A) Explain PCB design flow chart. 8

14(B) Make a note on the tool PROTEUS and explain how it is different from 6
OrCAD.
Module III
15(A) Explain Acceptance testing and Type testing of a product. 8

15(B) Explain different ways for disposal of Electronic waste. 6
OR
16(A) What are uncertainties in measurements? How can you quantify it? 8
16(B) What is IEC 60068-1 ? What properties of the specimen is it concerned 6
about?
Module IV
17(A) Explain the testing procedure of an SMPS. 10

17(B) Explain the relevance of Insulation resistance test. 4
OR
18(A) Explain the testing procedure of an Inverter. 10

18(B) What does IS 302 standard part 1 refer to? 4
Module V
19(A) Explain the different types of computer RAM with their pros and cons. 7
19(B) What is the difference between an online drive installation and an offline 7
drive installation in case of windows? Explain the installation process.
OR
20(A) What are the various steps involved in Assembly and dismantling of PCs 8
front panel connection?
20(B) How can a user install two operating systems in a single computer? 6
Explain.
ECT445 IOT AND APPLICATIONS
OEC 2 1 0 3
Preamble: This course aims to develop skills in IoT system development and to apply the same
in real life applications.
Prerequisite: ECT342 Embedded systems and ECT401Wireless communication (optional)
Course Outcomes: After the completion of the course,a student will be able to
CO 1
Understand the IoT fundamentals and architecture modeling (K1)
K1
CO 2
Understand the smart things in IoT and functional blocks (K2)
K2
CO3
To understand the communication networks and protocols used in IoT. (K2)
K2
CO 4
To understand the cloud resources, data analysis and applications. (K3)
K3
CO5
To apply the IoT processes in embedded applications. (K3)
K3
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
CO 1 3 3 2 1 2 2
CO 2 3 3 3 3 2 2
CO 3 3 3 3 3 2 3 2
Assessment Pattern

1 2
Apply K3 0 20 40
Analyse
Evaluate
Create
Mark distribution
Total CIE ESE ESE

Marks Duration
150 50 100 3 hours
Internal Evaluation Pattern:
Course Outcome 1 (CO1): Understand the IoT fundamentals and architecture modeling (K1)
1. What is the definition of IoT and different characteristics of IoT

2. Define the architectural view of IoT and functional blocks
3. What are the different levels of IoT
Course Outcome 2 (CO2): Understand the smart things in IoT and functional blocks (K2)
1. What are the different smart things in IoT

2. How the communication is established among nodes and nodes and cloud.
3. What are the protocols that are used in IoT
Course Outcome 3 (CO3): To understand the communication networks and protocols used in
IoT. (K2)
1. Differentiate between IEEE standard protocols

2. Explain the advantages of next generation IP based protocols used in ioT
3. Define different layers used in embedded protocols
Course Outcome 4 (CO4): To understand the cloud resources, data analysis and applications.
(K3)
1. Explain how data is stored in IoT environment and processed
2. How to use cloud resources and different options available
3. How end devices can be used to control input and output devices
Course Outcome 5 (CO5): To apply the IoT processes in embedded applications. (K3)
1. What are the security and privacy concerns of IoT
2. Explain the typical applications of IoT.
3. Describe the processes involved in implementing a smart city.
SYLLABUS
Module 1 (7 Hours)
Introduction to IoT technology: Definitions and Characteristics of IoT, IoT Architectural View,
Physical Design of IOT, Logical Design of IoT- IoT Functional blocks, IoT communication
models, IoT Enabling Technologies, IoT Levels & Deployment Templates.
Module 2 (7 Hours)
IoT and M2M- M2M, Difference between IoT and M2M, SDN and NFV for IoT, Smart Objects:
The “Things” in IoT: Sensors, Actuators, and Smart Objects, Sensor Networks- Wireless Sensor
Networks (WSNs), Communication Protocols for Wireless Sensor Networks- Connecting Smart
Objects- Communication Criteria.
Module 3 (7 Hours)
Unified Data Standards –Protocols –IEEE 802.15.4 -The Physical Layer, The Media-Access
Control Layer, Uses of 802.15.4 ,The Future of 802.15.4: 802.15.4e and 802.15.4g–Modbus–
ZigBee-Zigbee Architecture- LoRaWAN -Standardization and Alliances, Physical Layer, MAC
Layer, Topology, LTE-M, NB-IoT-Network layer –The next generation: IP-based protocols -
6LoWPAN and RPL, Overview of the 6LoWPAN Adaptation Layer .
Module 4 (9 hours)
Data Collection, storage and computing Using a Cloud Platform-Introduction, Cloud Computing
Paradigm for Data Collection, Storage and Computing-Cloud Computing Paradigm, Cloud
Deployment Models-Everything as a Service and Cloud Service Models-SaaS, PaaS, IaaS, DaaS.
Cloud based platforms-XIVELY, NIMBITS.
IoT Physical Devices & Endpoints-IoT Device-Building blocks –Raspberry-Pi -Board-Linux on

Raspberry-Pi-Raspberry-Pi Interfaces (serial, SPI, I2C). Raspberry Pi interfacing and
programming examples using python (LED, switch, sensor, serial, SPI, I2C devices). Controlling
GPIO outputs and displaying sensor readings using web interface/cloud (Python programming is
required only for assignments and projects and not for examinations. Other end nodes and
platforms can also be used).
Module 5 (6 Hours)
IoT privacy, security and vulnerabilities solutions, vulnerabilities, security requirements, threat
analysis, security tomography, layered attacker model, Identity management, access control,
secure message communication.
Smart and Connected Cities-An IoT Strategy for Smarter Cities-Vertical IoT Needs for Smarter
Cities, Global vs. Siloed Strategies-Smart City IoT Architecture-Street Layer, City Layer, Data
Center Layer, Services Layer- Smart City Security Architecture - Smart City Use-Case Examples
– Street lighting, smart parking, smart traffic and air pollution monitoring
Maximum 35 /36 Hours
Text Books
1. Vijay Madisetti and ArshdeepBahga, “Internet of Things (A Hands-on- Approach)”, 1st
Edition, VPT, 2014 ( Module1,2,4)
2. David Hanes, Gonzalo Salgueiro, Patrick Grossetete, Rob Barton and Jerome Henry,
―IoT Fundamentals: Networking Technologies, Protocols and Use Cases for Internet of
Things, Cisco Press, 2017. (Module2,3,5)
3. Rajkamal, “Internet of Things : Architecture and Design Principles”, McGraw Hill (India)
Private Limited.
4. Raspberry Pi Cookbook, Software and Hardware Problems and solutions,
SimonMonk, O'Reilly (SPD), 2016, ISBN.
Reference Books/Papers
1. Olivier Hersent, David Boswarthick, Omar Elloumi , “The Internet of Things –Key
applications and Protocols”, Wiley, 2012 (Module 3)
2. Al-Fuqaha et al. Internet of things: A survey on enabling technologies, protocols, and
applications. IEEE Communications Surveys & Tutorials (2015), pp. 2347- 2376.
3. The Internet of Things (The MIT Press Essential Knowledge series) Paperback –
March 20, 2015 by SamuelGreengard
4. The Internet of Things: Converging Technologies for Smart Environments and
Integrated Ecosystems, OviduVermesan and Peter Friess, RiverPublishers.
5. Internet of Things - From Research and Innovation to Market Deployment-RIVER
PUBLISHERS, PETER FRIESS, OVIDIU VERMESAN (Editors)
6. Internet of Things Security and Data Protection, Sébastien Ziegler,Springer
International Publishing 2019.
No. of
No Topic
Lectures
1 Introduction to Internet of Things- 7Hrs
1.1 Introduction, definition and characteristics 1

1.2 IoT architectural view, functional blocks 2
1.3 IoT Communication models, enabling technologies 2
1.4 IoT deployment levels 2
2 Essential components of IoT- 7Hrs
2.1 IoT and M2M 2

2.2 Smart objects 2
2.3 Wireless sensor networks 3
3 IoT protocols- 7Hrs
3.1 IEEE 802.15.4 protocols 2

3.2 Zigbee 1
3.3 6LoWPAN and RPL 2
3.4 LoraWAN, LTE-M and NB-IoT 2
4 Cloud storage and Programming the end device- 9Hrs
4.1 Data storage and computation 3
4.2 Physical devices and end points 2
4.3 Raspberry pi programming 4
5 Security and Applications-6 Hrs

5.1 Security and Privacy 2
5.2 Smart city application 2
5.3 Use case examples 2
Simulation Assignments:
1. At least one assignment should be programming examples (python or any other language)
using Raspberry pi (Other options like arduino, node mcu etc. can also be used) Include
I/O interfacing, SPI, I2C, serial, sensor interfacing and web interface.
2. Another assignment shall be an IoT system implementation of mini project consisting of
a sensor, processing device, communication device and cloud storage (This can be
individual or group projects). Mini project is essential for understanding the concepts of
IoT.
3. Mini project can be done in the following areas.
a) Smart city (b) Weather monitoring system (c) air pollution monitoring (d)
Smart parking (e) smart traffic (f) any other application/s where
sensors/actuators devices are used.
4. Programming and mini project are essential for understanding the concepts of IoT.

Course Code: ECT445
Course Name: IOT AND APPLICATIONS
PART A
(Answer for all questions. Each Question Carries 3 marks)
1. List any five characteristics of IoT

2. What are the IoT enabling technologies?
3. What is a wireless sensor network?
4. What are the limitations of smart objects in WSNs??
5. Explain the need for IP optimization in IoTs?
6. What are the transmission modes used in modbus?
7. What are the 4 different cloud deployment models? Explain
8. What is cloud computing? Explain.
9. List the five functional units of security
10. What is message integrity? How it is checked? [ 10 X 3 = 30 Marks]
PART – B
(Answer one question from each module; each question carries 14 Marks)
Module – I
11. (a) Write a note on physical design of IoT. [06 Marks]

(b) Give a detailed description of the link layer, network layer, transport layer and
application layer protocols. [08 Marks]
OR
12. (a) What are the functional blocks of IoT? Explain? [07 Marks]
(b) Discuss different communication models used in IoT. [07 Marks]
Module – II
13. (a) What are the differences between IoT and M2M? [07 Marks]
(b) What are the issues of conventional networking architectures? How is it solved in
SDN? [07 Marks]
OR
14. (a) What are smart objects? What are their characteristics and the trends in smart
objects? [07 Marks]
(b) What are the characteristics and attributes to be considered for connecting smart
objects ? [07 Marks]
Module – III
15. (a) Explain IEEE 802.15.4 physical layer, MAC layer and security implementation with
the help of frame formats. [09 Marks]
(b) What are the modifications included in IEEE 802.15.4 e and g versions as compared
to IEEE 802.15.4? [05 Marks]
OR
16. (a) With the help of a diagram explain the Zigbee protocol architecture. [07 Marks]
(b) Explain LoraWAN architecture. Give a detailed description of the physical layer and
MAC layer of LoraWAN [07 Marks]
Module – IV
17. (a) Write a note on different cloud service models [06 Marks]
(b) What is virtualization in cloud computing? Explain the features, advantages and
concerns of cloud computing. [08 Marks]
OR
18. (a) With the help of a diagram explain the basic building blocks of an IoT device
[07 Marks]
(b) Explain cloud based data collection, storage and computing services provided by
XIVELY cloud platform. [07 Marks]
Module – V
19. (a) What is security and Privacy? List the 10 vulnerabilities of IoT. [07 Marks]
(b) Explain the layered attacker model. [07 Marks]
OR
20. (a) With the help of a diagram explain the 4 layer smart city architecture. [07 Marks]
(b) Write a note on street lighting architecture with the help of a diagram [07 Marks]
ENTERTAINMENT CATEGORY L T P CREDIT
ECT455
ELECTRONICS OEC 2 1 0 3
Prerequisite: Nil
Course objectives: The course aims to provide broad knowledge on various industry
standards, algorithms and technologies used to carry out digital audio and video broadcasting
in infotainment industry.
CO1 K2 Understand packetized streaming of digital media happens in the field of

infotainment industry.
CO2 K2 Realise the critical aspects of DVB and DAB standards used for media
broadcasting in infotainment industry.
CO3 K3 Apply video coding/compression algorithms are used to produce high-
definition video in MPEG-4 standard.
CO4 K2 Understandmodern display technologies for video reproduction.
PO PO PO
PO 1 PO 2 PO 3 PO 4 PO 5 PO 6 PO 7 PO 8 PO 9
10 11 12
CO 1 3 3 2
CO 2 3 3 2 2 2
CO 3 3 3 3 2 2
CO 4 3 3 2
Assessment Pattern

1 2
Apply K3 10 20
Analyse
Evaluate
Create
Mark distribution
150 50 100 3 hours

14 marks. Mark patterns are as per the syllabus with 100 % for theory.
Course Outcome 1 (CO1): Explain packetized streaming of digital media happens in the
field of infotainment industry.
1. Discuss MPEG-2 standards for streaming multimedia data and aspects of
synchronization, accessing scrambled programs and program synchronization.
Course Outcome 2 (CO2: Discuss the critical aspects of DVB and DAB standards used for
media broadcasting in infotainment industry.
1. Describe the existing standards and features for modulation and demodulation
schemes related with DAB, various types of DVB and DRM.
Course Outcome 3 (CO3): Explain how the video coding/compression algorithms are used
to produce high-definition video in MPEG-4 standard.
1. Understanding quantization, DCT, differential PCM for MPEG-4 video compression.
2. Developing audio sub-band coding methods based on psychoacoustic model of human
ear.
Course Outcome 4 (CO4):Discuss modern display technologies for video reproduction.

1. Explain the basic principles of video reproduction and display technology such as
CRT, LCD, plasma and OLED
SYLLABUS
Brief Review of Analog Television: Scanning, Horizontal and

Vertical Synchronization, Color information, Transmission methods.
NTSC and PAL standards.
Digital media streaming: Packetized elementary stream of audio-

I 7
video data, MPEG data stream, MPEG-2 transport stream packet,
Accessing a program, scrambled programs, program synchronization.
PSI, Additional (Network information and service description)
information in data streams for set-top boxes.
Digital Video Broadcasting (DVB): Satellite TV broadcasting –

DVB-S Parameters, DVB-S Modulator, DVB-S set-top box, DVB-S2.
Cable TV broadcasting – DVB-C Standard, DVB-C Modulator, DVB-

C set-top box.
II 7
Terrestrial TV broadcasting – DVB-T Standard, DVB-T Modulator,
DVB-T Carriers and System Parameters, DVB-T receiver.
Broadcasting for Handheld devices – DVB-H Standard
DVB tele-text, DVB subtitling system.
Digital Audio Broadcasting (DAB): Comparison of DAB with

DVB. Physical layer of DAB. DAB Modulator, DAB Data Structure,
DAB single frequency networks, Data broadcastingusing DAB.
III 6
Digital Radio Mondiale (DRM): Transmitter and receiver, Data rates.
High Definition Video and Audio: Pixel resolution, Comparison

with Standard Definition TV, Review of Discrete Cosine Transforms
(DCT), Video Compression - Quantization levels, Horizontal/Vertical
blanking interval, Vertical Color resolution, DPCM of moving
pictures, DCT, Run-length coding. MPEG-4 Video coding.
IV 8
Psycho-acoustic model, Principle of audio coding, Sub-band coding in
MPEG layer 1 and 2, MPEG Layer 3 and Dolby Digital, Multichannel
sound.
Display Technology: Block diagram of video reproduction system in

a TV, Cathode Ray tubes, Basic principle of Plasma displays, LC
V 7
displays, Light-emitting diode displays, Field emission displays,
Organic light emitting device displays.
Television of future: Holographic TV, Virtual Reality, Augmented

Reality.
Textbooks
1. W. Fischer, Digital Video and Audio Broadcasting Technology: A Practical

Engineering Guide (Signals and Communication Technology), Springer, 2020
2. Lars-Ingemar Lundström, Understanding Digital Television An Introduction to DVB
Systems with Satellite, Cable, Broadband and Terrestrial TV, Focal Press, Elsevier,
2006.
3. K F Ibrahim, Newnes Guide to Televeision and Video Technology, Newnes, 2007.
4. Jiun-Haw Lee, David N. Liu, Shin-Tson Wu, Introduction to Flat Panel Displays,
Wiley, 2008.
References
1. C. Poynton, "Digital Video and HD Algorithms and Interfaces,"Morgan Kaufmann,

2012.
2. Wolfgang Hoeg, Thomas Lauterbach, Digital audio broadcasting: principles and
applications of DAB, DAB+ and DMB, Wiley, 2009.
3. John Watkinson, Introduction to Digital Audio, Focal Press, 1994.
4. John Watkinson, Art of Digital Video, Focal Press, 2008.
5. John Watkinson, Introduction to Digital Video, Focal Press, 2001.
No TOPIC No of
Lectures
MODULE 1
1.1 Analog Television, Scanning, Horizontal and Vertical 2
Synchronization, Colour information, NTSC and PAL standards.
1.2 Analog TV Transmission 1
1.3 Packetized elementary stream. MPEG data stream, MPEG-2 2
transport stream packet
1.4 Accessing a program, scrambled programs, program 1
synchronization. Program Specific Information
1.5 Additional (Network information and service description) 1
information in data streams
MODULE II
2.1 Introduction to DVB, DVB-S Parameters, DVB-S Modulator, 2
DVB-S set-top box, DVB-S2.
2.2 DVB-C Standard, DVB-C Modulator, DVB-C set-top box. 1
2.3 DVB-T Standard, DVB-T Modulator, DVB-T Carriers and 2
System Parameters, DVB-T receiver.
2.4 Broadcasting for Handheld devices – DVB-H Standard 1
2.5 DVB teletext, DVB subtitling system. 1
MODULE III
3.1 Introduction to DAB, Comparison of DAB with DVB. 1
3.2 Physical layer of DAB. DAB Modulator, DAB Data Structure, 3
DAB single frequency networks, Data broadcastingusing DAB.
3.3 Digital Radio Mondiale (DRM): Transmitter and receiver, Data 2
rates.
MODULE IV
4.1 HDTV versus SDTV,Pixel resolution, 1
4.2 Review of Discrete Cosine Transforms (DCT) 1
4.3 Video Compression - Quantization levels, Horizontal/Vertical 3
blanking interval, Vertical Colour resolution, DPCM of moving
pictures, DCT, Run-length and Huffman coding. MPEG-4.
4.4 Psychoacoustic model, Principle of audio coding 1
4.5 Subband coding in MPEG layer 1 and 2 1
4.6 MPEG Layer 3 and Dolby Digital, Multichannel sound 1
MODULE V
5.1 Block diagram of video reproduction system in a TV 1
5.2 Cathode Ray tubes 1
5.3 Basic principle of Plasma displays, LC displays, Light-emitting 3
diode displays, Field emission displays, Organic light emitting
device displays.
5.4 Holographic TV, Virtual Reality, Augmented Reality. 2
Simulation Assignments (optional)
1 Realise live streaming of audio and video data using Python/MATLAB-Simulink or other
platforms.
2 Realise a basic video compression scheme from basic principles studied from this course
using Python/MATLAB. Obtain the performance parameters before and after comparison.
3 Simulate a DAB transmitter and receiver system using MATLAB/Simulink and study its
Performance under Gaussian noise.

VII SEMESTER B. TECH DEGREE EXAMINATION, (Model Question Paper)
Course Code: ECT455
Course Name: ENTERTAINMENT ELECTRONICS
PART A

1. Compare interlaced scanning and progressive scanning. 3
2 What is the maximum video signal frequency in PAL TV system? How 3
is it obtained?
3 Mention the differences between DVB-C and DVB-S modulators. 3
4 A DVB-C coaxial system uses 64QAM modulation with symbol rate

69 Mega symbols/s. Roll-off factor used is 0.15. Compute the gross 3
data rate.
5 Write short notes on coded OFDM. 3
6 What is the function of the Ensemble Transport Interface(ETI) in DAB 3

system? Explain.
7 With a suitable example, illustrate run length encoding. 3
8 Define discrete cosine transform. How is it important in signal 3

compression?
9 List the essential features of LCD screen compared to CRT/plasma 3
displays.
10 Differentiate between virtual reality and augmented reality. 3
10x3=30
PART B
MODULE 1
11a Sketch the frequency spectrum of typical PAL TV system. Show the 7
bandwidth, vision carrier, sound carrier and guard band frequencies.
11b Explain the packetized elementary streams in MPEG 7
OR
12a What is the need of vertical sync pulses and equalising pulses in PAL 7
TV system? Explain with necessary diagrams.
12b Explain how program synchronisation is achieved in MPEG-2. 7
MODULE II
13a With a block diagram explain DVB-C modulator. 7
13b With a block diagram explain the basic units in digital receiver/decoder 7
set-top-box in digital TV.
OR
14a How DVB-T modulator can be implemented using IFFT blocks? 7
Explain.
14b Explain the requirements of a standard on digital video broadcasting 7
for hand held mobile terminals.
MODULE III
15a Explain the details of physical layer in DAB. 7
15b Compare DAB and DVB.
OR
16a With a block diagram explain DAB modulator and transmitter. 7
16b Describe the essential features of Digital Radio Mondiale. 7
MODULE IV
17a Explain subband coding technique in layers I,II of MPEG1, MPEG 2. 7
17b With relevant details illustrate how the principle differential pulse code 7
modulation can be applied in MPEG 1 and MPEG 2video compression
methods.
OR
18a Explain a technical model for human ear, which will help in audio 7
coding. How this principle can be applied for developing an audio
coding scheme for compression.
18b Explain any one type of transform coding principle for video 7
compression.
MODULE V
19a With a diagram explain the principle of working of a two layer organic 7
LED device.
19b Explain the advantages and disadvantages of plasma displays. 7
OR
20a With a neat diagram explain the working of any one type of cathode 7
ray tube.
20b Explain the applications of virtual reality technology. 7
SEMESTER VII
MINOR
ECD481 MINIPROJECT
PWS 0 0 3 2
Preamble: The course aims

 To estimate the ability of the students in transforming the theoretical knowledge
studied in to a working model of an electronic system
 For enabling the students to gain experience in organisation and implementation of
small projects.
 Design and development of Small electronic project based on hardware or a
combination of hardware and software for electronics systems.
Course Plan
In this course, each group consisting of three/four members is expected to design

and develop a moderately complex electronic system with practical applications,
this should be a working model. The basic concept of product design may be taken
into consideration.
Students should identify a topic of interest in consultation with Faculty/Advisor.

Review the literature and gather information pertaining to the chosen topic. State the
objectives and develop a methodology to achieve the objectives. Carryout the
design/fabrication or develop codes/programs to achieve the objectives.
Demonstrate the novelty of the project through the results and outputs. The progress
of the mini project is evaluated based on a minimum of two reviews.
The review committee may be constituted by the Head of the Department. A project
report is required at the end of the semester. The product has to be demonstrated for
its full design specifications. Innovative design concepts, reliability considerations,
aesthetics/ergonomic aspects taken care of in the project shall be given due weight.
Course Outcomes
Be able to practice acquired knowledge within the selected area of
CO1 technology for project development.
Identify, discuss and justify the technical aspects and design aspects
CO2 of the project with a systematic approach.
Reproduce, improve and refine technical aspects for engineering
CO3 projects.
CO4 Work as a team in development of technical projects.
Communicate and report effectively project related activities and

CO5 findings.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
CO 1 3 3 3 2 3 2
CO 2 3 3 3 2 3 3 2
CO 3 3 3 3 2 3 3 2
CO 4 3 3 3 2
CO 5 3 3 3 2
Evaluation
The internal evaluation will be made based on the product, the report and a vivavoce
examination, conducted by a 3-member committee appointed by Head of the
Department comprising HoD or a senior faculty member, Academic coordinator for
that program, project guide/coordinator.
The Committee will be evaluating the level of completion and demonstration of

functionality/specifications, presentation, oral examination, work knowledge and
involvement.
Mark distribution

150 75 75 1 hour
Split-up of CIE
Component Marks
Attendance 10
Marks awarded based on guide’s evaluation 15
Project Report 10
Evaluation by Committee 40
Split-up of ESE
Component Marks
Level of completion 10
Demonstration of 25
functionality
Project Report 10
Viva-voce 20
Presentation 10
SEMESTER VII
HONOURS
ECT495 RF MEMS
VAC 3 1 0 4
Preamble: This course introduces students to the rapidly emerging, area of MEMS with
special emphasis on its applications in RF and wireless engineering
Prerequisite: Nil
Understand the various fabrication techniques and actuation mechanisms used in

CO1
RF -MEMS design and apply them in practical situations
CO2 Explain the principle of operation of MEMS switches
Understand the construction and principle of operation of micromachined inductors
CO3
and capacitors
Understand the construction and principle of operation of micromachined RF filters
CO4
and phase shifters
Analyse the performance improvement of antenna due to micromachining
CO5
techniques.
CO6 Identify the constraints in integration and packaging of RF MEMS devices
CO1 3 3
CO2 3 3
CO3 3 3
CO4 3 3
CO5 3 3
CO6 3 3 2
Assessment Pattern

Remember 10 10 20
Understand 30 30 60
Apply 10 10 20
Analyse
Evaluate
Create
Mark distribution
Total ESE
CIE ESE
Marks Duration
150 50 100 3 hours

Attendance
: 10 marks
: 25 marks
: 15 marks
14 marks.
Course Outcome 1 (CO1): Understand the various fabrication techniques and actuation
mechanisms used in RF -MEMS design and apply them in practical situations
1. Explain why Silicon evolved as the ideal substrate material for MEMS
fabrication.
2. Explain any two thin film deposition processes as applied to MEMS fabrication.
3. Discuss the various fabrication challenges associated with surface
micromachining.
4. List five applications of RF MEMS in our daily lives.
5. With a neat sketch explain the principle of operation of a MEMS piezoelectric
actuator.
Course Outcome 2 (CO2): Explain the principle of operation of MEMS switches
1. Explain the various parameters to be considered in the design of RF switches

2. With neat sketches explain the construction and working of a shunt type RF
MEMS switch
Course Outcome 3(CO3): Understand the construction and principle of operation of

micromachined inductors and capacitors
1. With neat sketches explain one application each of gap-tuning and area
tuning capacitors
2. Explain how inductance of micro machined inductors can be varied
Course Outcome 4 (CO4): Understand the construction and principle of operation of

micromachined RF filters and phase shifters
1. Sketch and explain the principle of operation of a surface acoustic wave filter
2. Sketch and explain the principle of operation of any two types of micromachined
Phase Shifters
Course Outcome 5 (CO5): Analyse the performance improvement of antenna due to

micromachining techniques
1. Analytically justify the need for micro machined antennas. How can its performance
be improved?
2. Explain the basic characteristics and design of microstrip antenna
Course Outcome 6 (CO6): Identify the constraints in integration and packaging of RF

MEMS devices
1. List the types of MEMS packages

2. Explain the reliability issues associated with RF MEMS packaging
SYLLABUS
MODULE I
Introduction: RF MEMS for wireless applications, MEMS technology and fabrication,

mechanical modeling of MEMS devices, MEMS materials and fabrication techniques-
surface micromachining, Bulk micromachining, LIGA, Actuation Mechanisms in MEMS,
Piezoelectric, Electrostatic, Thermal,Magnetic.
MODULE II
MEMS Switches: Introduction to MEMS switches; Capacitive shunt and series switches:
Physical description, circuit model and electromagnetic modeling; Techniques of MEMS
switch fabrication and packaging; Design of MEMS switches
MODULE III
Inductors and Capacitors: Micromachined passive elements; Micromachined inductors:

Effect of inductor layout, reduction of stray capacitance of planar inductors, folded inductors,
variable inductors and polymer-based inductors; MEMS Capacitors: Gap-tuning and area-
tuning capacitors, dielectric tunable capacitors.
MODULE IV
RF Filters and Phase Shifters: Principle of operation of - micromachined filters, surface

acoustic wave filters, micromachined filters for millimeter wave frequencies; Various types
of MEMS phase shifters; Ferroelectric phase shifters
MODULE V
Micromachined antennas: Micromachining techniques to improve antenna performance,

reconfigurable antennas.
Integration and Packaging: Role of MEMS packages, types of MEMS packages, module
packaging, packaging materials and reliability issues.
Text Books:
1.Vijay Varadan, K. J. Vinoy, K. A. Jose, “RF MEMS and Their Applications”, Wiley, 2003.
2. Hector J. De Los Santos,.“RF MEMS Circuit Design for Wireless Applications”, Artech
House, 2002
References
1.Gabriel M. Rebeiz, “RF MEMS: Theory, Design, and Technology”, Wiley, 2003
2.Eun Sok kim “Fundamentals of Micro electro mechanical Systems (MEMS)” McGraw Hill
No Topic No. of
Lectures
Introduction to RF MEMS: RF MEMS for wireless applications, , 1
MEMS technology and fabrication 1
mechanical modeling of MEMS devices, 2
MEMS materials 2
1
MEMS fabrication techniques – Surface - Bulk Micromachining and 2
LIGA
Actuation Mechanisms in MEMS, Piezoelectric, Electrostatic, 2
Thermal,Magnetic.
Introduction to MEMS switches 2

Capacitive shunt and series switches: Physical description 2
2 circuit model and electromagnetic modeling; 2
Techniques of MEMS switch fabrication and packaging 2
Design of MEMS switches 2
Inductors and Capacitors: Micromachined passive elements; 3

Micromachined inductors: Effect of inductor layout reduction of stray 2
capacitance of planar inductors
3
folded inductors, variable inductors and polymer-based inductors 2
MEMS Capacitors: Gap-tuning and area-tuning capacitors, dielectric 2
tunable capacitors
RF Filters and Phase Shifters:Principle of operation - micromachined 2

filters,
4 surface acoustic wave filters, 2
micromachined filters for millimeter wave frequencies 2
Various types of MEMS phase shifters; Ferroelectric phase shifters 2
Micromachined antennas: Micromachining techniques to improve 2
antenna performance
reconfigurable antennas. 2
5
Integration and Packaging: Role of MEMS packages, types of MEMS 2
packages
module packaging, packaging materials and reliability issues. 2

COURSE: ECT495 RF MEMS
Time: 3 Hrs Max. Marks: 100
PART A
1 List three applications of MEMS technology in RF communication devices 3

2 Explain why electrostatic actuation technique is preferred over magnetic 3
actuation in MEMS devices.
3 List the advantages of cantilever switches 3
4 Mention the differences between series and shunt RF MEMS switches 3
5 Explain one key parameter used in the design of MEMS inductors 3
6 Which of the two MEMS capacitors - Area tuning and Gap tuning is 3
preferred and why?
7 Explain the significance of Q factor in the design of MEMS filters 3
8 Explain one practical application of Phase shifters 3
9 What are the parameters to be optimised in the design of micro strip antennas 3
10 State three reliability issues in RF Microsystems packaging 3
PART B
Module I
11(A) Design a capacitor-based MEMS device for actuating the air-bag system 7
in a passenger car. Show relevant diagrams. Compare it with a piezo
electric based MEMS.
11(B) With neat sketches explain the LIGA process. Also mention two 7
applications of the same.
OR
12(A) With neat sketches explain the steps in fabrication of two structures using 8
bulk and surface micromachining.
12(B) An ink jet printer needs a fast and efficient mechanism for ink dispensing. 6
Design a MEMS based system for this application. Give required sketches
and equations.
Module II
13(A) Explain the various parameters to be considered in the design of RF 7
switches.
13(B) With relevant equations explain how the pull-in voltage of cantilever 7
beam type switches can be reduced. What are the integration and biasing
issues for RF switches
OR
14(A) With neat sketches explain the construction and working of a shunt type 10
RF MEMS switch. Explain the RF MEMS design flow with a neat sketch.
14(B) List the approaches used for low actuation voltage switching. 4
Module III
15(A) With neat sketches describe the fabrication process of any micro 7
machined inductor
15(B) Explain how the capacitance can be varied for micro machined capacitors. 7
OR
16(A) With neat sketches explain one application each of gap-tuning and area 6
tuning capacitors.
16(B) With the help of relevant equations show how inductance is varied in 8
micro machined inductors.
Module IV
17(A) Explain the realization of micro machined filters using resonators. 7
17(B) Explain the principle of operation of any two types of phase shifters 7
OR
18(A) With neat sketches explain the working of micromechanical filters using 10
comb drives.
18(B) Detailing the basic principles, mention two applications of MEMS phase 4
shifters
Module V
19(A) Explain the significance of reconfigurable antennas in satellite 7
communication
19(B) Discuss the reliability issues of MEMS packaging materials. 7
OR
20(A) Explain the need for micro machined antennas with analytical 6
justification. How can its performance be improved?
20(B) Explain different types of MEMS packages 8

DESIGN AND ANALYSIS OF CATEGORY L T P CREDIT

ECT497
ANTENNAS VAC 4 0 0 4
Preamble: This course aims to impart knowledge on the basic parameters, matching techniques,
design and working of various broad band antennas, practical antennas, antenna arrays and its
radiation patterns. It also introduces standard software to design antennas with a set of given
specifications.
Prerequisite: ECT 302 ELECTROMAGNETICS, ECT 401 MICROWAVE AND ANTENNAS
Course Outcomes: After the completion of the course the student will be able to:
Understand the concept of radiation mechanism, antenna parameters and antenna

CO1-K2
matching techniques.
CO2-K2 Illustrate the far filed pattern of different types of antennas.
CO3-K3 Analyze different types of broad band antennas and its radiation patterns.
CO4-K3 Design of various practical antennas, antenna arrays and field patterns.
CO5-K3 Familiarize Antenna Design Software and design microstrip patch antenna.
CO1 3 2 1 2
CO2 3 2 2 1 2 2
CO3 3 2 3 2 3 2
CO4 3 2 3 2 3 2
CO5 3 2 3 2 3 2
Assessment Pattern:

1 2
Remember
Apply K3 30 30 60
Analyse
Evaluate
Create
Mark distribution:

150 50 100 3 Hours
should answer all questions. Part B contains 2 questions from each module of which student should
answer any one. Each question can have maximum 2 subdivisions and carry 14 marks.
1. Explain the steps involved in the design of a T-match circuit.

2. With the help of neat sketches explain the working of a Rhombic Antenna and its features.
3. Explain omega match.
4. Calculate the Directivity of an antenna with field pattern given by,
µ - jkr 2
E = Eϑ = e cos φ sin 2 θ , 0 ≤ θ ≤ π , 0 ≤ φ ≤ 2π
4πr
5. Derive the vector potential for an electric current source J.

6. Explain the optimum design of rhombic antenna.
7. Derive expressions for the Far Field components and Radiation Resistance and Directivity of a
half wave dipole antenna.
1. Explain the axial mode and normal mode of operation of a helical antenna.
2. Derive the expressions for the fields radiated by a circular loop antenna.
3. Explain field equivalence principle and give the step to form an equivalent and aperture
problem.
4. Explain solution of Hallen’s Integral equation using delta gap model.
1. Discuss about any two feeding techniques for Microstrip Antenna.

2. List the important features of a Yagi-Uda Antenna.
3. Design an aperture antenna, with uniform illumination, so that the directivity is maximized at
an angle 300from the normal to the aperture. Determine the optimum dimension and its
associated directivity when the aperture is (i) square (ii) circular.
4. Design a Microstrip patch antenna for 2.4 GHz. The patch substrate has a dielectric of 2.2 and
with height 2.2 mm.
1. Explain the working of Lens Antenna. What do man by zoning in Lens Antenna?
2. Design a broad side Dolph-Tscebycheff array of 10 elements with spacing dbetween the
elements and with a major to minor lobe ratio of 26 dB. Find the excitation coefficients and
form the array factor.
3. Derive general expression for array factor of non-isotropic antennas.
4. Derive expression for array factor of N isotropic sources for end-fire array and also the
expression for major lobe, minor lobes and Nulls of the array.
5. Calculate the half-power beam width and directivity for the Dolph-Tchebyscheff array of lobe
ratio 26 dB for a spacing of λ between the elements.
2
6. Design an 8 element broadside array of isotropic sources having λ/2 spacing between
the elements .The pattern is to be optimized with a side lobe -25dB down the minor
lobe maxima.
1. Design a rectangular patch antenna operates at 5.5GHz.Use FR4/Duroid RT5870 as the substrate
of patch antenna. Determine the thickness from data sheet. Write a procedure in order to design
desired antenna by giving all equations , dimensions and simulation results (using
MATLAB/HFSS/CST Microwave Studio or any Open software)
2. By using the rectangular patch antenna which is designed in Question no 1 as unit element,
designing 1x4 array antennas at 5.5GHz on FR4/Duroid RT 5870 substrate. Determine the
optimum distance between the unit element using HFSS and also give simulation results
(radiation pattern, VSWR plot etc.).
Syllabus

Review of Antenna Parameters: -Polarization, Input impedance, Gain. Relation
between radiation fields and magnetic vector potential – Helmholtz equation and
I Lorentz conditions. Antenna matching –T match, Baluns, Gamma and Omega 9
match.Review of dipole antennas (short dipole and arbitrary length), Monopole
antennas, Vand rhombic antennas. Folded dipole and it's properties.
Analysis of Circular Loop and Biconical Antenna. Helical Antennas (normal mode
and axial mode) – relation for far fields, radiation resistance and gain.Current induced
II 9
in a dipole antenna – Pocklington and Hallen's integral equations. Solution of Hallen's
integral equation for current induced in a dipole antenna for delta gap model.
Near fields of linear antennas, self and mutual impedance, arrays of parallel dipoles,
Yagi-Uda antennas.Aperture antenna – Field equivalence principle. Radiation from
open-ended wave-guides, horn antennas, horn radiation fields, horn directivity,
III 10
optimum horn design, Rectangular micro-strip antennas –field analysis and
design.Designing an antenna with a set of given specifications using standard
software (MATLAB/HFSS/CST Microwave Studio or any Open software)
Parabolic reflector antennas, gain and beam width of reflector antennas, aperture-field
and current distribution methods, radiation patterns of reflector antennas, dual-
IV reflector antennas, lens antennas -hyperbolic lens and zoned lens. Frequency 8
independent antennas – Rumsey Principle – Spiral Antennas. Design of log periodic
dipole arrays.
Antenna arrays – General expression for array factor. Grating lobes. One dimensional
arrays- Broad side, end fire and Chebyshev arrays. Concept of beam steering. Design
of array using Schelkunnof's zero placement method and Fourier series method.
V Woodward-Lawson frequency-sampling design, Narrow beam design and Butler 9
matrix beam former. Adaptive Beam forming. 2D arrays – Rectangular and Circular
array.
Text Books:
1. Sopholes J. Orfanidis – Electromagnetic waves and antennas. Available at:

http://eceweb1.rutgers.edu/~orfanidi/ewa/
2. Consrantive A Balanis -Antenna Theory - Analysis and Design – 2/e John Wiley & Sons.
3. John D. Krans, Ronald J. Marhefka : Antennas for all Applications , 3/e, TMH
4. Thomas A Milligan – Modern Antenna Design, 2/e John Wiley & Sons.
References:
1. Collin R.E, Antennas & Radio Wave Propagation, McGraw Hill. 1985.
2. Jordan E.C. & K. G. Balmain, Electromagnetic Waves & Radiating Systems, 2/e, PHI.
3. Raju G.S.N., Antenna and Wave Propagation, Pearson, 2013.
4. Sisir K.Das & Annapurna Das, Antenna and Wave Propagation, McGraw Hill,2012
No.of.
No Topic
Lectures
Module I
Basic antenna parameters ( all parameters and related simple problems), Relation
1.1 1
between parameters (derivation required)
Relation between radiation fields and magnetic vector potential – Helmholtz
1.2 2
equation and Lorentz conditions.
1.3 Antenna matching –T match, Baluns, Gamma and Omega match. 2
1.4 Review of dipole antennas (short dipole and arbitrary length), 2
1.5 Monopole antennas, Vand rhombic antennas. Folded dipole and it's properties. 2
Module II
2.1 Analysis of Circular Loop and Biconical Antenna. 2
Helical Antennas (normal mode and axial mode) – relation for far fields,
2.2 2
radiation resistance and gain.
Current induced in a dipole antenna – Pocklington and Hallen's integral
2.3 3
equations.
Solution of Hallen's integral equation for current induced in a dipole antenna for
2.4 2
delta gap model.
Module III
Near fields of linear antennas, self and mutual impedance, arrays of parallel
3.1 2
dipoles, Yagi-Uda antennas.
3.2 Aperture antenna – Field equivalence principle. 2
Radiation from open-ended wave-guides, horn antennas, horn radiation fields,
3.3 2
horn directivity, optimum horn design,
3.4 Rectangular micro-strip antennas – Field analysis and design. 2
Designing an antenna with a set of given specifications using standard
3.5 2
software(MATLAB/HFSS/CST Microwave Studio or any Open software).
Module IV
Parabolic reflector antennas, gain and beam width of reflector antennas, aperture-
4.1 2
field and current distribution methods, radiation patterns of reflector antennas,
4.2 Dual-reflector antennas, lens antennas -hyperbolic lens and zoned lens. 2
4.3 Frequency independent antennas – Rumsey Principle – Spiral Antennas. 2
4.4 Design of log periodic dipole arrays. 2
Module V
5.1 Antenna arrays – General expression for array factor. Grating lobes. 1
One dimensional arrays- Broad side, end fire and Chebyshev arrays.
5.2 2
Concept of beam steering.
Design of array using Schelkunnof's zero placement method and Fourier series
5.3 2
method.
Woodward-Lawson frequency-sampling design, Narrow beam design and Butler
5.4 2
matrix beam former.
5.5 Adaptive Beam forming. 2D arrays – Rectangular and Circular array. 2
Simulation Assignments (ECT 477)
The following simulation assignments can be done with MATLAB/HFSS/CST Microwave Studio or
any Open software.
• Design a rectangular microstrip antenna (using MATLAB) for 1.8 GHz with RT-Duroid
5880 FR4 substrate having permittivity 4.4, loss tangent=0.001 and h=1.6mm and also
plot 3D, 2D radiation patterns and VSWR.
• The dimensions of a rectangular microstrip antenna are: L=3.733cm and W=3.973 cm.
The substrate height h=1.6mm and dielectric constant = 4.4.If operating frequency is 1.8
GHz.Write a MATLAB program to calculate
(a) The input impedance

(b) The position of the inset feed point for matching to 50 ohm feeder line.

SEVENTH SEMESTER B. TECH DEGREE EXAMINATION
Course Code: ECT497
Course Name: DESIGN AND ANALYSIS OF ANTENNAS
PART A
1 Using Lorentz condition show that ∇ 2 A + k 2 A = − µ J (3)

2 Explain design procedure of Gamma match. (3)
3 Derive expression for input impedance of a folded dipole antenna. (3)
4 Derive radiated fields for a circular loop of constant current. (3)
5 Explain the delta gap model in dipole antennas. (3)
6 Derive the expression for far field pattern of an open ended wave guide. (3)
7 Discuss about the Frequency Sampling Technique for Array Design. (3)
8 Explain the working of Spiral Antenna. Derive appropriate expressions. (3)
9 Design an Antenna Array using Schelkunnoff’s Zero Placement technique. (3)
10 Explain Butler Matrix Beam Forming. (3)
PART B
MODULE I
Derive the relation between magnetic vector potential and radiation fields in (9)
11 a)
antennas, stating clearly Helmholtz equation and Lorentz conditions.
An antenna with overall length l = 5λ the observations are made at r = 60λ . Find the (5)
b)
errors in phase and amplitude using far field approximation.
OR
12a) Derive expressions for the Far Field components and Radiation Resistance and (6)
Directivity of a short dipole antenna.
b) Derive the self and mutual impedance of two parallel Centers driven coupled dipole (8)
antennas.
.
MODULE II
13 a) Design an axial mode helical antenna for directivity 28 dBi for operating at 600 MHz. (5)
Calculate the radiation resistance, HPBW, BWFN and bandwidth of the designed
antenna.
b) Derive Pocklington’s and Hallen’s Integral Equation. Explain their significance. (9)
OR
14 a) Explain the Field Equivalence Principle in detail. (5)
Derive the expressions for power density, radiation resistance, and directivity of (9)
b)
Circular loop antenna.
MODULE III
15 a) Design a rectangular Microstrip antenna resonating at 2 GHz. The antenna uses a (8)
substrate with a dielectric of 10.2 and the height of the substrate is 0.3 cm.
b) Derive expressions for the Directivity of a Horn Antenna. (6)
OR
Design a Yagi-Uda array with a directivity of 9.2 dB at f 0 = 50 MHz . The desired (7)
16a) diameter of the parasitic elements is 2.54 cm and of the metal supporting boom 5.1
cm. Find the element spacing, lengths and total array length.
b) State Huygens’ Principle and discuss field equivalence in aperture antennas. (7)
MODULE IV
17a) Design a LPDA with τ = 0.85, σ = 0.03 for the frequency range 15-45 MHz. (7)
b) Explain the working of a parabolic dish antenna. Write down the expression for gain, (7)
HPBW and BWFN.
OR
18 a) Derive Rumsey Principle for frequency independent antennas. (7)
b) Why equiangular spiral antenna and log periodic antennas are called frequency (7)
independent antennas. Explain their working.
MODULE V
19 a) Design an antenna array using Schelkunoff’s zero placement method. (7)
b) Design a 5 element Dolph-Tscebycheff array with peak side lobe level 22 dB. (7)
OR
20 a) Design an antenna array using Woodward-Lawson Frequency Sampling technique. (8)
b) Derive the array factor of 900 corner reflector. (6)
MULTIRATE SIGNAL CATEGORY L T P CREDIT

ECT499
PROCESSING AND WAVELETS VAC 3 1 0 4
Preamble: The aim of this course is to introduce the idea of wavelets, and the related notions
of time frequency analysis, of time-scale analysis, and to describe the manner in which
technical developments related to wavelets have led to numerous applications. The concepts
of multirate filter banks is also introduced. The relation between wavelets and multirate
systems is brought out to illustrate how wavelets may actually be realized in practice.
Prerequisite: ECT 303 Digital Signal Processing
CO 1 Understand the concepts, properties and interconnection of Multirate systems,

Wavelets and Filterbanks and apply them in the analysis of signal processing
systems.
CO 2 Construct wavelets and multirate systems using the time domain and the frequency
domain approaches.
CO 3 Apply the wavelet transform, wavelet packet transform and its variants as a tool in 1-
D and 2-D signal analysis and processing.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
CO 1 3 3 3 3 2
CO 2 3 3 3 3 2
CO 3 3 3 3 3 3 1 2 2 1 2
Assessment Pattern
1 2
Apply K3 10 20 50
Analyse K4 10 10 20
Evaluate
Create
Mark distribution
Total CIE ESE ESE

Marks Duration
150 50 100 3 hours
14 marks.
Course Outcome 1 (CO1): Understand the concepts, properties and interconnection of

Multirate systems, Wavelets and Filter banks and apply them in the analysis of signal
processing systems.
1. Explain the basic building blocks of a multirate/ multi resolution analysis system.
2. Analyse the frequency domain behavior of the rate conversion operations to build
analysis and synthesis filters of a filter bank.
3. Analyse the time-frequency behaviour of signals through various analysis tools such as
Fourier Transform, Short Time Fourier Transform(STFT) and wavelet transform and
compare their properties.
4. What are the properties of a wavelet basis functions and what are the advantages of
representing signals using them.
Course Outcome 2 (CO2): Construct wavelets and multirate systems using the time domain
and the frequency domain approaches
1. Construct different families of wavelets using the filter bank approach.

2. Construct different families of wavelets using frequency domain approach.
3. Establish the relationship between filterbanks and wavelets to construct efficient
wavelet based analysis-synthesis systems.
ELECTRONICS
4. Design appropriate analysis and synthesis filters using&the
COMMUNICATION ENGINEERING
z-domain analysis that satisfy
the properties of a wavelet system.
Course Outcome 3 (CO3): Apply the wavelet transform, wavelet packet transform and its
variants as a tool in 1-D and 2-D signal analysis and processing.
1. Explain the wavelet packet transform and its implantation using filterbanks.
2. Explain the construction of the filter bank for the analysis of 2-D signals.
3. How will you choose wavelets for various applications? What properties of wavelets are
suited for different applications? Analyse and study with respect to the application point
of view
SYLLABUS
Module 1: Basics of Multirate processing and Filter banks

Introduction to multiresolution and multirate signal processing with some example
applications, Multirate System Fundamentals: Basic multirate operations – Decimation and
Interpolation, Transform domain analysis of Decimators and Interpolators, Decimation and
Interpolation filters, Fractional sampling rate alteration Interconnection of decimators and
interpolators, The Noble Identities.
Introduction to digital filter banks, The DFT filter bank, Two Channel Quadrature Mirror
Filterbank (QMF), Two channel Conjugate Quadrature Filter Bank (CQF). Perfect
Reconstruction.
Module 2: Introduction to Wavelet Transform

The Uncertainty Principle - Time-bandwidth product uncertainty, The time frequency plane
and its tilings, Short Time Fourier Transform, The Gabor Transform and its generalization,
Wavelet Transform in general and origin of Wavelets. The Continuous Wavelet Transform
(CWT), Condition of admissibility and its implications.
Introduction to Discrete Wavelet Transform (DWT), DWT from CWT, Logarithmic Scale
Discretization and Dyadic Discretization, Families of wavelets: Orthogonal and biorthogonal
wavelets, Vanishing moments and regularity.
Module 3: The Multiresolution Analysis (MRA), Wavelets and Filter Banks

The Multiresolution Analysis: The Dyadic Haar Multiresolution Analysis - The Haar Scaling
Functions and Function spaces, Nested spaces, The Haar Wavelet function, Orthogonality of
the Haar Scaling and Wavelet functions. Relating Scaling and Wavelet functions of Haar and
Filters, The Haar Filter Bank, Z-domain analysis of Haar filter bank.
The Daubechies’ family of MRA, Daubechies’ Filter banks, Relating QCF filter banks and
Daubechies’ wavelets.
Module 4: Biorthogonal Wavelets

Introduction to biorthogonal vector space, Biorthogonal Wavelet Systems, Signal
ELECTRONICS
representation using Biorthogonal Wavelet & COMMUNICATION
System, Construction ENGINEERING
of Biorthogonal wavelets
Design of Wavelet systems using frequency domain approach – Frequency domain
characterisation of filter coefficients, Design of Daubechies Wavelets using frequency
domain approach, JPEG 2000 5/3 filter bank and Spline MRA.
,
Module 5: Wavelet packets and 2-D DWT
The wavelet packet transform, Best wavelet packet tree, Noble identities and the Haar wave
Packet Transform. Introduction to 2-D DWT, Wavelet transform of an image, The Embedded
Zero-tree Wavelet (EZW) Coding. Applications of wavelets in audio & image compression
and denoising.
Text Books
1. P. P. Vaidyanathan, Multirate Systems and Filter Banks, Pearson Education, 2006.
2. K. P. Soman, K. I. Ramachandran, "Insight Into Wavelets - From Theory to Practice",
Prentice Hall of India, 3rd Edition, Eastern Economy Edition, Prentice Hall of India
Private Limited, 2010. Video lectures and Transcripts: Adv. Digital Signal
Processing: Multirate and Wavelet NPTEL Lecture series -
https://nptel.ac.in/courses/117/101/117101001/
Reference Books
1. Gilbert Strang and Truong Q. Nguyen, Wavelets and Filter banks, 2nd Edition,
Wellesley- CambridgePress,1998
2. Raghuveer M. Rao, Ajit S. Bopardikar, “Wavelet Transforms: Introduction to Theory
and Applications, Prentice Hall, 1998.
3. N.J. Fliege, Multirate Digital Signal Processing, John Wiley, 1999.

No Topic No. of
Lectures
1 Basics of Multirate processing and Filter banks
1.1 Introduction to multiresolution and multirate signal processing with some 1
example applications.
1.2 Multirate System Fundamentals: Basic multirate operations – Decimation 2
and Interpolation, Transform domain analysis of Decimators and
Interpolators, Decimation and Interpolation filters.
1.3 Fractional sampling rate alteration 1
1.4 Interconnection of decimators and interpolators, The Noble Identities. 1
1.5 Introduction to digital filter banks, The DFT filter bank. 2
1.6 Two Channel Quadrature Mirror Filterbank (QMF) 1
1.7 Two Channel Conjugate Quadrature Filter Bank (CQF). Perfect 2
Reconstruction.
2 Introduction to Wavelet Transform

2.1 ELECTRONICS
The Uncertainty Principle - Time-bandwidth & COMMUNICATION
product uncertainty, The ENGINEERING
2
time frequency plane and its tilings.
2.2 Short time Fourier Transform, The Gabor Transform and 2
its generalization, Wavelet Transform in general and origin of
Wavelets.
2.3 The Continuous Wavelet Transform (CWT), Condition of admissibility 2
and its implications.
2.4 Introduction to Discrete Wavelet Transform (DWT), DWT from CWT, 1
Logarithmic Scale Discretization and Dyadic Discretization
2.5 Families of wavelets: Orthogonal and biorthogonal wavelets, Vanishing 2
moments and regularity.
3 The Multiresolution Analysis (MRA), Wavelets and Filter Banks

3.1 The Multiresolution Analysis: The Dyadic Haar Multiresolution Analysis 3
- The Haar Scaling Functions and Function spaces, Nested spaces, The
Haar Wavelet function, Orthogonality of the Haar Scaling and Wavelet
functions.
3.2 Relating Scaling and Wavelet functions of Haar and Filters, The Haar 3
Filter Bank, Z-domain analysis of Haar filter bank.
3.3 The Daubechies’ family of MRA, Daubechies’ Filter banks, Relating QCF 3
filter banks and Daubechies’ wavelets.
4 Biorthogonal Wavelets
4.1 Introduction to biorthogonal vector space, Biorthogonal Wavelet Systems. 2
4.2 Signal representation using Biorthogonal Wavelet System, Construction 2
of Biorthogonal wavelets
4.3 Design of Wavelet systems using frequency domain approach – 3
Frequency domain characterisation of filter coefficients, Design of
Daubechies Wavelets using frequency domain approach.
4.4 JPEG 2000 5/3 filter bank and Spline MRA. 1
5 Wavelet packets and 2-D DWT

5.1 The wavelet packet transform, Best Wavelet packet tree, Noble identities 3
and the Haar wave Packet Transform.
5.2 Introduction to 2-D DWT, Wavelet transform of an image 3
5.3 The Embedded Zero-tree Wavelet (EZW) Coding. 1
5.4 Applications of wavelets in audio & image compression and denoising 2
Course Projects:
1. Study the spectral characteristics of Down sampler (Decimator) and Up sampler
(Interpolator).
2. Implement a 2- channel QMF/QCF filterbank and observe and syudy the ouput at
every stage of the filter bank.
3. Study the effect of sample rate conversion (Down sampling and Up sampling) on
audio data or on your own recorded speech.
4. Generate and plot the scaling and wavelet functions of Daubechies’ wavelets using
recursion/iterative method.
5. Study the equivalence of Haar multi resolution analysis and Haar filter bank for a
piecewise linear function.
6. Implement a biorthogonal 5/3 filter bank used in JPEG2000 standard.
7. Read an image and apply 2-D wavelet transform on it. Observe and study the
contribution of various subbands by reconstructing the image using selective
subbands.
8. Study and implementation of Wavelet Packet Transform and best wavelet packet tree.
9. Read an image and apply 2-D wavelet transform on it. Apply thresholding on the
wavelet coefficients of different subband based on energy of the coefficient and
reconstruct the signal. Compute the compression obtained and the quality of the
reconstructed image (PSNR) by varying the thresholds.
10. Apply Wavelet transform on noisy data and implement various wavelet based denoising
methods

SEVENTH SEMESTER B.TECH DEGREE EXAMINATION,
(Model Question Paper)
Course Code: ECT499
Course Name: MULTIRATE SIGNAL PROCESSING AND WAVELETS

PART A
1 Illustrate the frequency domain behavior of a decimator. K2
2 State and prove the noble identities for the multirate systems. K1
3 Explain dyadic discretization of constructing DWT from CWT K2
4 Explain Gabor transform. What is its drawback? K2
5 Explain the concept of nested spaces in multirate Analysis. K3
6 Establish the relationship between QCF Filterbank and Daubechies wavelet. K3
7 Explain the concept of biorthogonal vector space K2
8 When will you go for biorthoganal wavelet trasforms rather than orthogonal K2
wavelet transform. Specify any one application where biorthogonal wavelet
transform is used.
9 What are the advantages of Wavelet Packet Transform over Wavelet Transform? K2
10 Give a block schematic of 2-D wavelet decomposition and explain the construction K2
of image subbands.
PART – B
Module - I
11
a. Show that the decimator and interpolator are linear time varying systems
b. 7
For the system shown in Figure below, find the expression for y(n) in terms of x(n).
7
x(n) ↑3 ↓2 ↓3 ↑2 y(n)
CO1
K3
OR
12 14
a. Draw the block diagram of a 2-channel Quadrature Mirror Filterbank (QMF) and CO1
derive the expression for the output using z-domain analysis. What is the condition K2
for alias cancellation? How will you construct an alias free QMF?
Module - II
13 7
a. Derive Heisenberg’s uncertainty principle relating the time and frequency
resolutions. Prove that if the window function is Gaussian, equality holds. CO1
K2
b. Briefly explain the difference between Fourier Transform, Short Time Fourier 7
Transform (STFT) & Wavelet Transform. CO1
K3
OR
14 State and prove the admissibility conditions of a wavelet.
a. Check whether the following function is an admissible 7
wavelet?
b. e−t2 Cos⎛π 2 t ⎞ 7
⎜ ⎟ CO2
⎜
n2 ⎟ K4
⎝ ⎠
Module - III
15 14
Find two level Haar Wavelet transform using the analysis filters
a.
{h(−k)} = ⎧ 1 , 1 ⎫ & {g(−k)} = ⎧ 1 , −1 ⎫ for the following sequence. CO2
⎨ ⎬ ⎨ ⎬ K3
⎩ 2 2⎭ ⎩ 2 2⎭
[ 1, 0, -3, 2, 1, 0, 1, -2 ]
Remove from the Wavelet transform, the coefficients between –1 & 1 and then
reconstruct the function and compute Mean Squared Error.
OR
16 Let φ (t) and ψ(t) be the Haar scaling and wavelet functions. Let Vj and Wj be the 14
spaces spanned by φ j,k (t) = 2 j/ 2 φ(2 j t − k) and ψ j,k (t) = 2 j/ 2 ψ(2 j t − k),
respectively. Let f(t) be defined on 0 ≤ t < 1 and given by
⎧−1 0 ≤ t < 1 / 4 ⎫
CO2
⎪
4 1/4≤t<1 K3
/ 2 ⎪ f (t) = ⎪
⎪
⎨
2 1 / 2 ≤ t < 3 / 4⎬
⎪ ⎪
⎪⎩− 3 3 / 4 ≤ t < 1 ⎪⎭
1. Express f in terms of the basis for V2.

2. Decompose f into its component parts in W1, W0, and V0. In other words,
find the Haar wavelet decomposition for f.
3. Sketch each of the four decompositions..
Module - IV
17 Prove that in a Bi-orthogonal Wavelet System 14

∑ h(k) = ∑ ~(k) = 2 CO1
h K3
k k
~
∑ (k) h(k - 2 l) = δ .
h
l,0
k
OR
18 Construct db2 wavelet using time domain approach. 14

CO2
K2
Module - V
19 Discuss the application of wavelet analysis in Audio Coding and Signal Denoising. 14
Compare wavelet based denoising technique with FFT based denoising method CO3
K2
OR
20
a. Explain the Embedded Zero-tree Wavelet (EZW) algorithm used in image 7
compression. CO3
K2
b. For the seven-level decomposition shown below,
7
21 6 15 12 CO3
K3
-6 3 6 3
3 -3 0 -3
3 0 0 0
Find the bit stream or labels generated by the Embedded Zerotree Wavelet (EZW)
coder, after three steps of multiple pass procedure. Also, determine the list of
significant coefficients.
SEMESTER VIII
ECT402 WIRELESS COMMUNICATION
PCC 2 1 0 3
Preamble: This course aims to introduce students to basic theory and principles of wireless
communication systems in general, and cellular systems in particular. It also introduces basics of
radio wave propagation.
Prerequisite: ECT 305 Analog and Digital Communication
CO1 Summarize the basics of cellular system and cellular design fundamentals.
K2
CO2 Describe the wireless channel models and discuss capacity of wireless channels.
K2
CO3 Analyze the performance of the modulation techniques for flat-fading channels and
K4 multicarrier modulation.
CO4 Illustrate how receiver performance can be enhanced by various diversity techniques.
K3
CO5 Identify advantages of various equalization techniques and multiple-access
K3 techniques in wireless communication.
CO6 Calculate system parameters such antenna height, range, maximum usable frequency
K3 in different modes of radio wave propagation.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
CO1 3 3 2 1 2 2
CO2 3 3 3 3 2
CO3 3 3 3 3
CO4 3 3 3 3
CO5 3 3 3 3
CO6 3 3 3 2
Assessment Pattern

Tests
1 2
Remember
Apply K3 20 20 40
Analyse K4 15 15 30
Evaluate
Create
Mark distribution
Total CIE ESE ESE

Marks Duration
150 50 100 3 hours
Course Outcome 1 (CO1) : Summarize the basics of cellular system and cellular design
fundamentals. (K2).
1. List certain challenges in the design of a cellular wireless communication system.

2. A total of 33MHz of bandwidth is allocated to an FDD cellular system which uses two
25kHz simplex channels to provide full-duplex voice & control channels. Compute the
number of channels available per cell if the system uses 7-cell reuse.
3. Describe methods to improve coverage and capacity of a cellular system.
Course Outcome 2 (CO2): Describe the wireless channel models and discuss capacity of
wireless channels. (K2)
1. Compare and contrast flat-fading and frequency-selective fading channels.

2. How are Doppler spread and coherence time related? What is their significance?
3. Consider a Rayleigh fading channel with average received power of 25dBm. Compute
the probability that the received power is below 10dBm.
4. Differentiate between ergodic capacity and capacity with outage.
Course Outcome 3 (CO3): Analyze the performance of the modulation techniques for flat-
fading channels and multicarrier modulation. (K4)
1. Under Rayleigh flat-fading, derive an expression for the required average SNR to ensure
that outage probability does not below Pout .
2. How can subcarrier fading be mitigated?
3. Why is cyclic prefix required in OFDM?
Course Outcome 4 (CO4): Illustrate how receiver performance can be enhanced by various
diversity techniques. (K3)
1. Explain receiver diversity technique of maximal ratio combining technique.

2. Describe Almouti scheme for 2x2 MIMO.
3. Find the outage probability of BPSK modulation at Pb = 10-3 for a Rayleigh fading
channel with SC diversity for M = 1 (no diversity) M = 2. Assume equal branch SNRs of
15 dB.
Course Outcome 5 (CO5): Identify advantages of various equalization techniques and multiple-
access techniques in wireless communication. (K3)
1. Describe the steps for LMS algorithm.

2. Compare multiple-access schemes TDMA, FDMA and CDMA.
3. Consider a channel with impulse response h(t) = exp(-t/T) u(t). Find two-tap Zero-forcing
equalizer for this channel?
Course Outcome 6 (CO6): Calculate system parameters such antenna height, range, maximum
usable frequency in different modes of radio wave propagation. (K3)
1. Derive expression for critical frequency, maximum usable frequency and skip distance
(assuming flat earth’s surface) for sky wave propagation.
2. A communication system is to be established at a frequency of 50MHz with a transmitter
power 1.2kW. The field strength of the directive antenna is 3 times that of a half wave
antenna, ht = 50m , hr = 5m. A field strength of 80μV/m is required to give satisfactory
reception. Find the range of the system.
SYLLABUS
Module 1: Introduction to Wireless Communication Systems (8 Hours)
1.1 Introduction to Wireless Communication Systems (4): Generations: 2G, 3G, 4G, 5G.
Wireless LAN, Bluetooth and Personal Area networks, Broadband Wireless Access --
WiMAX Technology. Wireless Spectrum allocation, Standards.
1.2 Cellular System Design Fundamentals (4): Frequency Reuse, channel assignment
strategies, Handoff strategies, Interference and system capacity, trunking and grade off
service, improving coverage and capacity – cell splitting, sectoring, microcells.
Module 2: Wireless Channels (7 Hours)
2.1 Path loss and shadowing (1): Free space path loss, Two-Ray model, Shadowing,
2.2 Statistical Multipath Channel Models (4): Time-varying channel impulse response,
Narrowband fading, Wideband fading models, Delay spread and Coherence bandwidth,
Doppler spread and Coherence time, Flat fading versus frequency selective fading, Slow
fading versus fast fading, Discrete-time model.
2.3 Capacity of Wireless Channels (2): Review of Capacity in AWGN, Capacity of flat
fading channel – Ergodic capacity, Capacity with Outage, Capacity with CSI-R.
(Derivations of capacity formulae are not required; Only expressions, computations and
significance required.)
Module 3: Modulation techniques (7 Hours)
2.1 Digital Signaling for Flat fading Channels (4): Analysis of Average Error Probability
and Outage probability of BPSK in flat-fading channels.
2.2 Multi-carrier Modulation (3): Data transmission using multicarrier modulation for
frequency-selective fading channels. Overlapping subchannels, Mitigation of Subcarrier
Fading, Discrete Implementation of multicarrier – OFDM. Cyclic prefix, Peak-to-
average-power-ratio.
Module 4: Diversity, Equalization, and Multiple Access (8 Hours)

4.1 Diversity (3 hours): Receiver diversity – selection combining, maximal ratio combining.
Transmitter diversity – Alamouti scheme for 2x2 MIMO.
4.2 Equalization (3): Equalization – Linear and non-linear equalization, Zero forcing,
MMSE equalizers. LMS algorithm. Adaptive Equalization.
4.3 Multiuser Systems (2): Uplink and Downlink, Multiple Access, Frequency-Division
Multiple Access (FDMA), Time-Division Multiple Access (TDMA), Code-Division
Multiple Access (CDMA), Orthogonal Frequency-Division Multiple Access (OFDMA).
Module 5 Radio Wave Propagation (7 Hours)

Ground wave propagation, Plane earth reflection, Space wave and surface wave, Spherical earth
propagation, Tropospheric waves, Ionospheric propagation, Effects of earth’s magnetic field,
Critical frequency, Maximum usable Frequency, Virtual height.
Text Books
1. Andrea Goldsmith, Wireless Communications, Cambridge University Press, 2005
2. Theodore S. Rappaport, Wireless communication: Principles and Practice, 2/e, Pearson
Education, 1990
3. Aditya Jagannatham, Principles of Modern Wireless Communication Systems, Mc Graw
Hill, 2017.
4. Robert Collin, Antennas and Radiowave Propagation, McGraw Hill, 2016.
Reference Books
1. David Tse and Pramod Viswanath, Fundamentals of Wireless Communication,

Cambridge University Press, 2005
2. Jochen Schiller, Mobile Communications, Pearson, 2008
3. Andreas F Molish , Wireless Communications, 2nd Edition , Wiley India Publications,
2013
4. W. C. Y. Lee, Mobile Cellular Telecommunication, McGraw Hill,
5. Gordon L. Stuber, Principles of Mobile Communication , Springer,2017
6. Rahim Thafazoli, Technologies for The Wireless Future , Volume 2 , Wiley and Sons ,
2004
7. Edward C Jordan and Keith G Balmain, Electromagnetic Wave and Radiating System,
Pearson.
No Topic No. of
Lectures
1 Introduction to wireless communication systems (8 Hours)
1.1 Generations: 2G, 3G, 4G, 5G. 2
1.2 Wireless LAN, Bluetooth and Personal Area networks, Broadband 1

Wireless Access -- WiMAX Technology.
1.3 Wireless Spectrum allocation, Standards 1
1.4 Cellular concept, Frequency Reuse, channel assignment strategies, 2

Handoff strategies
1.5 Interference and system capacity, trunking and grade off service. 1
1.6 improving coverage and capacity – cell splitting, sectoring, microcells. 1
2 Wireless Channels (7 Hours)
2.1 Free space path loss, Two-Ray model, Shadowing 1
2.3 Time-varying channel impulse response, Narrowband fading 2
2.4 Wideband fading models – Delay spread and Coherence bandwidth, 1

Doppler spread and Coherence time
2.5 Flat fading versus frequency selective fading, Slow fading versus fast 1
fading, Discrete-time model.
2.6 Review of Capacity in AWGN, Capacity of flat fading channel – Ergodic 2

capacity, Capacity with Outage, Capacity with CSI-R.
3 Modulation Techniques (7 Hours)

3.1 Average Probability of error and outage probability 1
3.2 Performance evaluation of BPSK in flat fading channels 2
3.4 Multi carrier modulation in frequency-selective channel 1
3.5 OFDM – DFT/IDFT, Cyclic Prefix 2
3.6 PAPR 1
4 Diversity, Equalization and Multiple Access (8 Hours)
4.1 Receiver Diversity – Selection combining, Maximal ratio combining 2
4.2 Transmit Divesity – Alamouti for 2x2 MIMO 1
4.3 Equalization – linear and nonlinear, ZF and MMSE, LMS, Adaptive 3
4.4 Multiple access – FDMA, TDMA, CDMA, OFDMA 2
5 Radio Wave Propagation (7 Hours)
5.1 Ground wave propagation, Plane earth reflection, Space wave and surface 2
wave
5.2 Spherical earth propagation, Tropospheric waves, Ionospheric 2
propagation
5.3 Effects of earth’s magnetic field, Critical frequency, Maximum usable 3
Frequency, Virtual height.
Total Hours 37
1. Simulate flat fading and frequency-selective fading wireless channel models using
Python/MATLAB
2. Evaluate BPSK, QPSK, QAM in wirelss fading channels using Python/MATLab.
3. Evaluate zero-forcing and MMSE equalization techniques using Python/MATLAB.
4. Simulation of standard path loss models using Python/MATLab.
5. Simulation of Alamouti scheme using Python/MATLab
6. Students can undertake course projects based on following topics: (a) Channel Modelling
of wireless channels (b) Comparison of modulation schemes for wireless system (c) Multi
carrier modulation schemes (d) Comparison of equalization techniques (e)
Implementation of MIMO schemes.

EIGHTH SEMESTER B. TECH. DEGREE EXAMINATION
Course Code: ECT402
Course Name: WIRELESS COMMNICATION
PART A
(Answer ALL Questions. Each Question Carries 3 Marks.)
1. Give important features of 5G system.

2. Discuss different handoff strategies.
3. Explain the notion of delay spread and coherence bandwidth.
4. Give the expression for capacity of flat fading AWGN channel with CSIR. Describe how
it is obtained assuming AWGN capacity.
5. Define outage probability.
6. What is the purpose of using cyclic prefix in an OFDM system?
7. Consider a channel with impluse response h(t) = exp(-t/T) u(t). Find tap coefficients of a
two-tap zero-forcing equalizer for this channel.
8. Why do we say that maximal ratio combining achieves full diversity?
9. Distinguish between critical frequency and maximum usable frequency.
10. Define virtual height in antennas. [10 X 3= 30]
PART – B
(Answer one question from each module; each question carries 14 marks)
Module I
11. (a) How are co-channel signal-to-interference ratio, cluster size and system capacity are
related to one another in a cellular system ? Explain with necessary equations. [07 Marks]
(b) Explain the architecture of wireless LAN (WLAN). [07 Marks]
OR
12. (a) List three differences between 2G and 3G systems. [03 Marks]
(b) A total of 33MHz of bandwidth is allocated to an FDD cellular system which
uses two 25kHz simplex channels to provide full-duplex voice & control
channels. Compute the number of channels available per cell if the system uses 7-
cell reuse. [03 Marks]
(c) What is cell splitting? How does it improve system performance? [08 Marks]
Module II
13. (a) Explain the effect of multipath propagation using 2-ray model. [07 Marks]
(b) Assuming narrow band fading model, derive statistical characterization of in-phase
and quadrature components of a received signal when an unmodulated carrier is
transmitted. [07 Marks]
OR
14. (a) Derive time-varying impulse response of multipath wireless channel. [07 Marks]
(b) Consider a flat-fading channel with iid channel gains g[i] which can take on values
g1=0.05 with probablity p1=0.1, g2=0.5 with probability p2=0.5, and g3=1 with
probability p3=0.4. The transmit power is 10mW, noise spectral density N0 = 10-9 W/Hz,
and channel bandwidth is 30kHz. Assume instantaneous CSI-R, but transmitter does not
have CSI. Compute the capacity of the channel. [07 Marks]
Module III
15. (a) Derive expression for average probability of error in BPSK under Rayleigh flat-
fading when symbol duration is roughly equal to channel coherence time. [07 Marks]
(b) What is Peak-to-Average Power-Ratio (PAPR) in OFDM system? How can it be

reduced ? [07 Marks]
OR
16. (a) Determine the average SNR per bit of BPSK modulation in Rayleigh slow-fading
channel such that 95% of the times, average probability of bit error is less than 10-4 .
[05 Marks]
(b) Explain multi-carrier modulation in OFDM. [09 Marks]

Module IV
17. (a) Explain Least-Mean-Square algorithm for equalization. [09 Marks]

(b) Compute the average probability of bit error of BPSK under maximal-ratio-
combining two-branch diversity with iid Rayleigh fading. Average SNR on each
branch is 10dB. [05 Marks]
OR
18. (a) Describe Alamouti scheme for 2x2 MIMO. [07 Marks]
(b) Describe how multiple-access works on uplink and downlink in CDMA.[07 Marks]
Module V
19. (a) Derive an expression for the LOS distance in km when the antenna heights above
ground are ht and hr respectively for the transmitter and receiver antennas. [07 Marks]
(b) A receiving antenna is located at 80km from the transmitting antenna. The
height of the transmitting antenna is 100m. What is the required height of the
receiving antenna? [07 Marks]
OR
20. (a) An HF radio communication is to be established between two points on the earth’s
surface. The points are at a distance of 2600km. The height of the ionosphere layer is
200km and critical frequency is 4MHz. Find maximum usable frequency. [07 Marks]
(b) Derive expression for critical frequency, maximum usable frequency and skip
distance (assuming flat earth’s surface) for sky wave propagation. [07 Marks]
COMPREHENSIVE COURSE CATEGORY L T P CREDIT

ECT404
VIVA PCC 1 0 0 1
Preamble: The objective of this Course viva is to ensure the basic knowledge of each student in the
most fundamental core courses in the curriculum. The viva voce shall be conducted based on the
core subjects studied from third to eighth semester. This course helps the learner to become
competent in placement tests and other competitive examinations.
Guidelines
1. The course should be mapped with a faculty and classes shall be arranged for practicing
questions based on the core courses listed in the curriculum.
2. The viva voce will be conducted by the same three member committee assigned for final
project phase II evaluation. It comprises of Project coordinator, expert from
Industry/research Institute and a senior faculty from a sister department.
3. The pass minimum for this course is 25.
4. The mark will be treated as internal and should be uploaded along with internal marks of
other courses.
5. Comprehensive Viva should be conducted along with final project evaluation by the three
member committee.
Mark Distribution
Total marks: 50, only CIE, minimum required to pass : 25 Marks
ECD416 PROJECT PHASE II
PWS 0 0 12 4
Preamble: The course ‘Project Work’ is mainly intended to evoke the innovation and invention
skills in a student. The course will provide an opportunity to synthesize and apply the knowledge
and analytical skills learned, to be developed as a prototype or simulation. The project extends to
2 semesters and will be evaluated in the 7th and 8th semester separately, based on the achieved
objectives. One third of the project credits shall be completed in 7th semester and two third in 8th
semester. It is recommended that the projects may be finalized in the thrust areas of the
respective engineering stream or as interdisciplinary projects. Importance should be given to
address societal problems and developing indigenous technologies.
Course Objectives
 To apply engineering knowledge in practical problem solving.
 To foster innovation in design of products, processes or systems.
 To develop creative thinking in finding viable solutions to engineering problems.
Course Outcomes [COs]: After successful completion of the course, the students will be able to:
Model and solve real world problems by applying knowledge across domains
CO1
(Cognitive knowledge level: Apply).
Develop products, processes or technologies for sustainable and socially relevant
CO2
applications (Cognitive knowledge level: Apply).
Function effectively as an individual and as a leader in diverse teams and to
CO3
comprehend and execute designated tasks (Cognitive knowledge level: Apply).
Plan and execute tasks utilizing available resources within timelines, following ethical
CO4
and professional norms (Cognitive knowledge level: Apply).
Identify technology/research gaps and propose innovative/creative solutions
CO5
(Cognitive knowledge level: Analyze).
Organize and communicate technical and scientific findings effectively in written and
CO6
oral forms (Cognitive knowledge level: Apply).
CO1 2 2 2 1 2 2 2 1 1 1 1 2
CO2 2 2 2 1 3 3 1 1 1 1
CO3 3 2 2 1
CO4 2 3 2 2 3 2
CO5 2 3 3 1 2 1
CO6 2 2 2 3 1 1
PO # Broad PO PO# Broad PO

PO3 Design/Development of solutions PO9 Individual and team work
Conduct investigations of
PO4 complex problems PO0 Communication
PO6 The Engineer and Society PO12 Lifelong learning
PROJECT PHASE II
Phase 2 Targets
 In depth study of the topic assigned in the light of the report prepared under Phase - I;
 Review and finalization of the approach to the problem relating to the assigned topic.
 Preparing a detailed action plan for conducting the investigation, including teamwork.
 Detailed Analysis/ Modeling / Simulation/ Design/ Problem Solving/Experiment as
needed.
 Final development of product/ process, testing, results, conclusions and future
directions.
 Preparing a paper for Conference Presentation/ Publication in Journals, if possible.
 Presenting projects in Project Expos conducted by the University at the cluster level
and/ or state level as well as others conducted in India and abroad.
 Filing Intellectual Property Rights (IPR) if applicable.
 Preparing a report in the standard format for being evaluated by the Department
Assessment Board.
 Final project presentation and viva voce by the assessment board including the
external expert.
Evaluation Guidelines & Rubrics
Total: 150 marks (Minimum required to pass: 75 marks).

 Project progress evaluation by guide: 30 Marks.
 Two interim evaluations by the Evaluation Committee: 50 Marks (25 marks for each
evaluation).
 Final evaluation by the Final Evaluation committee: 40 Marks
 Quality of the report evaluated by the evaluation committee: 30 Marks
(The evaluation committee comprises HoD or a senior faculty member, Project coordinator
and project supervisor. The final evaluation committee comprises of Project coordinator,
expert from Industry/research/academic Institute and a senior faculty from a sister
department).
Evaluation by the Guide

The guide/supervisor must monitor the progress being carried out by the project groups on
regular basis. In case it is found that progress is unsatisfactory it should be reported to the
Department Evaluation Committee for necessary action. The presence of each student in the
group and their involvement in all stages of execution of the project shall be ensured by the
guide. Project evaluation by the guide: 30 Marks. This mark shall be awarded to the students in
his/her group by considering the following aspects:
Project Scheduling & Distribution of Work among Team members: Detailed and extensive
Scheduling with timelines provided for each phase of project. Work breakdown structure well
defined. (5)
Literature survey: Outstanding investigation in all aspects. (4)
Student’s Diary/ Daily Log: The main purpose of writing daily diary is to cultivate the habit of
documenting and to encourage the students to search for details. It develops the students’ thought
process and reasoning abilities. The students should record in the daily/weekly activity diary the
day to day account of the observations, impressions, information gathered and suggestions given,
if any. It should contain the sketches & drawings related to the observations made by the
students. The daily/weekly activity diary shall be signed after every day/week by the guide. (7)
Individual Contribution: The contribution of each student at various stages. (9)
Completion of the project: The students should demonstrate the project to their respective
guide. The guide shall verify the results and see that the objectives are met. (5)
EVALUATION RUBRICS for PROJECT Phase II: Interim Evaluation - 1
Good evidence of an implementable
Some of the aspects of the proposed
The project is not addressing any project. There is some evidence for The project has evolved into incorporating
idea can be implemented. There is
useful requirement. The idea is the originality of the work done by the an outstandingly novel idea. Original work
still lack of originality in the work
Novelty of idea, and evolved into a non-implementable team . There is fresh specifications/ which is not yet reported anywhere else.
done so far by the team. The project
Implementation scope one. The work presented so far is features/improvements suggested by Evidence for ingenious way of innovation
2-a 5 is a regularly done theme/topic
[CO5] lacking any amount of original work the team. The team is doing a design which is also Implementable. Could be a
without any freshness in terms of
[Group Evaluation] by the team. from fundamental principles, and patentable / publishable work.
specifications, features, and/or
there is some independent learning
improvements.
and engineering ingenuity.
Good evidence of task allocation Excellent display of task identification and

being done, supported by project distribution backed by documentary
No task distribution of any kind. Task allocation done, but not journal entries, identification of tasks evidence of team brainstorming, and
Effectiveness of task
Members are still having no clue on effectively, some members do not through discussion etc. However, the project journal entries. All members are
2-b distribution among 5 what to do. have any idea of the tasks assigned. task distribution seems to be skewed, allocated tasks according to their
team members. Some of the tasks were identified but and depends a few members heavily capabilities, and as much as possible in an
[CO3] not followed individually well. than others. Mostly the tasks are being equal manner. The individual members are
[Group Evaluation]
followed by the individual members. following the tasks in an excellent manner.
Little or no evidence of continued There is some improvement in the Good evidence of planning done and Excellent evidence of enterprising and
planning or scheduling of the primary plan prepared during phase I. being followed up to a good extent extensive project planning and follow-up
project. The students did not stick to There were some ideas on the since phase I. Continued use of project
after phase I. Materials were listed
Adherence to project the plan what they were going to materials /resources required, but not and thought out, but the plan wasn't management/version control tool to track
schedule. build nor plan on what materials / really thought out. The students have the project. Material procurement if
2-c 5 followed completely. Schedules were
[CO4] resources to use in the project. The some idea on the finances required, prepared, but not detailed, and needs applicable is progressing well. Tasks are
[Group Evaluation] students do not have any idea on the but they have not formalized a budget improvement. Project journal is updated and incorporated in the schedule.
budget required even after the end of plan. Schedules were not prepared. presented but it is neither complete A well-kept project journal showed
phase - I. No project journal kept or The project journal has no useful nor updated regularly. evidence for all the above, in addition to
the journal. details on the project. the interaction with the project guide.
(0 - 1 Marks) (2 - 3 Marks) (4 Marks) (5 Marks)

The team showed some interim The interim results showed were good
There were significant interim results
Interim Results. results, but they are not complete / and mostly consistent/correct with
There are no interim results to show. presented which clearly shows the progress.
2-d [CO6] 5 consistent to the current stage, Some respect to the current stage. There is
[Group assessment] corrections are needed. room for improvement.
Very poor presentation and there is Presentation is average, and the Good presentation. Student has good Exceptionally good presentation. Student
Presentation
no interim results. The student has student has only a feeble idea about idea about the team's project. The has excellent grasp of the project. The
2-e [Individual 5 no idea about the project proposal. the team work. overall presentation quality is good. quality of presentation is outstanding.
assessment]
Phase-II Interim Evaluation - 1 Total Marks: 25

EVALUATION RUBRICS for PROJECT Phase II: Interim Evaluation – 2
No Parameters Marks Poor Fair Very Good Outstanding
The student does not show any The student appears to apply some The student is able to show some Excellent knowledge in design procedure
Application of evidence of applying engineering basic knowledge, but not able to evidence of application of engineering and its adaptation. The student is able to
engineering knowledge on the design and the show the design procedure and the knowledge in the design and apply knowledge from engineering
knowledge methodology adopted. The student's methodologies adopted in a development of the project to good domains to the problem and develop
2-f [CO1] 10 contribution in application of comprehensive manner. extent. solutions.
[Individual engineering knowledge in the project
Assessment] is poor.
The individual contribution is evident.

Involvement of No evidence of any Individual There is evidence for some amount Evidence available for the student acting
The student has good amount of
individual participation in the project work. of individual contribution, but is as the core technical lead and has excellent
5 involvement in core activities of the
members limited to some of the superficial contribution to the project.
2-g [CO3] project.
tasks.
[Individual
Assessment] (0 - 1 Marks) (2 - 3 Marks) (4 Marks) (5 Marks)
None of the expected outcomes are Many of the expected outcomes are Most of the stated outcomes are met.
Only a few of the expected outcomes
Results and achieved yet. The team is unable to achieved. Many observations and Extensive studies are done and inferences
are achieved. A few inferences are
inferences upon derive any inferences on the failures/ inferences are made, and attempts to drawn. Most of the failures are addressed
5 made on the observed failures/issues.
execution [CO5] issues observed. Any kind o f identify the issues are done. Some and solutions suggested. Clear and valid
2-h No further work suggested.
[Group Assessment] observations or studies are not made. suggestions are made for further work. suggestions made for further work.
Documentatio n and The individual student has no idea on The individual's presentation is done
Presentation's overall quality needs The individual’s presentation
presentation. the presentation of his/her part. The professionally and with great clarity. The
5 to be improved. performance is satisfactory.
2-i .[CO6] presentation is of poor quality. individual’s performance is excellent.
[Individual assessment]
Phase-II Interim Evaluation - 2 Total Marks: 25

EVALUATION RUBRICS for PROJECT Phase II: Final Evaluation
No Parameters Marks Poor Fair Very Good Outstanding
The team is able to show evidence of Excellent knowledge in design procedure
Engineering The team does not show any evidence The team is able to show some of the
application of engineering knowledge and its adaptation. The team is able to
2-j knowledge. [CO1] of applying engineering knowledge design procedure and the
10 in the design and development of the apply knowledge from engineering
[Group Assessment] on the design and the methodology methodologies adopted, but not in a
project to good extent. There is scope domains to the problem and develop an
adopted. comprehensive manner.
for improvement. excellent solution.

Relevance of the The project has some relevance with The project is relevant to the society The project is exceptionally relevant to
project with respect to The project as a whole do not have respect to social and/or industrial and/or industry. The team is mostly society and/or industry. The team has
2-k societal and/or any societal / industrial relevance at application. The team has however successful in translating the problem made outstanding contribution while
5 all.
industrial needs. made not much effort to explore into an engineering specification and solving the problem in a professional and/
[Group Assessment] further and make it better. managed to solve much of it. or ethical manner.
[CO2]
Some of the aspects of the proposed Good evidence of an implementable
The project is not addressing any The project has evolved into incorporating
idea appears to be practical. There is project. There is some evidence for the
useful requirement. The idea is an outstandingly novel idea. Original work
still lack of originality in the work originality of the work done by the
evolved into a non-implementable which is not yet reported anywhere else.
done. The project is a regularly done team. There is fresh specifications/
Innovation / novelty / one. The work presented so far is Evidence for ingenious way of innovation
theme/topic without any freshness in features/improvements suggested by the
lacking any amount of original work which is also Implementable. Could be a
2-i Creativity 5 terms of specifications, features, and/ team. The team is doing a design from
[CO5] by the team. patentable publishable work.
or improvements. fundamental principles, and there is
[Group Assessment] some independent learning and
engineering ingenuity. Could be
translated into a product / process if
more work is done.

Only a few of the expected outcomes
None of the expected outcomes are are achieved. A few inferences are Many of the expected outcomes are Most of the stated outcomes are met.
Quality of results / achieved. The team is unable to made on the observed failures/issues. achieved. Many observations and Extensive studies are done and inferences
conclusions / 10 derive any inferences on the No further work suggested. inferences are made, and attempts to drawn. Most of the failures are addressed
2-m solutions. [CO1] failures/issues observed. Any kind of identify the issues are done. Some and solutions suggested. Clear and valid
[Group Assessment] observations or studies is not made. suggestions are made for further work. suggestions made for further work.

Presentation slides follow a good style
Presentation slides follow professional The presentation slides are exceptionally
The presentation slides are shallow style formats to some extent. However, format and there are only a few issues.
Organization of the slides is good. Most good. Neatly organized. All references
Presentation - Part I and in a clumsy format. It does not its organization is not very good.
of references are cited properly. The cited properly. Diagrams/Figures, Tables
Preparation of slides. 5 follow proper organization. Language needs to be improved. All and equations are properly numbered,
flow is good and team presentation is
[CO6] references are not cited properly, or and l i s ted. Results/ inferences clearly
neatly organized. Some of the results
[Group Assessment]. acknowledged. Presentation slides highlighted and readable.
are not clearly shown. There is room
needs to be more professional.
for improvement.
2-n (0 - 1 Marks) (2 - 3 Marks) (4 Marks) (5 Marks)

Good presentation/ communication by
Presentation - Part The student is able to explain some of Clear and concise communication
the student. The student is able to
II: Individual The student is not communicating the content. The student requires a lot exhibited by the student. The
explain most of the content very well.
Communication 5 properly. Poor response to of prompts to get to the idea. There are presentation is outstanding. Very
There are however, a few areas where
[CO6] questions. language issues. confident and tackles all the questions
the student shows lack of preparation.
[Individual without hesitation. Exceptional traits of
Language is better.
Assessment]. communicator.
Phase-II Final Evaluation, Marks: 40

EVALUATION RUBRICS for PROJECT Phase II: Report Evaluation
Sl.
The prepared report is shallow and not Project report shows evidence of
Project report follows the standard The report is exceptionally good. Neatly
as per standard format. It does not systematic documentation. Report is
format to some extent. However, its organized. All references cited properly.
follow proper organization. Contains mostly following the standard style
organization is not very good. Diagrams/Figures, Tables and equations
mostly unacknowledged content. Lack format and there are only a few issues.
2-o Report [CO6] 30 Language needs to be improved. All are properly numbered, and listed and
of effort in preparation is evident. Organization of the report is good.
references are not cited properly in the clearly shown. Language is excellent and
References are not cited. Mostly consistently formatted. Most of
report. There is lack of formatting follows professional styles. Consistent
Unprofessional and inconsistent references/sources are cited/
consistency. formatting and exceptional readability.
formatting. acknowledged properly.
(0 - 11 Marks) (12 - 18 Marks) (19 - 28 Marks) (29 - 30 Marks)
Phase - II Project Report Marks: 30

SEMESTER VIII
PROGRAM ELECTIVE III
BIOMEDICAL CATEGORY L T P CREDIT

ECT414
ENGINEERING PEC 2 1 0 3
Preamble: This course will introduce aspects of biomedical engineering as applied to

biologicalsystems described using engineering principles and the use of modern diagnostic and
therapeutic equipment.
Prerequisite:NIL
CO1 Understand basic bioelectric potentials and its implications in diagnostics

Understand the principles used for diagnosis of abnormalities in the cardiovascular
CO2
system
CO3 Explain the techniques used for diagnosis and therapy in the neuromuscular system
Understand the principle and working of different types of bio medical
CO4
equipment/device
CO5 Classify various diagnostic medical imaging techniques.
CO1 3 2
CO2 3 2
CO3 3 3
CO4 3 3
CO5 3 3
Assessment Pattern
Bloom’s Category Continuous Assessment Tests End semester

examination
I II
Remember 10 10 10
Understand 20 20 20
Apply 20 20 70
Analyze
Evaluate
Create
Mark distribution
Total marks CIE ESE ESE Duration

150 50 100 3 hours
contain10 questions with 2 questions from each module, having 3 marks for each question.
Studentsshould answer all questions. Part B contains 2 questions from each module of which
student should answer any one. Each question can have maximum 2 sub-divisions and carry 14
marks.

Course Outcome 1 (CO1): Understand basic bioelectric potentials and their implications in
diagnostics
1. Explain the different types of bio electric potential with diagrams?

2. How does depolarisation and repolarisation occur in a cell?
3. Explain different types of bio-potential electrodes?
Course Outcome 2 (CO2): Explain the principles used for diagnosis of abnormalities in the
cardiovascular system
1. Explain ECG machine with a block diagram

2. A patient was subjected to non-invasive method of blood pressure measurement.
Which is the method used? What is the principle behind the method and how is it
done?
Course Outcome 3 (CO3): Explain the techniques used for diagnosis and therapy in the
neuromuscular system
1. Explain with adiagramthe 10-20 system of electrode placement to perform EEG analysis.
2. Explain instrumentation system for acquiring EMG?
3. Explain how functional activity can be elicited from the paralyzed limb of a spinal cord
injured patient using electrical stimulation.
Course Outcome 4 (CO4): Understand the principle and working of different types of bio medical
equipment/device
1. Explain ventilator parameters?

2. What is a cardiac defibrillator? With a neat diagram explain DC defibrillator.
3. With a neat block diagram explain single channel ECG telemetry transmitter
Course Outcome 5 (CO5): Understand various diagnostic medical imaging techniques

1. Explain the principle of basic pulse echo system with necessary diagrams.
2. Compare NMR imaging and CT imaging.
Syllabus
Module 1
Introduction to bio-medical engineering, overview of anatomy and physiological systems of the

body.Sources of bio-electric potential: Resting and action potential, propagation of action
potentials. Bioelectric potentials examples (ECG, EEG, EMG, ERG, EOG, EGG concept only.)
Electrode theory: Nernst relation, Electrode skin interface, Bio potential electrodes:
Microelectrodes, skin surface electrodes, needle electrodes
Instrumentation for clinical laboratory: Bio potential amplifiers-instrumentation amplifiers, carrier
amplifiers, isolation amplifiers, chopper amplifiers
Module 2
Heart and cardiovascular system (brief discussion), electro conduction system of the heart.
Electrocardiography, ECG machine block diagram, ECG lead configurations, ECG recording
system, Einthoven triangle, analysis of ECG signals.
Measurement of blood pressure: Direct, indirect and relative methods of blood pressure
measurement, auscultatory method, oscillometric and ultrasonic noninvasive pressure measurements.
Measurement of blood flow: Electromagnetic blood flowmeters and ultrasonic blood flow meters
Module 3
The human nervous system. Neuron, action potential of brain, brain waves, types of electrodes,
placement of electrodes, evoked potential, EEG recording, analysis of EEG.
Electrical activity of muscles- EMG. Signal Acquisition and analysis. Applications of EMG -
myoelectric control system.Electrical stimulation of the muscle and nerve, Functional Electrical
Stimulation- Principle and applications.
Physiology of respiratory system (overview), Respiratory parameters, spirometer, body
plethysmographs, gas exchange and distribution.
Module 4
Instruments for clinical laboratory: Oxymeters, pH meter, blood cell counter, flame photometer,
spectrophotometer
Therapeutic Equipments: Principle, block schematic diagram, working and applications of :

pacemakers, cardiac defibrillators, heart–lung machine, dialyzers, surgical diathermy equipment,
ventilators
Biomedical Telemetry system: Components of biotelemetry system, application of telemetry in
medicine, single channel telemetry system for ECG and temperature measurement.
Module 5
Medical Imaging systems (Basic Principle only): X-ray imaging - Properties and production of X-
rays, X-ray machine, applications of X-rays in medicine.
Computed Tomograpy: Principle, image reconstruction, scanning system and applications
Ultrasonic imaging systems: Basic pulse echo system, propagation of ultrasonic through tissues and
reflections, display types, A-Scan, B-Scan, M-Scan, applications, real-time ultrasonic imaging
systems and probes.
Magnetic Resonance Imaging – Basic NMR components, Biological effects and advantages of
NMR imaging
Patient Safety: Electric shock hazards, leakage current,safety codes for electro medical equipments
Text Books
1. R. S. Khandpur, Handbook of Biomedical Instrumentation, Tata Mc Graw Hill

2. Leslie Cromwell, Fred J. Weibell, Erich A. Pfeiffer, Biomedical Instrumentation and
Measurements, PHI, 2nd Edition, 2004
References:
1. John G Webster, “Medical Instrumentation application and design”, John Wiley 3rde/d
2. J. J. Carr, “Introduction to Biomedical Equipment Technology”, Pearson Education 4th e/d.
3. Richard Aston, “Principle of Biomedical Instrumentation and Measurement”. Merrill
Education/Prentice Hall.
4. Barbara Christe, Introduction to Biomedical Instrumentation, Cambridge University
Press, 2008
MODULE NO. OF
TOPIC
NO LECTURES
Introduction to bio-medical instrumentation system, overview
2
of anatomy and physiological systems of the body.
Sources of bio-electric potential: Resting and action potential,
propagation of action potentials, Bioelectric potentials 2
examples (ECG, EEG, EMG, ERG, EOG, EGG concept only.)
I Electrode theory: Nernst relation, Electrode skin interface, 1
Bio potential electrodes: Microelectrodes, skin surface
1
electrodes, needle electrodes
Instrumentation for clinical laboratory: Bio potential
amplifiers-instrumentation amplifiers, carrier amplifiers, 2
isolation amplifiers, chopper amplifiers
Heart and cardiovascular system (brief discussion), electro
1
conduction system of the heart.Electrocardiography
ECG machine block diagram, ECG lead configurations, ECG
2
recording system, Einthoven triangle, analysis of ECG signals.
II Measurement of blood pressure: Direct, indirect and relative
methods of blood pressure measurement, auscultatory method, 2
oscillometric and ultrasonic noninvasive pressure measurements.
Measurement of blood flow: Electromagnetic blood flow

1
meters and ultrasonic blood flow meters
The human nervous system. Neuron, action potential of brain,
brain waves, types of electrodes, placement of electrodes, 2
evoked potential, EEG recording, analysis of EEG.
Electrical activity of muscles- EMG. Signal Acquisition and
2
analysis. Applications of EMG - myoelectric control system.
III
Electrical stimulation of the muscle and nerve, Functional
1
Electrical Stimulation- Principle and applications.
Physiology of respiratory system (overview), Respiratory
parameters, spirometer, body plethysmographs, gas exchange 2
and distribution.
Instruments for clinical laboratory: Oxymeters, pH meter,
2
blood cell counter, flame photometer, spectrophotometer
Therapeutic Equipments: Principle, block schematic diagram,
IV working and applications of : pacemakers, cardiac 2
defibrillators
heart–lung machine, dialyzers, surgical diathermy equipment,
2
ventilators
Biomedical Telemetry system: Components of biotelemetry

1
system, application of telemetry in medicine
Medical Imaging systems (Basic Principle only): X-ray
imaging - Properties and production of X-rays, X-ray machine, 2
applications of X-rays in medicine.
Computed Tomograpy: Principle, image reconstruction,
1
scanning system and applications
Ultrasonic imaging systems: Basic pulse echo system,
propagation of ultrasonic through tissues and reflections,
V 2
display types, A-Scan, B-Scan, M-Scan, applications, real-
time ultrasonic imaging systems and probes.
Magnetic Resonance Imaging – Basic NMR components,
1
Biological effects and advantages of NMR imaging
Patient Safety: Electric shock hazards, leakage current,safety
codes for electro medical equipments 1

EIGHTH SEMESTER B.TECH DEGREE EXAMINATION
(Electronics & Communication Engineering)
BIOMEDICAL ENGINEERING
Max Marks : 100 Duration : 3 Hours
PART A
(Answer all questions. Each question carries 3 marks)
1 What is a microelectrode? List any two 3
2 List three typical features of a biopotential amplifier 3
3 Draw and explain the Einthoven triangle 3
4 List the various blood pressure measurement techniques 3
5 Explain action potential and Resting Potential of brain? 3
6 What is meant by nerve conduction velocity. What is its significance? 3
7 List three ventilator parameters and explain any one. 3
8 What is ventricular defibrillation. 3
9 What are the electric shock hazards? 3
10 Compare NMR imaging and CT imaging. 3
PART B
(Answer one full question from each module)
MODULE 1
Explain about electrode-electrolyte interface and the electrical activity associated

11a) 8
with one contraction in a muscle.
b) Explain isolation amplifier with a neat diagram? 6
OR
12a) How does depolarisation and repolarisation occur in a cell? 7

b) Explain chopper amplifier with a neat diagram? State applications 7
MODULE 2
13a) With necessary illustration, explain any two basic ECG lead configurations. 7
Explain ultrasonic blood flow meter with neat diagram? What are the advantages
b) 7
over other flow meters?
OR
14a) Explain electro conduction system of the heart with illustration 7
Compare direct and indirect blood pressure measurement. What is Korotkoff

b) 7
sound in blood pressure measurement?
MODULE 3
With necessary block schematic explain the principle of operation of a myoelectric

15a) 7
controlled prosthetic device.
With necessary illustration, explain the placement of electrodes for recording EEG
b) 7
signal.
OR
16a) Explain different respiratory parameters. Explain the working of a spirometer. 7
List six applications of Functional electrical stimulation and explain one application
b) 7
in detail.
MODULE 4
What is a pacemaker? What is its significance? Explain the working with illustration
17a) 7
of an atrio-synchronous pacemaker.
What is diathermy? With a neat block schematic diagram, explain the working and
b) 7
applications of surgical diathermy equipments.
OR
18a) What is dialysis? Explain any one type of dialyzer with necessary illustration 7
With the help of neat block diagram, explain the components of biotelemetry
b) 7
system
MODULE 5
19a) With a neat block diagram, explain the technique of producing CT images. 7
Explain the principle and any one application of M-mode display in ultrasound
b) 7
systems.
OR
20a) Explain the components of an NMR imaging system with neat block diagram 8
Explain how electric shock is hazardous to human body. What changes it will bring
b) 6
in the body, when the current increases.
*****
SATELLITE CATEGORY L T P CREDIT

ECT424
COMMUNICATION PEC 2 1 0 3
Preamble: This course aims to impart the basic knowledge of satellite communication and its
applications.
Prerequisite: ECT 305Analog &Digital communication

CO1 Define satellite communications& possible satellite orbits.
CO2 Describe satellite communication subsystems& launching mechanisms of satellites.

Calculate link budgets.Provide an in-depth treatment of satellite communication
CO3
systems operation and planning
CO4 Analyze the various methods of satellite access.
CO5 Discuss various applications of satellite communications
CO1 3 3
CO2 3 3
CO3 3 3 3
CO4 3 3 2
CO5 3 3
AssessmentPattern
Bloom’sCategory Continuous Assessment Tests End Semester Examination

1 2
Remember 15 15 20
Understand 15 15 20
Apply 10 10 30
Analyse 10 10 30
Evaluate
Create
Mark distribution

150 50 100 3 hours

Course Seminar &Assignment :15 marks
It is mandatory that a course seminar shall be undertaken by each student for this subject.
The courseseminar of 5 to 10 minute durationshall be presented by taking any topic
related with satellite communication approved by the faculty. Studentshall be awarded 5
marks for presentation of topic and a brief report. Thereport has
tobesubmittedforacademicauditing. In addition two assignments may be given for 5
marks each which can be a class or home assignment.
contain10 questions with 2 questions from each module, having 3 marks for each
question. Students should answer all questions. Part B contains 2 questions from each
module of which student should answer any one. Each question can have maximum of 2
sub-divisions and carry 14 marks.
Course Outcome 1 (CO1): Define satellite communications& possible satellite orbits.

1. Explain the different types of satellite orbits?
2. Describe various orbital elements
3. Describe the effect of orbits on satellite performance?
Course Outcome 2 (CO2): Describe satellite communication subsystems& launching

mechanisms of satellites.
1. Describe the major subsystems of a communication satellite .
2. Describe the significance of antenna subsystem why uplink and downlink
frequency different in satellite communication are different.
Course Outcome 3 (CO3): Calculate link budgets. Provide an in-depth treatment of

satellite communication systems operation and planning
1. Calculation of total link loss for various sky condition
2. Calculation of Effective Isotropic Radiated Power required for various Sky
Conditions.
Course Outcome 4 (CO4): Analyze the various methods of satellite access

1.Describe various multiple Access Technique.
2. Compare the uplink power requirement for FDMA and TDMA
Course Outcome 5 (CO5): Discuss various applications of satellite communications

1. Explain the Basic Principle of navigation Satellite.
2. Explain Satellite Radio Broadcasting.
SYLLABUS
Module 1: Satellite Orbits:

Introduction to Satellite Communication,Historical background, Basic concepts of
Satellite Communications,Kepler’slaws of planetary motion, types of satellite orbits,orbit
determination.Definitions of terms for Earth-Orbiting Satellites, Orbital
Elements,Apogee and Perigee Heights,satellite stabilization,orbital effects onsatellites
performance. Antenna Look Angles, The Polar Mount Antenna, Limits of Visibility,
launch systems for geostationary satellites.
Module 2: Satellite System:

The Space Segment
Introduction, The Power Supply, Attitude&Orbit Control, Satellite stabilization, Station
Keeping, Thermal Control, TT&C Subsystem, Transponders, Antenna Subsystem
The Earth Segment
Types of earth station, architecture & design considerations .Transmit-Receive Earth
Station ,
Wideband receiver, the input demultiplexer, the power amplifier, Satellite tracking.
Module3: The Satellite Link design :

Introduction,Transmission Theory,System Noise Temperature and G/T Ratio, Design of
Downlinks
Ku-Band GEO Satellite Systems, Uplink Design , Design for Specified CNR: Combining
CNR and C/I Values in Satellite Links ,System Design for Specific Performance.
Regional &global satellite systems INSAT, INTELSAT& INMARSAT.
Module 4: Modulation & Multiple Access

Introduction,Digital Modulation techniques preferred in satellites, Multiple Access
,Frequency Division Multiple Access (FDMA) ,
Time Division Multiple Access (TDMA), Transmitter Power in TDMA Networks,
Demand Assignment Multiple Access (DAMA), Random Access (RA) , Packet Radio
Systems and Protocols, Code Division Multiple Access (CDMA)
Module 5: Satellite Application:

Introduction, Frequency bands, , Comparison between Satellite & terrestrial networks,
Satellite Telephony,SatelliteTelevision,DTH,Satellite Radio broadcasting,Remote
Sensing Satellite;Classification, orbits,payloads,Weather ForecastingSatellites:Orbits,
payloads.
Navigation Satellite:Basic principles of satellite navigation, GPS Position Location
Principle functional segments of GPS, Indian Contribution to positioning systems. NGSO
satellite systems.
Text Books
1. Dennis Roddy, Satellite Communications, 4th Edition, McGraw- Hill International
edition, 2006
2. Timothy Pratt,Jeremy E,Allnutt, Satellite Communications, Wiley, 3rd Edition,
October 2019
Reference Books
1. Gerard Maral,Michel Bousquet,Zhili Sun, Satellite Communications Systems:
Systems, Techniques and Technology,Wiley,6thedition,April 2020
2. Anil K. Maini, Varsha Agrawal, Satellite Communications, Wiley India Pvt. Ltd.,
2015
3. TRI.T. HA, Digital Satellite Communications, McGraw-Hill,second edition
Course Content & Lecture Schedule
Sr. No. Content Total Hrs
Satellite Orbits
Introduction to Satellite Communication, Historical background, 1
Basic concepts of Satellite Communication
Kepler’s laws of planetary motion, types of satellite orbits, orbit 2
Module 1 determination
Definitions of terms for Earth-Orbiting Satellites, Orbital Elements, 1
Apogee and Perigee Heights,
Satellite stabilization, orbital effects on satellites performance. 1
Antenna Look Angles, The Polar Mount Antenna, Limits of Visibility 1
Launch systems for geostationary satellites. 1
Satellite System
The Space Segment 2
Introduction, The Power Supply, Attitude &Orbit Control, Satellite
stabilization, Station Keeping, Thermal Control,
1
Module 2 TT&C Subsystem, Transponders,
Antenna Subsystem, Antenna types & designequation(derivation not 1
required)
The Earth Segment 2
Types of earth station, architecture & design considerations Transmit-
Receive Earth Station ,
Wide band receiver, The input demultiplexer, The power amplifier, 1
Satellite tracking.
The Satellite Link design
Introduction, Transmission Theory , System Noise Temperature and 2
G/T Ratio , Design of Downlinks
Ku-Band GEO Satellite Systems
Module 3 2
Uplink Design , Design for Specified CNR: Combining CNR and C/I
Values in Satellite Links ,System Design for Specific Performance
Regional &global satellite systems INSAT,INTELSAT& 2

INMARSAT.
Modulation & MultipleAccess
Introduction, Digital Modulation techniques preferred in satellite 2
communication.
2
Module4 Multiple Access ,Frequency Division Multiple Access (FDMA) ,Time
Division Multiple Access (TDMA), Transmitter Power in TDMA
Networks, Demand Assignment Multiple Access (DAMA),
3
Random Access (RA) , Packet Radio Systems and Protocols, Code
Division Multiple Access (CDMA)
Satellite Application:
Introduction, Frequency bands, , Comparison between Satellite & 1

terrestrial networks,
2
Satellite Telephony, Satellite Television, DTH, Satellite Radio
Module 5 broadcasting,
2
Remote Sensing Satellite; Classification, orbits, payloads, Weather
Forecasting Satellites: Orbits, payloads.
Navigation Satellite: Basic principles of satellite navigation, GPS 3

Position Location Principle functional segments of GPS. Indian
Contribution to positioning systems, NGSO satellite systems.
Total 35

Eighth Semester B Tech Degree Examination Branch: Electronics and Communication
Course: ECT424 SATELLITE COMMUNICATION
PART A
(Answer All Questions. Each question carries 3 marks)
1. How do geostationary and geosynchronous orbit differ?

2. What are the limits of visibility of a satellite?
3. How thermal control achieved in space craft? Why is it necessary?
4. What is the need of tracking a spacecraft & how is it practiced?
5. Briefly describe the causes of interference and noise in a satellite link?
6. Why uplink and downlink frequency different in satellite communication?
7. State the advantages of demand assignment over preassigned access techniques?
8. Why synchronization is a must for TDMA?
9. Compare satellite & terrestrial networks?
10. State the orbital requirements & payload of a remote sensing satellite?Give one example of remote
sensing satellite.
PART B
(Answer one question from each module. Each question carries 14 mark.)
Module 1
11(a) State Kepler’s laws of planetary motion.Using these laws determine the height of
geostationary orbit (8)
11(b) Discuss the various satellite orbits and their applications. (6)
OR
12(a) Explain the need for stabilization of a space craft & methods to achieve it. (7)
(b) Briefly describe the launching methods & Launch vehicles used for putting a
spacecraft into geostationary orbit. (7)
Module 2
13. Discuss the major subsystems of a communication satellite. (14)
OR
14. With a block schematic describe a transmit receive earth station (14)
Module 3
15. Derive the uplink and downlink design of a geostationary Ku band satellite (14)
OR
16(a). Discuss the regional communication satellite of India (7)
16(b). How global coverage is possible using INTELSAT. What is the use of INMARSAT (7)
Module 4
17. Discuss the digital modulation techniques used in satellite communication. (14)
OR
18(a). Discuss the Random-access techniques and the associated protocols. (7)
18 (b). Compare FDMA,TDMA,CDMA. (7)
Module 5
19(a) Discuss direct broadcast satellite & satellite radio enumerating their advantages (7)
19(b) Discuss the weather forecasting satellites explaining the orbits chosen and the payload,
and applications (7)
OR
20(a) Explain the functional system of a GPS. How position determined in GPS system
and methods to reduce error (8)
20(b) Explain NGSO satellite constellations. (6)
ECT434 SECURE COMMUNICATION
PEC 2 1 0 3
Preamble: This course aims to provide an insight into the theory and technology behind
secure communication.
Prerequisite:Nil
Course Outcomes:After the completion of the course the student will be able to
CO 1 Explain network security services and mechanisms and the types of attacks they are
K2 designed for
CO 2
Model the symmetric encryption process and different encryption techniques
K3
CO 3 Apply the concepts of group, ring, field,modular arithmetic, Euclidean
K3 algorithm,Finite fields and polynomial arithmetic
CO4 Illustrate the principles of modern symmetric ciphers like the Data Encryption
K2 Standard and Advanced Encryption Standard
CO5 Outline the concepts of public key cryptography, RSA algorithm, key distribution and
K2 management for public key systems
CO6 Explain the requirements for authentication and the types of functions used to
K2 produce an authenticator
PO 1 PO PO 3 PO PO PO PO PO PO PO1 PO11 PO1

2 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 2
CO 3 3 2
1
CO 3 3 2
2
CO 3 3 2
3
CO 3 3 2
4
CO 3 3 2
5
CO 3 3 2
6
Assessment Pattern

End Semester
Tests
Examination
1 2
Remember
10 10 10
K1
Understand 20 20 20
K2
Apply
20 20 70
K3
Analyse
Evaluate
Create
Mark distribution

150 50 100 3 hours
14 marks.
Course Outcome 1 (CO1): Explain network security services and mechanisms and the types
of attacks they are designed for
1. Describe the OSI security architecture
2. Differentiate between active and passive security threats
3. Define the categories of security services and security threats
Course Outcome 2 (CO2):Explain the general model for the symmetric encryption process
and some of the encryption techniques in use
1. Describe the five ingredients in a symmetric cipher model
2. Encrypt and decryptplaintext using Hill cipher.
3. Describe one time pad.
Course Outcome 3 (CO3): Apply the concepts of group, ring, field, modular arithmetic,
Euclidean algorithm, Finite fields and polynomial arithmetic
1. Define a group, ring and field

2. Determine the gcd of 2 given numbers.
3. Find the multiplicative inverse using extended Euclidean algorithm
Course Outcome 4 (CO4): Illustrate the principles of modern symmetric ciphers like the
Data Encryption Standard and Advanced Encryption Standard
1. Explain avalanche effect
2. Describe the DES encryption algorithm
3. Describe ShiftRows transformation in AES
Course Outcome 5 (CO5): Describe the concepts of public key cryptography, RSA
algorithm, key distribution and management for public key systems
1. Describe the key elements of a public key cryptosystem
2. Encrypt and decrypt using RSA algorithm
3. List the different schemes for distribution of public keys
Course Outcome 6 (CO6):Describe the requirements for authentication and the types of
functions that may be used to produce an authenticator
1. What types of attacks are addressed by message authentication?

2. Explain the basic uses of message encryption
3. Explain the basic uses of Message Authentication Code
SYLLABUS
Module 1: Introduction and Classic Encryption Techniques

OSI security architecture, Security attacks – Passive attacks, Active attacks, Security
services- Authentication, Access Control, Data Confidentiality, Data integrity,
Nonrepudiation, Availability service. Model for network security. Symmetric cipher model,
Cryptography, Cryptoanalysis, Substitution techniques- Hill Cipher, One time pad,
Transposition Techniques
Module 2: Finite Fields

Groups,Rings and Fields, Modular arithmetic, Euclidian algorithm, Finite Fields of the form
GF(p), Polynomial arithmetic
Module 3: Block Ciphers. Data Encryption Standard, AES Cipher

Block Cipher Principles – Stream Ciphers and Block Ciphers, Feistel Cipher, Feistel
Decryption algorithm, The Data encryption standard, DES Decryption - Avalanche effect,
The AES Cipher, substitute bytes transformation, Shift row transformation, Mix Column
transformation
Module 4: Public Key Cryptography, RSA and Key Management

Principles of public key cryptosystems-Public key cryptosystems, Application for Public key
cryptosystem requirements, Fermat’s theorem, Euler’s Totient Function, Euler’s theorem,
RSA algorithm, Key management, Distribution of public keys, Publicly available directory,
Public key authority, public key certificates, Distribution of secret keys using public key
cryptography
Module 5: Message Authentication and Hash Function

Authentication requirements, Authentication functions- Message Encryption, Public Key
Encryption, Message Authentication Code, Hash function
Text Books
1. William Stallings, Cryptography and Network security: principles and practice", 4th
Edition, Prentice Hall of India, New Delhi, 2006
Reference Books:
1. Behrouz A. Forouzan, Cryptography and Network security Tata McGraw-Hill, 2008
2. David S. Dummit& Richard M Foote, Abstract Algebra, 2nd Edition, Wiley India Pvt.
Ltd.,2008.
3. Douglas A. Stinson, Cryptography, Theory and Practice, 2/e, Chapman & Hall, CRC
PressCompany, Washington, 2005.
4. Lawrence C. Washington, Elliptic Curves: Theory and Cryptography, Chapman &
Hall, CRCPress Company, Washington, 2008.
5. N. Koeblitz: A course in Number theory and Cryptography, 2008
6. Thomas Koshy: Elementary Number Theory with Applications, 2/e, Academic Press,
2007
7. Tyagi and Yadav, Cryptography and network security, Dhanpatrai, 2012
No. of
No Topic
Lectures
1 Introduction
1.1 OSI system architecture, Security attacks – Passive attacks, Active attacks 1
1.2 Security services- Authentication, Access Control, Data Confidentiality, 2
Data integrity, Nonrepudiation, Availability service. Security Mechanisms
1.3 A model for network security 1
1.4 Symmetric cipher model, Cryptography, Cryptoanalysis, 1
1.5 Substitution techniques- Hill Cipher, One time pad 2
1.6 Transposition Techniques 1
8
2 Finite Fields
2.1 Groups, Rings and Fields 1
2.2 Modular arithmetic 2
2.3 Euclidian algorithm 1
2.4 Finite Fields of the form GF(p) 2
2.5 Polynomial arithmetic 2
8
3 Block Ciphers. Data Encryption Standard, AES Cipher
3.1 Block Cipher Principles – Stream Ciphers and Block Ciphers, Feistel 2
Cipher, Feistel Decryption algorithm
3.2 The Data encryption standard, DES Decryption – The Avalanche effect 3
3.3 The AES Cipher, substitute bytes transformation, Shift row transformation, 4
Mix Column transformation
9
4 Public Key Cryptography, RSA and Key Management
4.1 Principles of public key cryptosystems-Public key cryptosystems, 2
Application for Public key cryptosystem requirements
4.2 Fermat’s theorem, Euler’s Totient Function, Euler’s theorem, RSA 3
algorithm- Description of the algorithm
4.3 Key management, Distribution of public keys, Publicly available directory, 2
Public key authority, public key certificates, Distribution of secret keys
using public key cryptography
7
5 Module 5: Message Authentication and Hash Function
5.1 Authentication requirements, Authentication functions- Message 3
Encryption, Public Key Encryption, Message Authentication Code, Hash
function
3
Simulation Assignments: (Using Matlab/Python or any suitable software)
1. Write a program that can encrypt and decrypt using a 2x2 Hill cipher
2. Write a program that can encrypt and decrypt a railfence cipher
3. Write a program to find the multiplicative inverse using extended Euclidean algorithm
4. Write a program for calculating Euler’s Totient Function

Course Code: ECT434
Course Name: SECURE COMMUNICATION
PART A
1 Illustrate the categories of active attacks K2
2 Express Hill Cipher system in general terms. Describe the strength of the Hill K2
Cipher.
3 Determine whether the set of residue class modulo 3 forms a group with respect to K3
addition.
4 Determine the multiplicative inverse of each non zero element in Z5 K3
5 Differentiate between diffusion and confusion K2
6 Differentiate between block cipher and stream cipher K2
7 State and prove Fermats theorem K2
8 Explain the requirements for public key cryptography K2
9 Define the types of attacks which can be addressed by message authentication K2
10 Define the 3 classes of functions which can be used to produce an authenticator. K2
PART – B
Module - I
11 a. Describe specific and pervasive security mechanisms 7

CO1
K2
b. Decrypt the following message that was encrypted by using a railfence cipher with 7
4 rails. CO2
K3
TTTPT QDSYP RSHII XEDOH EIUNS ESLDY TEMES SERSE NELSC
NEAUC FLERE GAMAE BHDIH SCUCD NG
OR
7
12 a Describe a symmetric cipher model CO1
K2
5 1 7
Encrypt the message: “payransom” using Hill Cipher with the key � �.
b. 2 7 CO2
K3
Module - II
7
CO3
13 a. Define a field.
K2
7
b. Find the gcd (24140, 16762)
CO3
K3
OR
14 a. Using the extended Euclidean algorithm, find the multiplicative inverse of 7

1234 mod 4321 CO3
K3
b. Calculate using coefficients in Z10 7
(a) (7x+2) - (x2+5) CO3
(b) (6x2+x+3) x (5x2+2) K3
Module - III
15 a. Describe the internal structure of a single round of DES Encryption algorithm 8

CO4
K2
b. In an AES system, given the plaintext {000102030405060708090A0B0C0D0E0F} 6
and the key {01010101010101010101010101010101}, CO4
K3
(a) Show the original contents of State, displayed as a 4x4 matrix
(b) Show the value of State after initial Add Round Key
Describe the characteristics of the AES Cipher
OR
16 What are the parameters and design choices that determine the actual algorithm of 14
CO4
a FeistalCipher.Describe Feistel Encryption and Decryption.
K2
Module - IV
17 a. State and prove Euler’s theorem 6

CO5
K2
b.
Using Fermat’s Theorem, find(i) 3201 mod 11 (ii) a number a between 0 and 72
with a congruent to 9794 modulo 73 8
CO5
K3
OR
18 a. Describe the essential elements of a public key cryptosystem scheme 7

CO5
K2
b. Perform encryption and decryption using RSA algorithm for p = 3, q =11, e = 7, 7

CO5
M = 5. K3
Module - V
19 Describe a hash function. Illustrate the different ways in which hash function can 14
be used to provide message authentication. Describe the confidentiality and CO6
K2
authentication implications of the different approaches.
OR
20(a) Illustrate the basic uses of message encryption 7

CO6
K2
(b) 7
Explain authentication using message authentication code CO6
K2
ECT444 PATTERN RECOGNITION
PEC 2 1 0 3
Preamble: This course aims to impart the fundamentals of statistical pattern recognition and
neural network techniques.
Prerequisite: MAT 101 Linear Algebra and Calculus, MAT 204 Probability, Random Process,
and Numerical Methods, ECT 463 Machine Learning
CO1 K2 Understand the basics of statistical pattern recognition

CO2 K3 Apply statistical methods in linear classification
Apply linear algebra and statistical methods in parameter and non-parameter
CO3 K3
estimation
CO4 K3 Apply statistical methods in non-linear classification and neural networks
CO5 K2 Understand the basics of deep learning networks, convolutional neural networks
PO1 PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO1 PO11 PO12

2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0
CO 1 3
CO 2 3 3 3 3 3
CO 3 3 3 3 3 3
CO 4 3
CO 5 3 3 3
Assessment Pattern
Bloom’s Category Tests End Semester Examination
1 2
Remember
Apply K3 30 30 60
Analyse
Evaluate
Create
Mark distribution
Total
CIE ESE ESE Duration
Marks
150 50 100 3 hours
14 marks.
Course Outcome 1 (CO1): Understand the basics of statistical pattern recognition (K2)
1. Describe the classification of pattern recognition systems
2. Describe statistical pattern recognition
Course Outcome 2 (CO2): Apply statistical methods in linear classification (K3)
1. Describe linear classifiers
2. Obtain linear classifiers using statistical methods
Course Outcome 3 (CO3): Apply linear algebra and statistical methods in parameter and
non-parameter estimation (K3)
1. Explain different parameter estimation methods
2. Describe different non-parameter estimation methods
Course Outcome 4 (CO4): Apply statistical methods in non-linear classification and neural
networks (K3)
1. Explain non-linear classifiers, neural networks and various associated terms
2. Using optimization techniques obtain the backpropagation algorithm

Course Outcome 5 (CO5): Understand the basics of deep learning networks, convolutional
neural networks, and recurrent neural networks(K2)
1. Describe deep learning networks
2. Explain convolutional neural networks and its layers.
SYLLABUS
Module I
Basics of pattern recognition system, various applications, classification of pattern
recognition systems, design of Pattern recognition system. Statistical pattern recognition:
review of probability theory, Gaussian distribution, Bayes decision theory, optimal solutions
for minimum error and minimum risk criteria.
Module II
Linear Classifiers, linearly separable classes, normal density, discriminant functions, decision
surfaces, linear discriminants, binary class, multiple classes, cost functions, perceptron
algorithm, SVM, Fisher’s linear discriminant.
Module III
Parameter estimation methods: Maximum-Likelihood estimation, Bayesian parameter
estimation, mixture models, mixtures of Gaussians, Expectation-maximization method.
Non-Parameter methods: Non-parametric techniques for density estimation - Parzen-window
method, K-nearest neighbour density estimation, nearest neighbor rule.
Module IV
Nonlinear classifiers, the XOR problem, two-layer multilayer perceptrons, multilayer
perceptrons, neural networks, feed-forward networks, hidden units, activation function,
weight vector, bias, cost functions, forward and backward propagation, learning by gradient
descent, backpropagation algorithm.
Module V
Introduction to deep learning networks, deep feedforward networks,ReLU, bias-variance
tradeoff, regularization, dropout, vanishing/exploding gradients, weight initialization for deep
networks, basics of convolutional neural networks, layers of convolutional neural networks.
Text Books:
1. Bishop, C. M. “Pattern Recognition and Machine Learning” Springer, New York,

2006.
2. Duda, R.O., Hart, P.E., and Stork, D.G. “Pattern Classification”. Wiley, New York,
2001.
References:
1. Hastie, T., Tibshirani, R. and Friedman, J. “The Elements of Statistical Learning”.
Springer. 2001.
2.Theodoridis, S. and Koutroumbas, K. “Pattern Recognition”. Academic Press, San
Diego, 2003.
3. Ian Goodfellow, Yoshua Bengio, Aaron Courville. “Deep Learning” MIT Press, 2016
4.Morton Nadier and Eric Smith P., Pattern Recognition Engineering , John Wiley &
Sons, New York, 1993.
No Topic No. of
Lectures
1 Module I
1.1 Basics of pattern recognition system, various applications, 1
1.2 types of pattern recognition systems, design of Pattern recognition system. 1
1.3 Statistical pattern recognition: review of probability theory 2
1.4 Bayes decision theory, optimal solutions for minimum error and minimum 2
risk criteria.
2 Module II
2.1 Linear Classifiers, linearly separable classes, normal density, 2
2.2 discriminant functions, decision surfaces, 1
2.3 linear discriminants, binary class, multiple classes, cost functions, 2
2.4 perceptron algorithm, SVM ,Fisher’s linear discriminant. 2
3 Module III
3.1 Parameter estimation methods: Maximum-Likelihood estimation, 2
3.2 Bayesian parameter estimation, 1
3.3 mixture models, mixtures of Gaussians, Expectation-maximization method. 2
3.4 Non-parametric techniques for density estimation - Parzen-window method, 2
3.5 K-nearest neighbour density estimation, nearest neighbor rule. 1
4 Module IV
4.1 Nonlinear classifiers, the XOR problem, two-layer multilayer perceptrons, 2
4.2 multilayer perceptrons, neural networks, feed-forward networks, 1
4.3 hidden units, activation function, weight vector, bias, cost functions, 1
4.4 forward and backward propagation, learning by gradient descent,
3
backpropagation algorithm.
5 Module V
5.1 Introduction to deep learning networks, deep feedforward networks, 2
5.2 ReLU, bias-variance tradeoff, regularization, dropout, 2
5.3 vanishing/exploding gradients,weight initialization for deep networks, 1
5.4 basics of convolutional neural networks, layers of convolutional neural
2
networks
Simulation Assignments (using Python or Matlab)
 Linear classifiers
 Maximum likelihood estimation,
 Bayesian estimation
 Expectation-maximization method.
 Multilayer perceptrons
 backpropagation
 Deep learning examples
 Basic CNN
APJ ABDULKALAM TECHNOLOGICAL UNIVERSITY

ECT444 PATTERN RECOGNITION

Time: 3 hours Max.Marks:100
PART A
1. Explain different types of pattern recognition systems with examples.
2. Explain Bayes classification rule
3. Explain the significance of minimizing risk
4. Describe discriminant functions and decision surfaces
5. Explain Fisher’s linear discriminant.
6. Differentiate ML and MAP parameter estimation.
7. Explain the significance of Gaussian mixture models
8. Explain activation functions.
9. Explain vanishing and exploding gradients.
10. How weight initialization is done for deep networks.
PART B
Answer anyone question from each module. Each question carries 14 marks.
MODULE I
11. (a) Describe the design principles of pattern recognition system with an example(6 marks)
(b) Explain Bayes decision rule. Explain how it can be used for two class classification.
(8 marks)
OR
12. (a) Show that the Bayesian classifier is optimal with respect to minimizing the
classification error probability? (8 marks)
(b) Give any three applications of pattern recognition systems (6 marks)
MODULE II
13. (a)Give a description of minimum distance classifiers (8 marks)
(b) Explain Fisher’s linear discriminant. (6 marks)
OR
14. (a) Obtain the decision surface for an equi-probable two class system, where the probability
density functions of n-dimensional feature vectors in both classes are normally distributed.
(8 marks)
(b) Give step by step description of perceptron algorithm (6 marks)
MODULE III
15. (a) Assuming a Gaussian distribution of the features, Explain the general principle of the
maximum likelihood estimation for the following cases
1. Unknown mean and known covariance matrix
2. Unknown mean and unknown covariance matrix (8 marks)
(b) Compare parametric and non parametric methods for probability density function
estimation. (6 marks)
OR
16. (a) Give step by step description of expectation maximization algorithm. (8 marks)
(b) How mixture models are created using Gaussian densities? (6 marks)
MODULE IV
17. (a) Explain the working principle of back propagation neural networks with neat
architecture diagram (8 marks)
(b) List different types of activation functions used in perceptron models. (6 marks)
OR
18. (a) How does a multi-layer perceptron solve the nonlinear XOR problem? (8 marks)
(b) Explain weight vector, bias, cost functions (6 marks)
MODULE V
19. (a) Explain convolutional layer, pooling layers and activation functions in convolutional
neural networks. (6 marks)
(b) Give the structure of deep neural networks with description of all layers (8 marks)
20. (a) Describe convolutional neural networks with detailed description of each layers
(8 marks)
(b) Explain i) ReLU, ii) regularization, iii) dropout (6 marks)
ECT454 RF CIRCUIT DESIGN
PEC 2 1 0 3
Preamble: This course deals with the analysis, design and simulation of Radio Frequency (RF)
Circuits and Components for wireless communication systems. The course provides
fundamentals of transmission lines, high frequency circuit behavior, impedance matching
networks, filters, active RF components, amplifiers, and mixers. The course will enable the
students to use CAD tools for simulating and designing RF circuits.
Prerequisite: ECT 302 Electromagnetics, ECT 202 Analog Circuits and ECT 205 Network
Theory
Course Outcome: After the completion of the course the student will be able to
CO 1 Explain the basic idea about RF networks and working of RF filter circuits
K2
CO 2 Describe the behaviour of RF components and application of Network analyser in
K2 parameter measurement
CO 3 Apply the principle of RF networks in the designing of RF amplifiers, RF
K3 Oscillators and Mixers
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
CO 1 3 3 2 2 2
CO 2 3 3 2 3 2
CO 3 3 3 3 3 2 2
Assessment Pattern

1 2
Apply K3 20 20 40
Analyse
Evaluate
Create
Mark distribution
Total CIE ESE ESE

Marks Duration
150 50 100 3 hours
Course Outcome 1 (CO1) :Explain the basic idea about RF networks and working of RF filter
circuits (K2)
1. Explain the high frequency behavior of inductors

2. What do mean by characteristic impedance of a transmission line ? Give expressions
3. Give the scattering matrix for a two-port network and define each element of the matrix.
4. Explain the steps involved in the design of a filter using insertion loss technique
Course Outcome 2 (CO2): Describe the behaviour of RF components and application of

Network analyser in parameter measurement (K2)
1. Describe the different physical geometry structures for high frequency BJT fabrication.
2. Explain how impedance matching is done using Quarter-wave tranformers
3. Describe the steps involved in simulating an RF circuit using any EM Simulation
software
4. Explain the working of a Vector Network Analyzer
Course Outcome 3 (CO3):Apply the principle of RF networks in the designing of RF

amplifiers, RF Oscillators and Mixers(K3)
1. Explain the importance of stability circles in designing Microwave Amplifiers.

2. Design a single stage transistor for maximum gain
3. Describe the working principle of a negative resistance oscillator
4. Explain the working of a Dielectric resonator oscillator.
SYLLABUS
Module 1 : Introduction to RF System ( 07 Hours )
1.1 RF circuit introduction - Importance of radio frequency design, RF behavior of resistors

, inductors and capacitors.(02)
1.2 Transmission Lines-Equivalent Circuit representation-General Transmission Line
Equation- Terminated transmission lines- Input impedance, Standing waves, VSWR,
Return loss, Insertion loss, Characteristic impedance, Phase velocity.
Planar Transmission Lines – Microstrip lines and Striplines – Constructional Features (05)
Module 2 :RF Network Analysis (08 Hours)
2.1 Single and Multi-port Networks– Definitions-Impedance matrix, Scattering matrix,

Transmission (ABCD) matrix(02)
2.2 Impedance Matching Networks-Design of Matching Circuits using Lumped Elements,
Single Stub tuning, Quarter-Wave Transformers, Multi-Section Transformer – Binomial
Transformer(04)
2.3 RF Filter Design- Filter Design using insertion loss technique – (02)
Module 3 :RF Components (07 Hours)
3.1 Active RF components- Bipolar junction Transistor – Construction-Functionality-Power

Frequency Limitations of High Frequency transistors.GaAs devices - Familiarization of
RF Field Effect Transistors and High Electron Mobility Transistors–Constructional
details (04)
3.2 RF circuit measurements and characterization- Using Vector Network analyzer - S
parameter, Reflection Coefficient and Insertion lossMeasurement (02)
3.3 Modeling and Simulation of RF circuits using – Open source or Commercial EM
Simulation Softwares(01)
Module 4:Radio Frequency Amplifiers (07 Hours)
4.1 Amplifier design using S-parameters - Characteristics of Amplifier Power Relations,

Stability Considerations – Stability Circles, Tests for Unconditional Stability -(04)
4.2 High frequency amplifier design – Single stage amplifier Design – Design for
maximum gain, Low noise amplifier design (03)
Module 5: Radio Frequency Oscillators and Mixers (07 Hours)

5.1 Basic oscillator model -Feedback oscillator design—Negative Resistance Oscillator-
Dielectric Resonator Oscillator - YIG Tuned Oscillator (04)
5.2 Mixer - Basic characteristics – Single-Ended Mixer Design,Single-balanced and double-

balanced mixers (03)
Text Books
1. Ludwig, Reinhold. RF Circuit Design: Theory & Applications, 2/e. Pearson Education
India, 2000.
2. Pozar, David M. Microwave and RF design of wireless systems. John Wiley & Sons, 2000
Reference Books
1. Radmanesh, Matthew M. Advanced RF & microwave circuit design: the ultimate

guide to superior design. AuthorHouse, 2008.
2. Carr, Joseph J. Secrets of RF circuit design. McGraw-Hill Education, 2001.
3. Misra, Devendra K. Radio-frequency and microwave communication circuits:
analysis and design. John Wiley & Sons, 2012.
4. Mathew M. Radmanesh, “Radio Frequency & Microwave Electronics”, 2nd
Edition, Pearson Education Asia, 2002.
5. Rohde, Ulrich L., and David P. Newkirk. RF/microwave circuit design for wireless
applications. John Wiley & Sons, 2000.
6. Davis, W. Alan, and Krishna Kumar Agarwal. Radio frequency circuit design. John
Wiley, 2001.
7. Christopher, Bowick, Ajluni Cheryl, and Blyler John. RF Circuit Design. Newnes,
2007.
8. Abrie, Pieter LD. Design of RF and microwave amplifiers and oscillators. Artech
House, 1999.
No. of
No Topic
Lectures
1 Introduction to RF System07
1.1 Introduction to RF circuits- Importance of radio frequency design, RF 2

behaviour of resistors , Inductors and capacitors
1.2 Transmission Lines- Equivalent Circuit representation- General 1
Transmission Line Equation
1.2 Terminated transmission lines –Input Impedance 1
1.2 Standing waves, VSWR, Return loss, Insertion loss, Characteristic 1
impedance,
1.2 Planar Transmission Lines – Microstrip lines and Striplines – 2
Constructional Features
2 RF Network Analysis 08
2.1 Single and Multi-port Networks- Impedance matrix, Scattering 2

matrix, Transmission (ABCD) matrix
2.2 Impedance matching Network- Design of Matching Circuits using 2
Lumped Elements, Single Stub Matching
2.2 Quarter-Wave Transformers, Multi-Section Transformer – Binomial 2
Transformer
2.3 RF Filter Design - Filter Design using insertion loss technique 2
3 RF Components 07
3.1 Active RF components - Bipolar junction Transistor – Construction - 2
Functionality-Power Frequency Limitations of High Frequency
transistor
3.1 GaAs devices - Familiarization of RF Field Effect Transistors and 2
High Electron Mobility Transistors – Constructional details
3.2 RF circuit measurements and characterization - Using Vector Network 2
analyzer - S parameter, Reflection Coefficient and Insertion loss
Measurement
3.3 Modelling and Simulation of RF circuits using – 1
Opensource/Commercial EM simulation software’s
4 RF Amplifiers 07
4.1 Amplifier design using S-parameters- Characteristics of Amplifier 2
Power Relations
4.1 Stability Considerations – Stability Circles, Tests for Unconditional 2
Stability
4.2 High frequency amplifier design– Single stage amplifier Design – 2
Design for maximum gain,
4.2 Low noise amplifier design 1
5 RF Oscillators and Mixers 07
5.1 Basic oscillator model-Feedback oscillator design—Negative
2
Resistance Oscillator
5.1 Dielectric Resonator Oscillator- YIG Tuned Oscillator 2
5.2 Mixer - Basic characteristics – Single-Ended Mixer Design 2
5.2 Single-balanced and double- balanced mixers 1

Course Code: ECT454
Course Name: RF CIRCUIT DESIGN
PART A
(Answer ALL Questions. Each Question Carries 3 Marks.)
1. Explain how the capacitor behave at high frequencies

2. Derive the expression for the input reflection coeff( Γin ), source reflection coeff( Γ s ),
and output reflection coeff ( Γ out ), of a loaded transmission line.
3. What is scattering matrix? Give the scattering parameters of a two port network.
4. How the impedance matching is performed with quarter wave transformer?
5. Describe the features of HEMT.
6. Explain how S-parameter measurement is done using vector network analyser
7. Explain how will you check whether a transistor is unconditionally stable or not
8. How the input VSWR and Output VSWR affects the design of amplifiers?
9. Explain the principle of negative resistance oscillators.
10. What is Inter Modulation Distortion (IMD)? [10 X 3= 30]
PART – B
(Answer one question from each module; each question carries 14 marks)
Module – I
11. (a) Explain the terms i)VSWR ii)Return loss iii) Characteristic impedance . [07 Marks]
(a) How the inductor coils behave at high frequencies ? [07Marks]
OR
12. (a)How the resistors behave at high frequency? Give the electric equivalent circuit
representation of a high frequency resistor. [07 Marks]
(b). What is lossless transmission line? Derive expression for Characteristic impedance
of a lossless transmission line [07 Marks]
Module – II
13. (a) Explain the steps involved in the design of filter using the Insertion Loss Technique ?
[08 Marks]
(b) What is transmission parameter matrix? Derive the same for a T network. [06 Marks]
OR
14. (a) With the help of neat sketches explain how single stub tuning is done. [07 Marks]
(b) Design a binomial transformer for to match 50 Ω to a 75 Ω line and calculate the
bandwidth for Γ m =0.03 . [07 Marks]
Module – III
15. (a) With the help of a neat block diagram explain the working of Vector network analyzer.
[07 Marks]
(b) What is power frequency limitation of high frequency power transistors? Explain.
[07 Marks]
OR
16. (a) Explain the steps involved in designing a circuit using any EM simulation software
[08 Marks ]
(b) Draw the cross sectional view of HEMT device and explain the working of the same
device. [06 Marks]
Module – IV
17. (a) Derive the expression for the Unilateral Power gain GTU of an amplifier. [07 Marks]
(b) Explain how a low noise amplifier is designed [07 Marks]
OR
18. (a)What is the radius and center of an output stability circle of a RF amplifier?
[07 Marks]
(b) How will you design a single stage amplifier for maximum gain ? [07 Marks]
Module V
19. (a) Explain the working principle of a negative resistance oscillator [07 Marks]
(b) With the help of neat sketches explain the working of YIG tuned Oscillator.
[07 Marks]
OR
20. (a) Derive the S matrix for the dielectric resonator oscillator . [07 Marks]
(b)Draw the neat circuit diagram for a double balanced diode mixer circuit and explain
the working of the same. [07 Marks]
MIXED SIGNAL CIRCUIT CATEGORY L T P CREDIT

ECT464
DESIGN PEC 2 1 0 3
Preamble: This course aims to analyse various CMOS analog and digital mixed signal
circuits.
Prerequisite: ECT 202 ANALOG CIRCUITS, ECT 203 LOGIC CIRCUIT DESIGN
CO1/K3 Implement various analog and digital CMOS subcircuits
CO2/K4 Analyse various CMOS amplifiers
CO3/K4 Analyse Data Converters

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2
CO
3 3 2
1
CO
3 3 2
2
CO
3 3 2
3
Assessment Pattern
1 2
Apply K3 20 20 70
Analyse
Evaluate
Create
Mark distribution
150 50 100 3 hours

14 marks.

Course Outcome 1: Implement various analog and digital CMOS subcircuits
1. Analyse MOS with different load conditions.
2. Design of current mirror circuits
Course Outcome 2 Analyse various CMOS amplifiers

1. Analyse CMOS CS Amplifiers for various load conditions.
2. Explain various circuit technique for improving gain of Opamp
3. Design of Two stage opamp for different load condition
Course Outcome 3 Analyse Data Converters

1. Explain various non idealities in DAC and ADC.
2. Design of ADC’s for given specification (eg: 6 Bit 100 MHz Folding ADC).
SYLLABUS
Module 1:CMOS Amplifiers

Active load: MOS resistor, MOS current source, diode connected MOS.
CMOS Amplifiers: Common source amplifier with resistive and active loads, Common
source amplifier with source degeneration, Common gate and Common drain amplifier (only
voltage gain and input and output impedances of the circuits).
Module 2:CMOS Differential Amplifiers

MOS Current Mirror: Simple, Cascode and Wilson current mirror circuits.
CMOS Differential Amplifier: Differential Amplifier with resistive, current source, with
current mirror and cascode loads(only voltage gain and input and output impedance of the
circuits).
Module 3:CMOS Operational Amplifier

Opamp Performance parameters, Single stage and two stage op-amps with different types of
load. Gain Boosting in Opamp
Module 4:References and Switched Capacitor Circuits

References: Supply Independent Biasing, Temperature independent references– band gap
reference.
Switched Capacitor Circuits: Switched capacitor resistor, Switched CapacitorIntegrator,1st
order filter.
Module 5: Data Converters

DAC: Non-idealities in DAC, Types: Resistive, Charge redistribution, Voltage Scaling,
Cyclic and Pipelined.
ADC: Non-idealities in ADC, Sample and Hold circuit, quantization errors, Types of ADC :
Flash, two step, pipelined, successive approximation, Folding.
Text Books:
1.Behzad Razavi, “Design of Analog CMOS Integrated Circuits”, McGraw-Hill, 2/e, 2002
2.Meyer Gray , Hurst, Lewis, “Analysis and Design of Analog Integrated Circuits”, 5th
Edition ,Wiley 2009
Reference Books:
1. Phillip E. Allen, Douglas R. Holbery, CMOS Analog Circuit Design, Oxford, 2004.
2. Razavi B., Fundamentals of Microelectronics, Wiley student Edition2014.
3. Baker, Li, Boyce, CMOS: Circuits Design, Layout and Simulation, PHI, 2000

No. Topic Hrs.
1 CMOS Amplifiers
1.1 MOS basics. 1
1.2 MOS resistor, MOS current source, diode connected MOS. 2
Common source amplifier with resistive and active loads, Common source
1.3 3
amplifier with source degeneration.
1.4 Common gate amplifier. 1
1.5 Common drain amplifier. 1
2 CMOS Differential Amplifiers
2.1 Simple current mirror, Cascode and Wilson current mirrors. 1
2.2 Differential Amplifier with resistive load. 1
2.3 Differential Amplifier with current source and current mirror loads. 2
2.4 Differential Amplifier with cascode load. 2
3 CMOS Operational Amplifier
3.1 Opamp Performance Parameters 1
3.2 Single stage op-amp with resistive and active loads. 2
3.3 Two stage op-amp with resistive and active loads. 2
3.4 Gain Boosting in Opamp 1
4 References and Switched Capacitor Circuits
4.1 SupplyIndependentBiasing. 1
4.2 Temperatureindependent reference- Negative and Positive T C Voltage 1
4.3 Bandgapreference. 1
4.4 Switched capacitor resistor, Switched Capacitor Integrator 2
st
4.5 1 order filter. 1
5 Module 5: Data Converters
5.1 DAC non-idealities, Resistive DAC, Charge redistribution DAC. 1
5.2 Voltage Scaling DAC, Cyclic and Pipelined DAC. 2

5.3 ADC non-idealities, 1
5.4 Sample and Hold circuit. 1
5.5 Quantization errors. 1
5.6 ADC Types:Flash, two step, pipelined, successive approximation, folding ADC 3
Total Hours 35
Atleast one assignment should be simulation of the circuits. The simulations can be done in
QUCS, KiCad or PSPICE.

Course Code: ECT464
Course Name: MIXED SIGNAL CIRCUIT DESIGN
PART A
1 Write down the expression for drain current of an NMOS transistor in active K1
and saturation regions.
2 Draw the small signal model of low frequency MOSFET. K1
3 State the significance of diode connected transistor in current mirror circuits. K2
4 Differentiate between cascade and cascode configurations. K2
5 What is the significance of tail current source in a differential amplifier? K2
6 What is the purpose of stage 1 and sage 2 amplifiers in a 2-stage op-amp? K2
7 What are the important parameters that are to be considered while designing K1
reference circuits?
8 Derive the equivalent resistance of a series switched capacitor resistor. K3
9 Mention any two non-idealities of a DAC. K2
10 What is quantization error in an ADC? K2
PART – B
Module - I
4
Draw the circuit diagram and derive the equivalent resistance of a MOS
11a. CO1
resistor.
K3
10
b. Derive the voltage gain and output impedance of common source amplifier. CO2
K3
OR
12a. Draw the circuit diagram and derive the equivalent resistance of a MOS current 4
source. CO1
K3
10
b. Derive the voltage gain and output impedance of common gate amplifier. CO2
K3
Module - II
6
13a. Derive the output impedance of simple current mirror CO1
K3
8
Derive the voltage gain and output impedance of Differential Amplifier with
b. CO2
current source load.
K3
OR
14
Derive the voltage gain and output impedance of Differential Amplifier with
14 CO2
current mirror load.
K3
Module - III
Draw the circuit diagram and derive the voltage gain and output impedance of a 14
15 simple op-amp with cascade load. CO2
K3
OR
Draw the circuit diagram and derive the voltage gain and output impedance of a 14
16 2-stage op-amp with NMOS inputs. CO2
K3
Module - IV
Draw the circuit diagram and explain the working of supplyindependentbiasing 5
17a. circuit CO3
K3
9
Draw the circuit diagram and derive the transfer function of parasitic sensitive
b. CO3
switched capacitor integrator.
K3
OR
18 Draw the circuit diagram and derive the transfer function of general1st order 14
switched capacitor filter. Also mention the circuits for high pass and low pass CO3
filters. K3
Module - V
5
19a. Derive the expression for SNR of a DAC CO3
K3
9
b. Draw the circuit diagram and explain the working of pipeline DAC CO3
K3
OR
20a. Explain INL and DNL errors in data converters. 5

CO3
K3
9
Draw the circuit diagram and explain the working of successive approximation
b. CO3
ADC
K3
ECT474 ENTREPRENEURSHIP
PEC 2 1 0 3
Preamble: The objective of this course is to understand the knowledge of entrepreneurship

and apply in the organization.
Prerequisite: Students should have a basic knowledge in management
CO 1 Discuss the fundamental concepts of entrepreneurship
CO 2 Understand entrepreneurial motivation and motivation theories

Analyze types of enterprises and ownership structure
CO 3
CO 4 Applyproject evaluation methods
CO5 Evaluate enterprise financial strength
PO 1 PO 2 PO 3 PO 4 PO 5 PO 6 PO 7 PO 8 PO 9 PO PO PO
10 11 12
CO 1 1
1
CO 2 1
2
CO 1
3
CO 2 1 2 1 3
4
CO 2 1 2 1 3
5
Assessment Pattern

1 2
Remember 10 10 10
Understand 20 10 10
Apply 20 10 40
Analyse 10 20
Evaluate 10 20
Create
Mark distribution
Total CIE ESE ESE

Marks Duration
150 50 100 3 hours
14 marks.
1. Explain the Concept of entrepreneur.
2. Explain the characteristics and qualities of entrepreneurs.
1. Describe a few ways to promote innovations in an organization.
2. Discuss the motivational theories.
Course Outcome 3(CO3):
1. Explain the various types of ownerships available to entrepreneurs.
2 Describe features of limited companies.
1. Explain the factors influencing project plan.
2. Write a note on IRR.
1. List the sources of finance.
2. Define break-even analysis.

Syllabus
Module I
Entrepreneurship: definition, requirements to be an entrepreneur, entrepreneur and
intrapreneur, entrepreneur and manager, growth of entrepreneurship in India, women
entrepreneurship, rural and urban entrepreneurship.
Entrepreneurial Motivation: motivating factors, motivation theories-Maslow’s need hierarchy
theory, McClelland’s acquired need theory, government’s policy actions towards
entrepreneurial motivation, entrepreneurship development programmes.
Module II
Types of Enterprises and Ownership Structure: small scale, medium scale and large scale
enterprises, role of small enterprises in economic development; proprietorship, partnership,
limited companies and co-operatives: their formation, capital structure and source of finance.
Module III
Institutional Support and Policies: institutional support towards the development of
entrepreneurship in India, technical consultancy organizations,Government programs,
policies, incentive and institutional networking for enterprise setting,women entrepreneurship
development in India, promotional schemes.
Module IV
Projects: identification and selection of projects, project report, contents and formulation,
elements of project formulation, project design and network analysis, concept of project
evaluation, methods of project evaluation: internal rate of return method and net present value
method.
Module V
Management of Enterprises: objectives and functions of management, scientific management,
general and strategic management; introduction to human resource management: planning,
job analysis, training, recruitment and selection, marketing and organizational dimension of
enterprises; enterprise financing, raising and managing capital, shares, debentures, bonds,
cost of capital; break- even analysis, balance sheet analysis.
Textbook
1. Ram Chandran, Entrepreneurial Development,Tata McGraw Hill, New Delhi, 2008
2. Saini, J. S.Entrepreneurial Development Programmes and Practices, Deep & Deep
Publications,2012
References
1. Khanka,SS.Entrepreneurial Development, S Chand & Company Ltd. New Delhi,2007
2. Badhai, B Entrepreneurship for Engineers, Dhanpat Rai & co, 2006
3. Desai,Vasant, Project Management and Entrepreneurship’,HimalayanPublishing
,Mumbai, 2017
4. Gupta, Srinivasan, ‘Entrepreneurial Development’, S Chand & Sons, New Delhi,2020
5. Kuratko and Rao, Entrepreneurship,Cengage Learning,2012
No. of
No TOPIC
Lectures
1 Introduction to Entrepreneurship
1.1 Entrepreneurship: definition, requirements to be an entrepreneur, 1
entrepreneur and intrapreneur,
1.2 Entrepreneur and manager, growth of entrepreneurship in India, 1
women entrepreneurship
1.3 Rural and urban entrepreneurship. 1
1.4 Entrepreneurial motivation: motivating factors, motivation theories, 2
Maslow’s Need Hierarchy Theory.
1.5 McClelland’s acquired need theory, government’s policy actions 1
towards entrepreneurial motivation.
1.6 Entrepreneurship development programmes. 1
2 Types of enterprises and ownership structure
2.1 Small scale, medium scale and large scale enterprises. 2
2.2 Role of small enterprises in economic development. 1
2.3 Proprietorship, partnership 1
2.4 Limited companies 1
2.5 Co-operatives: their formation, capital structure and source of finance 2
3 Institutional support and policies
3.1 Institutional support towards the development of entrepreneurship in 1
India
3.2 Technical consultancy organizations 1
3.3 Government programs, policies, incentive and institutional networking 2
for enterprise setting.

3.4 Women entrepreneurship development in India 1
3.5 Promotional schemes. 1
4 Projects
4.1 Identification and selection of projects 1
4.2 Project report, contents and formulation. 1
4.3 Elements of project formulation, 1
4.4 Project design and network analysis. 1
4.5 Concept of project evaluation, methods of project evaluation 1
4.6 Internal rate of return method 1
4.7 Net present value method. 1
5 Management of Enterprises
5.1 Objectives and functions of management, scientific management, 1
general and strategic management.
5.2 Introduction to human resource management, planning, job analysis. 1
5.3 Training, recruitment and selection 1
5.4 Marketing and organizational dimension of enterprises. 1
5.5 Enterprise financing, raising and managing capital, shares, debentures 2
bonds, cost of capital
5.6 Break- even analysis 1
5.7 Balance sheet analysis. 1

COURSE CODE: ECT474
COURSE NAME: ENTREPRENEUSHIP
PART A
(Answer all questions. Each question carries 3 marks)
1“Entrepreneurs are made or born.” Give your views.
2 Explain the role of entrepreneurial development programme (EDP)
3 Explain the organizational structure of SMEs.
4 Explain the various types of ownerships available to entrepreneurs.

5 Write a note on Women entrepreneurs.
6 Discuss the incentives availablefor enterprise setting.
7 List the Explain the factors influencing project plan.
8 Discuss the aspects and methods of project appraisal.
9 List the job analysis methods.
10 Explain raising and managing capital.
(10x3=30 marks)
PART B
Module I
11 Explain the characteristics and qualities of entrepreneurs.
12 Discuss the Maslow’s need hierarchy theory.
Module II
13Explain the role and importance of Small and Medium Enterprises.
14Explain the various types of ownerships available to entrepreneurs. Discuss each form in
brief.
Module III
15 Explain the role of central Government and state Government in promoting

entrepreneurship.
16 What is the status of women entrepreneurs in contemporary business? Illustrate with

examples.
Module IV
17 Explain IRR.
18 Explain net present value method.
Module V
19 What is working capital? Why is it important for any enterprise? Explain.
20 Discuss break- even analysis.
(5x14=70 marks)
SEMESTER VIII
PROGRAM ELECTIVE IV
MODERN COMMUNICATION CATEGORY L T P CREDIT

ECT416
SYSTEMS PEC 2 1 0 3
.
Preamble: This course aims to impart knowledge on the basics of modern communication
systems and the breakthrough wireless technologies.
Prerequisite: MAT 204 Probability, Random Process and Numerical Methods, ECT 305
Analog and Digital Communication, ECT 306 Information Theory and Coding
Explain OFDM, OFDMA and SC-FDMA techniques used in cellular

CO1
communication
Discuss the different wireless communication standards for short range
CO2
communication
Explain the IoT architecture and various connectivity technologies used in IoT
CO3
Systems
Understand the various communication standards for connected autonomous
CO4
vehicles
Explain the significance and architecture of software defined radio and cognitive
CO5
radio
PO PO PO
PO 1 PO 2 PO 3 PO 4 PO 5 PO 6 PO 7 PO 8 PO 9
10 11 12
CO1 3 3 3 2
CO2 3 3 3 3 1
CO3 3 3 3 3
CO4 3 3 3 3 1
CO5 3 3 3 2
Assessment Pattern

Tests
1 2
Remember 10 10 20
Understand 30 30 60
Apply 10 10 20
Analyse
Evaluate
Create
Mark distribution
150 50 100 3 hours

1. What is shadowing and how it can be modelled in mobile communication?
2. Explain PAPR in OFDM systems.

1. Compare the physical-layer characteristics of various IEEE 802.11 standards.
2. Explain the characteristics of millimeter wave.

1. Differentiate between WiFi and Bluetooth standards in IoT systems.
2. Explain the salient features of 6LoWPAN.

1. Mention the advantages of 4G/5G LTE standard in vehicular communication.
2. Explain the DSRC standard for vehicular communication.

1. Explain the issues with zero IF receiver architecture for SDR.
2. Discuss the functions of software adaptable network (SAN) in cognitive network.
SYLLABUS
Module Course contents
Module 1: Cellular Communication System
Need for Multi carrier system, Basics of Orthogonal Frequency Division

Multiplexing (OFDM), Multiple access for OFDM systems, Orthogonal
I Frequency Division Multiple Access (OFDMA), Single carrier Frequency
Division Multiple Access (SC-FDMA). Cellular concept, path loss and
shadowing, Doppler shift, Multipath effect, Significance of diversity in wireless
communication systems.
Module 2: Short Range Communication System
Introduction to current wireless technologies, background and current scenario,

future wireless network requirements, IEEE 802.11 (Wi-Fi) standards and
applications (IEEE 802.11a/b/g/n/ac/ax), HiperLAN technology, WPAN (IEEE
802.15.1, IEEE 802.15.3 & IEEE 802.15.4) and WMAN (IEEE 802.16a -
II WiMAX), Space time wireless standards, IEEE 802.16 (Wi-Max standard),
3GPP-LTE standard, Millimeter wave characteristics, Channel performance at 60
GHz, Development of millimeter wave standards, Indoor and outdoor
applications for millimeter wave communications. 6G Networks – Use Cases and
Technologies.
Module 3: IoT System
Introduction of IoT, characteristics, physical and logical design of IoT, IoT

Enabling Technologies – Wireless Sensor networks, Cloud computing.
Introduction to IoT, Evolution of IoT, IoT Networking Components. IoT
III
Connectivity Technologies – Zigbee, Wireless HART, RFID, NFC, LoRa, WiFi,
Bluetooth. IoT Communication Technologies – Infrastructure Protocols – IPv6,
6LoWPAN, Data Protocols – MQTT, MQTT-SN, CoAP. IoT Case Studies and
Future Trends – Agricultural IoT, Vehicular IoT, Healthcare IoT.
Module 4: Intelligent Transport System
Introduction to Intelligent Vehicular Communication – Evolution, Vehicular

Networks and ITS, Vehicular Communication Standards/ Technologies – DSRC,
IV IEEE 802.11p WAVE, IEEE 1609, IEEE 802.15.7 - Visible Light Communication
(VLC), 4G/5G-Device to Device (D2D), 6G Cellular Networks and Connected
Autonomous Vehicles, Operational Scenario – Collision Avoidance.
Module 5: Software Defined Radio System

V Software radio concepts, Operating frequency bands, Transmitter and Receiver
specifications of SDR, Architecture of SDR, Introduction of cognitive radio,
significance of cognitive radio and spectrum subleasing, spectrum sharing in

cognitive radio, implementation of cognitive radio.
Text Books
1. Aditya K. Jagannatham, “Principles of Modern Wireless Communication Systems”,

Tata McGraw Hill, 2016.
2. T.L. Singal, “Wireless Communications”, Tata McGraw Hill Education Private
Limited, Second Edition, 2011.
3. K. C. Huang, Z. Wang, “Millimeter Wave Communication systems”, John Wiley
&Sons.
4. Sudip Misra, Anandarup Mukherjee & Arijit Roy. “Introduction to IoT”. Cambridge
University Press. 2021.
5. George J. Dimitrakopoulos. “Current Technologies in Vehicular Communication”,
Springer International Publishing, 2017.
6. He, J., Yang, K. and Chen, H.H, “6G Cellular Networks and Connected Autonomous
Vehicles”, IEEE Network, vol. 35, no. 4, pp. 255 -261, 2020.
7. Walter Tuttlebee, “SDR Enabling Technologies”, John Wiley.
8. Huseyin Arslan, “Cognitive Radio, SDR and Adaptive Wireless System”, Springer,
2007.
Reference Books
1. Dipankar Raychaudhuri, Mario Gerla, “Emerging Wireless Technologies and the

Future Mobile Internet”, Cambridge University Press, 2011.
2. ArshdeepBahga, A., & Vijay Madisetti V. “Internet of Things: A hands-on approach”.
Vpt., 2014.
3. Paul, A., Chilamkurti, N., Daniel, A. and Rho, S. “Intelligent vehicular networks and
communications: fundamentals, architectures and solutions”. Elsevier, 2016.
4. Peter B. Kenington, ‘RF and baseband techniques for software defined radio”, Artech
House Mobile Communication, 2005.
No of
No TOPIC
Lectures
MODULE 1
1.1 Need for Multi carrier system 1
1.2 Basics of Orthogonal Frequency Division Multiplexing (OFDM), 2
Multiple access for OFDM systems
1.3 Orthogonal Frequency Division Multiple Access (OFDMA) 1
1.4 Single carrier Frequency Division Multiple Access (SC- FDMA) 1
1.5 Cellular concept, path loss and shadowing, doppler shift, 2
Multipath effect
1.6 Significance of diversity in wireless communication systems 1
MODULE II
2.1 Introduction to current wireless technologies, background and 1
current scenario, future wireless network requirements
2.2 IEEE 802.11 (Wi-Fi) standards and applications (IEEE 1
802.11a/b/g/n/ac/ax)
2.3 HiperLAN technology 1
2.4 WPAN (IEEE 802.15.1, IEEE 802.15.3 & IEEE 802.15.4) 2
2.5 WMAN (IEEE 802.16a - WiMAX), 3GPP-LTE standard 1
2.6 Millimeter wave characteristics, Channel performance at 60 GHz, 2
Development of millimeter wave standards
2.7 Indoor and outdoor applications for millimeter wave 1
communications, 6G Networks – Use Cases and Technologies.
MODULE III
3.1 Introduction to IoT, Evolution of IoT, IoT Networking 1
Components
3.2 IoT Connectivity Technologies – Zigbee, Wireless HART, RFID, 2
NFC, LoRa, WiFi, Bluetooth
3.3 IoT Communication Technologies – Infrastructure Protocols – 2
IPv6, 6LoWPAN
3.4 Data Protocols – MQTT, MQTT-SN, CoAP 1
3.5 IoT Case Studies and Future Trends – Agricultural IoT, Vehicular 1
IoT, Healthcare IoT
MODULE IV
4.1 Introduction to Intelligent Vehicular Communication – Evolution, 1
Vehicular Networks and ITS
4.2 Vehicular Communication Standards/ Technologies – DSRC, 2
IEEE 802.11p WAVE, IEEE 1609, IEEE 802.15.7 - Visible Light
Communication (VLC)
4.3 4G/5G-Device to Device (D2D), 6G Cellular Networks and 2
Connected Autonomous Vehicles
4.4 Operational Scenario – Collision Avoidance 1
MODULE V
5.1 Software radio concepts, Operating frequency bands, Transmitter 1
and Receiver specifications of SDR
5.2 Architecture of SDR 1
5.3 Introduction of cognitive radio, significance of cognitive radio and 2
spectrum subleasing, spectrum sharing in cognitive radio
5.4 Implementation of cognitive radio 1

EIGHTH SEMESTER B. TECH DEGREE EXAMINATION
Course Code: ECT416
Course Name: MODERN COMMUNICATION SYSTEMS
PART A
Answer all questions, each carries 3 marks

1. Explain inter-carrier interference in OFDM systems. 3
2 Determine the maximum speed of a vehicle in a mobile 3
communication system experiencing a maximum Doppler
frequency shift of 70 Hz and a frequency of transmission 900
MHz.
3 Write the physical layer specifications of IEEE 802.16 WMAN 3
technology.
4 What are the main challenges in utilizing a 60 GHz channel for 3
millimeter wave communication?
5 Describe the various IoT networking components? 3
6 What is LoRaWAN? How is it different from LoRa? 3
7 What are the advantages of VLC standard over other communication 3
standards in vehicular communication?
8 Mention the main limitations of IEEE 802.11p standard compared to 3
cellular communication in connected autonomous vehicles.
9 List the main SDR transmitter specifications? 3
10 Describe spectrum subleasing and sharing in cognitive radio. 3
PART B
Answer any one full question from each module carries 14 marks.
MODULE 1
11 a. What is the need for adding cyclic prefix to the OFDM sequence. 4
b. Draw and explain the SC-FDMA transmitter and receiver schematic. 10

OR
12 a. Briefly explain free space propagation model in wireless 8

communication.
b. A mobile subscriber travels at a uniform speed of 60 km/h. Compute 6
the time between fades if the mobile uses
(i) a cellphone operating at 900 MHz
(ii) a PCS phone operating at 1900 MHz
Comment on the results obtained.
MODULE II
13 a. Write any three indoor and outdoor applications of millimeter wave 6
communication.
b. Compare the three different IEEE 802.15 WPAN standards. 8
OR
14 a. Briefly explain the different elements to be considered while 8
considering an existing backhaul network to support a millimeter wave
network.
b. Discuss the advantages and disadvantages of WLAN technology. 6
MODULE III
15 a. Explain the principle of operation of MQTT data protocol employed 6
in IoT networks.
b. Briefly describe the architecture of healthcare IoT system. 8
OR
16 a. Briefly explain Zigbee protocol stack used in IoT Systems. 8
b. Discuss the salient features of the CoAP protocol. 6
MODULE IV
17 a. Explain the key components of connected autonomous vehicles in 6
6G communications with the help of a diagram.
b. Describe how collision avoidance can be achieved through vehicular 8
communication.
OR
18 a. With the help of a diagram, explain the architecture of ITS system 9
utilizing VLC standard for V2X communication.
b. Briefly explain IEEE 1609 standard used in vehicular 5
communication.
MODULE V
19 a. Briefly explain the low IF receiver architecture for SDR. 9
b. Define cognitive radio and explain its significance. 5
OR
20 a. Describe software defined radio with the help of functional block 7

diagram.
b. Discuss about the implementation of cognitive network. 7
The following simulation assignments can be done with Python/ MATLAB/ SCILAB/
LabVIEW.
1. Peak to Average Power Ratio (PAPR) of OFDM and SC-FDMA system

• Realize the block diagram of OFDMA transmitter system shown in Fig 7.8 in page 240
in Principles of Modern Wireless Communication Systems.
• Create a random bit vector of arbitrary length. Realize the OFDM transmitter by
mapping the message bits into a sequence of QPSK symbols and convert it into N
parallel streams.
• Realize the multicarrier modulation by computing IFFT.
• Implement parallel to serial converter and add cyclic prefix to generate the OFDM
signal.
• Compute the PAPR of OFDM signal and plot its complementary CDF (CCDF).
• Realize the block diagram of SC-FDMA transmitter system shown in Fig 7.18 in page
260 in Principles of Modern Wireless Communication Systems.
• To generate SC-FDMA signal, repeat the steps followed in OFDM transmitter with the
addition of 2 blocks FFT computation and subcarrier mapping before IFFT
computation.
• Compute the PAPR of SC-FDMA signal and plot its CCDF.
• Compare both CCDF graphs and observe the reduction in PAPR for SC-FDMA system.
2. Computation of Free space path loss and received power

• Input a suitable signal frequency, f and distance between the transmitter and receiver, d.
• Compute the free space propagation path loss, Lp using Eq. 3.13 and 3.14 in page 71 in
Wireless Communications, assuming transmitter and receiver antenna gain as unity.
• Study the effect of antenna gain on path loss by computing path loss, with non-unity
transmitter, Gt and receiver antenna gain, Gr.
• Find the received power, Pr for a particular transmitter power, Pt, Gt , Gr and Lp using
Eq. 3.12 in page 71 in Wireless Communications.
• Repeat the above step for different values of Pt, Gt, Gr and Lp. Observe the variation in
received power
3. SDR Receiver
• Study the various dynamic range issues of SDR receiver, based on the receiver design
considerations given in Section 2.2.1 in page 29 – 31 in SDR Enabling Technologies.
• Compute third order intercept (TOI) using Eq. 1 in page 36 in SDR Enabling
Technologies, by giving suitable input parameters.
• Compute overall noise figure of cascade of amplifiers and its worst-case TOI using Eq.
2 and 3 in page 36 in SDR Enabling Technologies.
• Study the dynamic range of SDR receiver by calculating spurious free dynamic range
(SFDR) using Eq. 5 in page 40 in SDR Enabling Technologies.
ECT426 REAL TIME OPERATING CATEGORY L T P CREDIT

SYSTEMS PEC 2 1 0 3
Prerequisite: ECT 206 computer Architecture and Microcontrollers
Course objectives: The objectives of this course are to:
1. Identify the basics of general operating systems.

2. Understand the structure and the scheduling operations performed by the operating
systems.
3. Introduce Real Time Operating Systems, its basic structure, building blocks and
various operations.
4. Summarize the different scheduling algorithms used in RTOS.
5. Identify the different applications of real time operating systems
Summarize the functions and structure of general-purpose operating

CO1 K2
systems.
CO2 K3 Use different scheduling algorithms on processes and threads.
CO3 K2 Interpret a real time operating system along with its synchronization,
communication and interrupt handling tools.
Illustrate task constraints and analyze the different scheduling algorithms on
CO4 K4
tasks.
CO5 K3 Illustrate the applications of real time operating systems.
PO PO PO PO
PO 2 PO 3 PO 4 PO 5 PO 6 PO 7 PO 8 PO 9
1 10 11 12
CO 1 3
CO 2 2 3 2
CO 3 2 3 2 2
CO 4 2 2 2 2
CO 5 2 3 2 3 2 2
Assessment Pattern
1 2
Apply K3 10 10 20
Analyze K4 5 5 10
Evaluate
Create
Mark distribution:
Total ESE
CIE ESE
Marks Duration
150 50 100 3 hours

Attendance: 10 marks
Continuous Assessment Test (2 numbers): 25 marks
Assignment/Quiz/Case study: 15 marks
14 marks.
Course Level Assessment Questions:
1. List the functions of operating systems.

2. Describe the importance of Kernel in operating system functions.
3. Explain monolithic and layered architecture of operating systems.
4. Draw the process state diagram and explain.

1. Schedule the following processes with FCFS and Round Robin algorithm for a time
of2mS. Assuming all the processes arrives at time zero.Also state the performance
of the system.
Process Burst time
P1 4
P2 5
P3 2
P4 3
2. Compare user level threads and Kernel level threads.
3. Discuss the different types of multiprocessor scheduling operations.
4. Explain the possible scheduling of user level threads with a 50mS process quantum
and threads that run 5mS per CPU time.
1. Explain the different types of semaphores used for process synchronization.

2. Explain how the priority inversion problem in RTOS is solved.
3. Draw the structure and explain the working of a message queue.
4. Differentiate between exceptions and interrupts.
5. What are the different classifications of exceptions?
1. Explain the different timing constraints of a real time task.

2. Illustrate Jackson’s algorithm with an example.
3. Explain EDF algorithm with precedence constraints.
4. Verify the schedulability under EDF and construct the schedule of the following
task set
Ci Di T1
ᴦ1 2 5 6
ᴦ2 2 4 8
ᴦ3 4 8 12
5. Draw the state transition diagram of a real time kernel.
1. Illustrate the implementation of a real time system with an example,

2. With a block schematic explain the real time control system used in an adaptive
cruise control.
Syllabus
Operating system: Types, Objectives and functions , Kernel, Process -

I 6
States, Process Control Block, Operations on processes.
Process Scheduling: FCFS, SJF, Priority, Round-Robin, Multilevel Queue

II and Multilevel Feedback Queue Scheduling. Thread: Structure.User and 7
kernel level threads, multi-threading models, multiprocessor scheduling.
Real Time Operating Systems: Structure and characteristics of Real Time
Systems, Task: Task states, Task synchronization -Semaphores- types, Inter
III 8
task communication mechanisms: message queues, pipes, event registers,
signals, Exceptions and interrupt handling.
Task constraints, Task scheduling: Aperiodic task scheduling: EDD. EDF,
LDF, EDF with precedence constraints. Periodic task scheduling:Rate
IV 8
monotonic and Deadline monotonic, Real time Kernel- Structure, State
transition diagram, Kernel primitives.
Features of FreeRTOS and Linux
Commercial real time operating systems: PSOS, VRTX, RT Linux-
Features and application only.
Case study of (Kernel design, threads and task scheduling) RTOS:
V 6
MicroC/OS-II.
RTOS control system used in real life applications - in adaptive cruise

control.
Text Books
1.Abraham Silberschatz- ‘Operating System Principles’: Wiley India,7th edition, 2011
2.William Stallings –‘Operating systems- Internals and design principles’, Prentice Hall, 7th
edition, 2011
3.Qing Li – ‘Real-Time Concepts for Embedded Systems ‘, CMP Books, 2013
4.Giorgio C. Buttazzo, -‘HARD REAL-TIME COMPUTING SYSTEMS Predictable
Scheduling Algorithms and Applications’, Kluwer Academic Publishers.
Reference Books:
1. Tanenbaum -‘Modern Operating Systems’ ,Pearson Edition, 3/e, 2007.
2. Jean J Labrosse , ‘Micro C/OS-II, The Real Time Kernel’ , CMP Books, 2011
3. Rajib Mall, ‘Real-Time Systems: Theory and Practice ‘ , 2008.
4. David E. Simon ‘An Embedded Software Primer’, Pearson 2012
5. Raj Kamal, ‘Embedded Systems – Architecture, Programming and Design’,Tata McGraw Hill
No TOPIC No of Lectures
MODULE 1
1.1 Introduction to Operating system- Types, Objective and functions 2
1.2 Kernel - Importance and functions 2
1.3 Process - States, Process Control Block, Operations on processes 2
MODULE II
2.1 Process Scheduling: FCFS, SJF, Priority, Round-Robin 2
2.2 Multilevel Queue and Multilevel Feedback Queue Scheduling 2
2.3 Thread- Structure. User and kernel level threads, Multi-threading models 2
2.4 Multiprocessor scheduling 1
MODULE III
3.1 Real Time Operating Systems: Structure and characteristics of Real Time 1
Systems
3.2 Task: Task states 1
3.3 Task synchronization -Semaphores- types 2
3.4 Inter task communication mechanisms: message queues, pipes, event 2
registers, signals
3.5 Exceptions and interrupt handling 2
MODULE IV
4.1 Task constraints 1
4.2 Task scheduling: Aperiodic task scheduling: EDD. EDF, LDF, EDF with 3
precedence constraints
4.3 Periodic task scheduling: Rate monotonic, Deadline monotonic 2
4.4 Real time Kernel- Structure, State transition diagram, Kernel primitives 2
MODULE V
5.1 Features of FreeRTOS and Linux 1
5.2 Commercial real time operating systems: PSOS, VRTX, RT Linux- 2
Features and application only.
5.3 Case study of RTOS: MicroC/OS-II real time operating systems. 2
5.4 RTOS control system used in real life applications - in adaptive cruise 1
control.

VIII SEMESTER B. TECH DEGREE EXAMINATION
Course Code: ECT426
Course Name: REAL TIME OPERATING SYSTEMS
PART A
1. List any six functions of an operating system. 3
2 Differentiate microkernel and exokernel structures of operating systems. 3
3 Explain the different operations on processes. 3
4 Explain the differences between Pre-emptive and Non pre-emptive 3

scheduling policies.
5 Draw the state diagram of RTOS queue and explain. 3
6 What you mean by priority inversion in real time systems? How the 3
operating system manages this issue?
7 Explain EDD algorithm with an example. 3
8 Explain the task control block of a real time kernel. 3
9 List the features of FreeRTOS. 3
10 Illustrate the threads in MicroC/OS-II operating system. 3
PART B
Answer any one full question from each module, Each question carries
14 marks.
MODULE 1
11 a. Explain the functions of operating system as Resource Manager. 7
b. Describe the structure of a Process Control Block 7
OR
12 a. Explain the monolithic and microkernel architectures of OS kernel. 7
b. Draw the process state diagram and explain the different states. 7
MODULE II
13 a. Explain the Shortest Remaining Time First algorithm with a suitable 7
example.
b.Schedule the given 5 processes with Round Robin scheduling. 7
Process ID Arrival Time Burst Time

P1 0 5
P2 1 3
P3 2 1
P4 3 2
P5 4 3
Draw the Gantt chart and calculate the average waiting time and
turn-around time for these processes if time quantum is 2 units,
OR
14 Compare FCFS and Round -Robin scheduling algorithms 7
b. Explain thread scheduling algorithms used in operating systems in detail. 7
MODULE III
15 a .Draw the structure of a real time operating system and explain. 7
b. Differentiate between exceptions and interrupts. What are the different 7

classifications of exceptions
OR
16 a. Explain how synchronization is achieved between different tasks in a real 7

time operating system
b.Describe any two inter task communication mechanisms in a real time 7

operating systems.
MODULE IV
17 a. Illustrate Horn’s algorithm with an example. 7
b. Explain EDF algorithm with precedence constraints. 7
OR
18 a. Explain the precedence constraints of a real time task. 7

b. Verify the schedulability and construct the scheduling according to the 7
rate monotonic algorithmfor the following set of periodic tasksᴦ1, ᴦ2 and ᴦ3.
Ci Ti
ᴦ1 3 5
ᴦ2 1 8
ᴦ3 1 10
Where Ci and Ti are the computation time activation period of the task.
MODULE V
19 a.Illustrate the implementation of a real time system with an example, 7
b. Explain the inter-process communication techniques used in Micro 7

C/OS-II
OR
20 a. Compare the features of PSOS, VRTX and RT Linux 7
b. Prepare suitable requirements table for an RTOS control system used in 7

adaptive cruise control.
ADAPTIVE SIGNAL CATEGORY L T P CREDIT
ECT436
PROCESSING PEC 2 1 0 3
Prerequisite: Digital Signal processing
Course objectives: The objectives of this course are to:
• Introduce to the concept and need of adaptive filters and popular adaptive signal
processing algorithms
• Understand the concepts of training and convergence and the trade-off between
performance and complexity.
• Introduce to common linear estimation techniques
• Introduce inverse adaptive modelling.
CO1 K1 Understand the basic concepts of statistical signal processing

Devise filtering solutions for optimising the cost function indicating error
CO2 K2 in estimation of parameters and appreciate the need for adaptation in
design.
Evaluate the performance of various methods for designing adaptive filters
CO3 K2 through estimation of different parameters of stationary random process
clearly considering practical application specifications.
Analyse convergence and stability issues associated with adaptive filter
CO4 K2
design and come up with optimum solutions for real life applications taking
care of requirements in terms of complexity and accuracy
Design and implement filtering solutions for applications such as channel
CO5 K3 equalisation, interference cancelling and prediction considering present day
challenges.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
CO
3 3 3 2
1
CO
3 3 3 2
2
CO
3 3 3 2
3
CO
3 3 3 2
4
CO
3 3 3 2
5
Assessment Pattern

1 2
Apply K3 10 10 20
Analyse
Evaluate
Create
Mark distribution
150 50 100 3 hours
Course Outcome 1 (CO1): Adaptive systems

1. Describe the characteristics and applications of adaptive signal processing
2. Describe open and closed loop adaptation
Course Outcome 2 (CO2:Searching performance surface-stability and rate of convergence

1. Compare Newton’s & Steepest-descent methods in terms of speed adaptation and mis-
adjustment.
2. Discuss about role of Learning curves.
Course Outcome 3 (CO3): LMS algorithm

1. Discuss Correlation properties of lattice Filter
2. Derive LMS adaptive algorithm
Course Outcome 4 (CO4):Kalman filtering, Applications-adaptive modeling and system

identification
1. Discuss Kalman filtering.
2. Explain how adaptive filters can be used for single input system identification
Course Outcome 5 (CO5):Inverse adaptive modeling

1. Describe the two types of inverse modelling approaches.
2. Derive the least-square solution to inverse modelling problem
Syllabus
Adaptive systems- Definitions and characteristics - applications –

properties examples - adaptive linear combiner input signal and
weight vectors - performance function-gradient and minimum mean
I 8
square error - introduction to filtering- smoothing and prediction -
linear optimum filtering-orthogonality - Wiener – Hopf equation-
performance surface
Searching performance surface-stability and rate of convergence:
Learning curve gradient search - Newton's method - method of
II 6
steepest descent - comparison - Gradient estimation - performance
penalty - variance - excess MSE and time constants – mis adjustments
LMS algorithm, convergence of weight vector: LMS/Newton
algorithm - properties - sequential regression algorithm - adaptive
III recursive filters - random-search algorithms - lattice structure - 7
adaptive filters with orthogonal signals.
Kalman filters-recursive minimum mean square estimation for scalar
random variable. Applications-adaptive modeling and system
IV 7
identification: Multipath communication channel, geophysical
exploration, Kalman filter as the unifying basis for RLS filters.
Inverse adaptive modeling: Equalization, and deconvolution adaptive
V equalization of telephone channels-adapting poles and zeros for IIR 7
digital filter synthesis
Text Book:
1.Bernard Widrow and Samuel D. Stearns, ―Adaptive Signal Processing‖, Person Education,
1985.
2.Mons H Hays -Statistical Digital Signal Processing and Modeling -Wiley Publications,
2006.
Reference Books:
1. Simon Haykin, ―Adaptive Filter Theory‖, Pearson Education, 2003.
2. John R. Treichler, C. Richard Johnson, Michael G. Larimore, ―Theory and Design of
Adaptive Filters, Prentice-Hall of India, 2002.
3.John G. Proakis, Dimitris G. Manolokis, “Digital Signal Processing”, Prentice Hall of
India, New Delhi, 2005
4. S. Thomas Alexander, “Adaptive Signal Processing - Theory and Application”, Springer-
Verlag.
5.D. G. Manolokis, V. K. Ingle and S. M. Kogar, “Statistical and Adaptive Signal
Processing”, Mc GrawHill International Edition, 2000.
No TOPIC No of
Lectures
MODULE 1
1.1 Adaptive systems- characteristics - applications – properties examples 1
1.2 Adaptive linear combiner, input signal and weight vectors performance 2
function-gradient and minimum mean square error
1.3 introduction to filtering- smoothing and prediction linear optimum 3
filtering- linear optimum filtering-orthogonality -
1.4 Wiener – Hopf equation-performance surface 2
MODULE II
2.1 Searching performance surface-stability and rate of convergence: 1
2.2 Learning curve gradient search, Newton's method 1
2.3 Method of steepest descent 2
2.4 Gradient estimation 1
2.5 Performance penalty - variance - excess MSE and time constants – mis- 1
adjustments
MODULE III
3.1 LMS algorithm, convergence of weight vector 2
3.2 Newton algorithm - properties 1
3.3 sequential regression algorithm RLS 1
3.4 adaptive recursive filters - random-search algorithms 1
3.5 lattice structure - adaptive filters with orthogonal signals 2
MODULE IV
4.1 Kalman filters-recursive minimum mean square estimation for scalar 3
random variable.
4.2 adaptive modeling and system identification 1
4.3 Multipath communication channel 1
4.4 Geophysical exploration 1
4.5 Kalman filter as the unifying basis for RLS filters. 1
MODULE V
5.1 Inverse adaptive modeling: 1
5.2 Equalization, and deconvolution 2
5.3 adaptive equalization of telephone channels, Echo, Noise Cancellation. 2
5.4 adapting poles and zeros for IIR digital filter synthesis 2

EIGHTH SEMESTER B.TECH DEGREE EXAMINATION, (Model Question Paper)
Course Code: ECT436
Course Name: ADAPTIVE SIGNAL PROCESSING

PART A

1 Explain the structure of an Adaptive Linear Combiner. 3
2 Describe the characteristics of an Adaptive System 3
3 Which are the three basic forms of estimation 3
4 What is the minimum mean-square error produced by this Wiener filter 3
5 What is Performance Penalty 3
6 Give a note on stability and rate of convergence 3
7 Propose an adaptive modelling for a multipath channel. 3
8 Explain the application of adaptive modelling 3
9 Discuss deconvolution in inverse adaptive modelling 3
10 Explain types of Adaptive Inverse Systems 3
PART B
MODULE 1
11 Adaptive systems are nonlinear, Justify. Suppose in an adaptive-filtering 8
environment, where input signal, xn = sin (2πn/ N) and Desired signal, dn = 2cos
(2πn /N ) sampled sinusoids with same frequency and N samples per
cycle(N>2).Calculate R,P, ξ,W*,ξmin
6
b. Derive the expression for gradient and minimum Mean Square Error with 2-
Dimensional Performance surface plots.
OR
12 7
a. Given a quadratic MSE function for the Wiener filter: J = 40 – 20W +10W2,
Use the steepest descent method with an initial guess as w0=0 and µ=0.04 to
find the optimal solution for W* and determine ξmin by iterating three times.
b. Derive augmented Wiener-Hopf equation for forward prediction. 7

MODULE II
13 a. Explain about Gradient Search methods. 7
b. Discuss about Stability and Rate of convergence Gradient Searching Algorithm 7
OR
14 a. Compare Newton’s & Steepest-descent methods in terms of speed adaptation and 7
mis-adjustment.
b. Discuss about role of Learning curves 7
MODULE III
15 a. Derive LMS adaptive algorithm. 8
b. Compare the LMS and the RLS algorithm 6
OR
16 a. Prove Correlation properties of lattice Filter. 7
b. Discuss sequential regression algorithm 7
MODULE IV
17 a. Discuss recursive minimum mean square estimation for scalar random variable 7
using Kalman filter.
b. Explain how adaptive filters can be used for single input system identification 7
OR
18 a. Illustrate how adaptive filters are used to measure earth’s impulse 7
response.
b. Justify the statement ‘Kalman filter are the unifying basis for RLS filters’ with 7
necessary mathematical equations.
MODULE V
19 a. Describe the two types of inverse modelling approaches. 7
b. Derive the least-square solution to inverse modelling problem. 7
OR
20 Write a short note on adaptive noise cancelling. Consider the noise canceller, 1
Assume v(n)=Cr(n). Determine the best value of W* that minimise mean square 0
error E[e2(n)].
b. Explain how poles and zeros can be adapted for IIR filter synthesis. 5
Simulation Assignments (Using MATLAB/Python)
I. Simulate Normalized LMS algorithm and compare its performance with LMS.
II. Simulate RLS algorithm and compare its performance with LMS and NLMS.
III. (a) Generate the data for LMS algorithm using the model H(z)= (z-
0.8)(z+0.7)/{(z-0.9)(z+0.8)(z+65)}( Necessary assumptions can be made)
(b) Get an estimate of signal energy for the above data, and using this estimate
determine range for Mu. Select two values for Mu in this range.
(c) Run the LMS algorithm in predictive mode for the data you have generated
and for the two choices of Mu.
(d) Do a validation test. You should use the following for the purpose of
comparison
(i) Learning curve (i.e. Mean square error curve)
(ii) Convergent values of W(n)
(iii) Whiteness of error
Comment on which choice of Mu gives better results, and why.
MICROWAVE DEVICES AND CATEGORY L T P CREDIT

ECT446
CIRCUITS PEC 2 1 0 3
Preamble: This course aims to understand with active and passive microwave semiconductor
devices, components, microwave sources and amplifiers used in microwave communication systems,
analysis of microwave networks and microwave integrated circuits.
Prerequisite: ECT 401 MICROWAVE AND ANTENNAS
Course Outcomes: After the completion of the course the student will be able to:
CO1 Understand the limitation of conventional solid state devices at Microwave, Gunn –
K2 effect diodes, Microwave generation and amplification, IMPATT and TRAPATT diodes
CO2 Design of Bipolar transistors, MESFET, Microwave amplifiers and
K3 oscillators
CO3
Analysis of Microwave Network Analysis and the corresponding signal flow graphs
K3
CO4 Design of Microwave filters, Filter design by image parameter method, Filter
K3 transformation and implementation
CO5 Understand different MICs, Distributed and lumped elements of integrated circuits, Diode
K2 control devices.

CO1 3 3 2 2
CO2 3 3 3 2
CO3 3 3 3 2
CO4 3 3 3 2
CO5 3 3 2 2
Assessment Pattern:
Continuous Assessment Tests
Bloom’s Category End Semester Examination
1 2
Remember
Understand 20 20 40
Apply 30 30 60
Analyse
Evaluate
Create
Mark distribution:
150 50 100 3Hrs

There will be two parts; Part A and Part B. Part A contain 10 questions with 2 questions from
each module, having 3 marks for each question. Students should answer all questions. Part B
contains 2 questions from each module of which student should answer any one. Each question can
have maximum 2 subdivisions and carry 14 marks.
Course Level Assessment Questions.

1. Explain Ridley – Watkins-Hilsum theory.
2. Explain in detail Various modes of operation of Gunn Oscillators.

1. Explain GaAs MESFET with structure and principle of operation? Why GaAs MESFETs are
preferred over Si MESFETs.
2. Derive the expression for available power gain of microwave amplifier.

1. Explain the importance of impedance matching or tuning.
2. Evaluate the ABCD matrix coefficient computation of a transmission line section with
characteristic impedance ‘Zo’ propagation constant ‘β’ and length ‘l’.

1. Design a low-pass composite filter with a cut-off frequency of 2MHz and impedances of 75Ω.
Place the infinite attenuation pole at 2.05MHz.
2. With neat circuit explain the Design procedure of an m-derived LPF section and plot the
frequency response.

1. Explain the configuration of Planar capacitor film
2. Discuss Strip line in planar transmission and also find the Quality factor.
3. Explain the frequency characteristics of single layer square inductor.
Syllabus

Introduction, Characteristic, features of microwaves, Limitation of conventional
solid state devices at Microwave. Gunn diodes – Gunn effect, Ridley – Watkins-
I Hilsum theory, Modes of operation, Limited space – Charge accumulation (LSA) 6
mode of Gunn diode. Microwave generation and amplification. Structure,
Operation, Power output and efficiency of IMPATT and TRAPATT diodes
Bipolar transistors – biasing, FET – biasing, MESFET – Structure, Operation.
Microwave amplifiers and oscillators – Amplifiers – Gain and stability, Single
II 8
stage transistor amplifier design. Oscillator design – One port negative resistance
oscillators.
Microwave Network Analysis – Equivalent voltages and currents, Impedance and
Admittance matrices, Scattering matrix, The transmission matrix.
III Signal flow graphs. Impedance matching and tuning – Matching with lumped 6
elements, Single stub tuning, Double stub tuning. Quarter wave transformer,
Theory of small reflections.
Microwave filters – Periodic structures – Analysis of infinite periodic structures
and terminated periodic structures
IV 7
Filter design by image parameter method – Constant k, m-derived and composite.
Filter design by insertion loss method. Filter transformation and implementation.
Introduction to MICSs:-Technology of hybrid MICs, monolithic MICs.
Comparison of both MICs. Planar transmission lines such as strip line, microstrip
line, and slot line. Distributed and lumped elements of integrated circuits -
V 8
capacitors, inductors, resistors, terminations, attenuators, resonators and
discontinuities.Diode control devices – switches, attenuators, limiters. Diode
phase shifter. Circulators and isolators.
Text Books:
1. David M. Pozar, Microwave Engineering, 4/e, Wiley India, 2012.

2. Robert E. Collin, Foundation of Microwave Engineering, 2/e, Wiley India, 2012.
References:
1. Bharathi Bhat and Shiban K. Koul: Stripline-like Transmission Lines for MIC, New Age
International (P) Ltd, 1989.
2. I. Kneppo, J. Fabian, et al., Microwave Integrated Circuits, BSP, India, 2006.
3. Leo Maloratsky, Passive RF and Microwave Integrated Circuits, Elsevier, 2006.
No Topic No.of.
Lectures
Module I
1.1 Introduction, Characteristic, features of microwaves, Limitation of conventional solid
2
state devices at Microwave
1.2 Gunn – effect diodes – Gunn effect, Ridley – Watkins-Hilsum theory, Modes of
2
operation, Limited space – Charge accumulation (LSA) mode of Gunn diode.
1.3 Microwave generation and amplification. Structure, Operation, Power output and
2
efficiency of IMPATT and TRAPATT diodes
Module II
2.1 Bipolar transistors – biasing, FET – biasing, MESFET – Structure, Operation. 3
2.2 Microwave amplifiers and oscillators – Amplifiers – Gain and stability, Single stage 3
transistor amplifier design.
2.3 Oscillator design – One port negative resistance oscillators. 2
Module III
3.1 Microwave Network Analysis – Equivalent voltages and currents, Impedance and
Admittance matrices, Scattering matrix, The transmission matrix 2
3.2 Signal flow graphs. Impedance matching and tuning – Matching with lumped
2
elements, Single stub tuning, Double stub tuning.
3.3 Quarter wave transformer, Theory of small reflections. 2
Module IV
4.1 Microwave filters, Periodic structures, Analysis of periodic structures
2
4.2 Filter design by image parameter method – Constant k, m-derived and composite. 3
4.3 Filter design by insertion loss method. Filter transformation and implementation. 2
Module V
5.1 Introduction to MICSs:-Technology of hybrid MICs, monolithic MICs. Comparison
2
of both MICs.
5.2 Planar transmission lines such as stripline, microstrip line, and slotline. 2
5.3 Distributed and lumped elements of integrated circuits - capacitors, inductors,
2
resistors, terminations, attenuators, resonators and discontinuities.
5.4 Diode control devices – switches, attenuators, limiters. Diode phase shifter.
2
Circulators and isolators.

EIGHTH EMESTER B. TECH DEGREE EXAMINATION
Course Code: ECT446
Course Name: MICROWAVE DEVICES AND CIRCUITS
PART A
1 With a graph explain the characteristics of Gunn diode. (3)
2 Explain the limitations of conventional solid state devices at microwaves (3)
3 Design a one port negative resistance oscillator (3)
4 Discuss different biasing techniques used for microwave bipolar transistor. (3)
5 Derive expressions for S parameters in terms of Z parameters for a 2-port network. (3)
6 Explain the principle of double stub matching. (3)
7 Discuss the significance of k-β diagram in filter characteristics. (3)
8 List the Kuroda’s identity. (3)
The strip line designed with a dielectric material with b = h = 3.1 mm, w = 2.5 mm
9 (3)
Find characteristic impedance Zo.
ε r = 10.5
10 Explain the configuration of distributed ferrite circulators. (3)
PART B
MODULE I
What does IMPATT diode stand for and with neat diagram mention construction and (10)
11 a)
working of it and derive power and η of the same.
b) Explain modes of operation of Gunn diode. (4)
OR
12 a) What are TRAPATT diodes? Explain elaborately their principle of operation with (10)
neat diagram.
b) An IMPATT diode has carrier drift velocity Vd = 3 x 107 cm/s, Drift region length L (4)
= 6µm, Maximum operating voltage V0max = 100V, Maximum operating current
I0max = 200mA, Efficiency η = 15%, Breakdown voltage Vbd = 90V. Find
maximum CW output power in watts and the resonant frequency in gigahertz.
MODULE II
13 a) Design a single stage Transistor Amplifier used in microwave circuits. (10)

b) Why are GaAs MESFET’s preferred to Si MESFET’s (4)
OR
14 a) Discuss in detail the physical structure of MESFET and explain its principle of (10)
operation.
b) Discuss briefly the Stability of Amplifier with necessary conditions. (4)
MODULE III
15 a) For a microwave circuit, discuss the equivalent voltage and currents. (6)
b) Explain working of Double Stub tuning and Quarter Wave Transformer. (8)
OR
16 a) Explain in detail the concept of matching with lumped elements. (6)

b) Discuss in detail about impedance and frequency scaling. (8)
MODULE IV
17 a) Explain the steps in designing a composite filter. Also write down the equations and (8)
draw the circuit for designing a composite low pass filter.
b) Design a low pass filter for fabrication using microstrip line. The specifications are (6)
cut-off frequency of 4 GHz, third order, impedance of 50 Ω and a 3 dB equi-ripple
characteristics. The normalized low pass proto-type values are g1 = 3.3487 = L1 g3,=
3.3487 = L3 , g2 = 0.7117 = C2 , g4 = 1.000 = RL.
OR
18 a) Design a low pass constant K filter using image parameter method. (7)
b) What are the steps required to transfer a LPF from HPF .explain. (7)
MODULE V
19 a) Explain in detail about thick film and thin film technology? (9)
b) Discuss Microwave resonators with neat diagram (5)
OR
(8)
20 a) Classify Switches based on Characteristics
b) Discuss briefly about slot line. (6)
SPEECH AND AUDIO CATEGORY L T P CREDIT

ECT456
PROCESSING
PEC 2 1 0 3
Prerequisite: Digital Signal processing
Course objectives:
• To familiarize the basic mechanism of speech production and the basic concepts of methods
for speech analysis and parametric representation of speech.
• To give an overall picture about various applications of speech processing
• To impart ideas of Perception of Sound, Psycho-acoustic analysis, Spatial Audio Perception

and rendering.
• To introduce Audio Compression Schemes.
Understand basic concepts of speech production, speech analysis, speech

CO1K1 coding and parametric representation of speech and apply it in practical
applications
CO2K3 Develop systems for various applications of speech processing
CO3K2 Learn Signal processing models of sound perception and application of
perception models in audio signal processing
CO4K2 Implement audio compression algorithms and standards
C0 5 K2 Perform audio quality analysis
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
CO 1 3 3 2
CO 2 3 3 2 2
CO 3 3 3 2 2
CO 4 3 3 2
CO 5 3 3 2 2
Assessment Pattern
1 2
Apply K3 10 10 20
Analyse
Evaluate
Create
Mark distribution
Total ESE
CIE ESE
Marks Duration
150 50 100 3 hours
Course Outcome 1 (CO1): Speech Processing, Parametric representation of speech, LPC

analysis
1. Describe algorithm for computing LPC coefficients using autocorrelation method
2. Define short time energy and short time zero crossing rate
Course Outcome 2 (CO2): Frequency domain analysis, Speech coding, Speech

enhancement
1. Describe the steps involved in obtaining MFCC coefficients of a speech signal
2. Compare broad categories of speech coding techniques in terms of bitrate and speech
quality
Course Outcome 3 (CO3): Models of Audio perception, Psychoacoustic analysis

1. Explain MPEG psycho-acoustic model of audio perception
2. Differentiate between simultaneous masking and temporal masking
Course Outcome 4 (CO4): Audio compression methods, Transform coding of Audio signals
1. Describe various redundancy removal and perceptual irrelevancy removal in audio
compression
2. Explain the concept of MDCT and its properties
Course Outcome 5 (CO5): Audio Perception and rendering

1. Explain subjective and objective analysis methods to measure the audio quality
2. What are the physical and psycho-acoustical basis of sound localization and space
perception Describe spatial audio standards
Syllabus
Speech Production: Acoustic theory of speech production. Speech

Analysis: Speech signal, Short-Time Speech Analysis, Time domain
I analysis (Short time energy, short time zero crossing Rate, ACF).LPC 7
Analysis (LPC model, Auto correlation method).
Frequency domain analysis (Filter Banks, STFT, Spectrogram),
Cepstral Analysis, MFCC. Probabilistic formulation of speech
recognition, Speech coding: fundamentals, Comparison of waveform
II 7
coding, vocoding and hybrid coding, Speech enhancement:
fundamentals, basic types, Speaker verification (block diagram),
Language Identification (block diagram)
Signal Processing Models of Audio Perception: Basic anatomy of
hearing System. Auditory Filter Banks, Psycho-acoustic analysis:
III Critical Band Structure, Absolute Threshold of Hearing, Simultaneous 7
Masking, Temporal Masking, MPEG psycho-acoustic model.
Audio compression methods: Sampling rate and bandwidth
requirement for digital audio, Redundancy removal andperceptual
IV irrelevancy removal, Transform coding of digitalaudio: MPEG2-AAC 7
coding standard, MDCT and its properties,Pre-echo and pre-echo
suppression, Loss less coding methods.
Spatial Audio Perception and rendering: The physical and psycho-

acoustical basis of sound localization and space perception. Spatial
V audio standards. Audio quality analysis: Objective analysis methods- 7
PEAQ, Subjective analysis methods - MOS score, MUSHRA score
Text Books:
1. Douglas O'Shaughnessy, Speech Communications: Human & Machine, IEEE Press,
Hardcover 2/e, 1999; ISBN: 0780334493.
2. Nelson Morgan and Ben Gold, Speech and Audio Signal Processing: Processing and
Perception Speech and Music, July 1999, John Wiley & Sons, ISBN: 0471351547
References:
1. Donald G. Childers, Speech Processing and Synthesis Toolboxes, John Wiley & Sons,
September 1999; ISBN: 0471349593
2. Rabiner and Juang, Fundamentals of Speech Recognition, Prentice Hall, 1994.
3. Rabiner and Schafer, Digital Processing of Speech Signals, Prentice Hall, 1978.
4. Thomas F. Quatieri, Discrete-Time Speech Signal Processing: Principles and Practice,
Prentice Hall; ISBN: 013242942X; 1/e
No of
No TOPIC
Lectures
MODULE 1
1.1 Acoustic theory of speech production 2
1.2 Speech signal, Short-time analysis of speech 2
1.3 Time domain analysis (Short time energy, short time zero crossing 2
Rate, ACF)
1.4 LPC Analysis 1
MODULE II
2.1 Frequency domain analysis (Filter Banks, STFT, Spectrogram) 2
2.2 Cepstral Analysis 1
2.3 MFCC. 1
2.4 Fundamentals of Speech recognition, Speech coding, Speech 1
Enhancement
2.5 Speaker Verification, 1
2.6 Language Identification 1
MODULE III
3.1 Signal Processing Models of Audio Perception 1
3.2 Basic anatomy of hearing System. 1
3.3 Auditory Filter Banks, Psycho-acoustic analysis. 2
3.4 Critical Band Structure, Absolute Threshold of Hearing. 1
3.5 Simultaneous Masking, Temporal Masking, 1

3.6 MPEG psycho-acoustic model 1
MODULE IV
4.1 Sampling rate and bandwidth requirement for digital audio, 2
4.2 Redundancy removal and perceptual irrelevancy removal, 1
4.3 Transform coding of digital audio: MPEG2-AAC coding standard 1
4.4 MDCT and its properties, 1
4.5 Pre-echo and pre-echo suppression, 1
4.6 Lossless coding methods. 1
MODULE V
5.1 Spatial Audio Perception and rendering 2
5.2 The physical and psycho-acoustical basis of sound localization and 2
space perception.
5.3 Spatial audio standards. 1
5.4 Audio quality analysis: Objective analysis methods- PEAQ 1
5.5 Subjective analysis methods - MOS score, MUSHRA score 1

VIII SEMESTER B. TECH DEGREE EXAMINATION
Course Code: ECT456
Course Name: SPEECH AND AUDIO PROCESSING
PART A

1. What is Zero Crossing Rate (ZCR) ? How is it used for differentiating
voiced and unvoiced speech?
2 Why short time analysis is preferred for analysing speech signal
3 Express speech recognition in terms of probabilistic formulation and
justify the importance of each term.
4 What is the need for Spectrogram representation of speech signals
5 Differentiate between speaker identification and speaker verification
6 How is ‘bit allocation’ used in MPEG?
7 What is threshold of hearing? Explain with the help of a diagram
8 Draw and explain the concept of threshold of hearing

9 What is redundancy removal in audio compression?
10 What is cone of confusion? How do listeners resolve it?
PART B
Answer any one full question from each module carries 14 marks.
MODULE 1
11 a) Draw the source system model of speech production. Derive 7
equations of LP analysis using autocorrelation method.
b) Write mathematical expression for the computation of short 7
time energy and short time auto correlation for a speech
segment
OR
12 Describe human speech production mechanism using a diagram and 14
the role of following organs in speech production
(i) Velum (ii) Vocal folds (iii) Lips (iv) Tongue
MODULE II
13 a) Define mathematically the need of STFT for analyzing speech 7
signals.
b) Describe with the help of a block diagram the steps involved in 7
obtaining MFCC coefficients of a speech signal.
OR
14 a) Formulate ‘automatic speech recognition’ using probabilistic 7
terms
b) Explain any one speech coding technique in detail 7
MODULE III
15 a) Draw and explain the concept of auditory filter banks 7
b) With the help of neat diagram explain the anatomy of hearing 7
system
OR
16 a) Differentiate between simultaneous masking and temporal 6
masking
a) Explain MPEG psycho acoustic model. How is masking useful 8
for implementing audio compression?
MODULE IV
17 a) Explain mathematically the concept of MDCT and its 7
properties.
b) Explain MPEG2-AAC coding standard 7
OR
18 a) Describe pre-echo suppression in audio signals 7
b) Briefly explain lossless coding of audio signals 7
MODULE V
19 a) Differentiate between Interaural level difference (ILD) and 7
Interaural time difference (ITD) in perception with help of
diagrams
b) Explain any two spatial audio standards. 7
OR
20 a) Describe objective analysis method to analyze the audio 8
quality.
b) Mention the significance of MOS score and MUSHRA score 6
ECT466 ANALOG CMOS DESIGN
PEC 2 1 0 3
Preamble: This course aims to impart the basic knowledge of CMOS analog circuits design
and enable the students to design integrated circuits.
Prerequisite: ECT 202 Analog Circuits, ECT 201 Solid State Devices.
Course Outcomes: After the completion of the course the student will be able to,
CO1 Analyze various Single stage Amplifiers with different types of loads
CO2 Design and Analyse Differential Amplifiers
CO3 Design various types of current mirrors
CO4 Plot the frequency response of single stage and differential amplifiers
CO5 Analyse the effect of noise in single stage amplifiers
CO6 Implement PLL for various applications

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2
CO
3 3 2
1
CO
3 3 2
2
CO
3 3 2
3
CO
3 3 2
4
CO
3 3 2
5
CO
3 3 2
6
Assessment Pattern
1 2
Apply K3 20 20 70
Analyse
Evaluate
Create
Mark distribution

150 50 100 3 hours

14 marks.
Course level Assessment Questions
CO1. Analyze various Single stage Amplifiers with different types of loads
1. Develop small signal model for various amplifier configurations
2. Calculate the small signal gain of various configurations
3. Analyze the effect of cascading of stages.
CO2. Design and Analyse Differential Amplifiers

1. Perform Qualitative Analysis of Differential Pair.
2. Calculate the small signal gain of differential pair if the bias voltages are equal.
3. Calculate the overdrive voltage of each transistor in differential pair.
CO3. Design various types of current mirrors

1. Explain the use of current mirrors to bias a differential pair
2. Explain the concept of an active current mirror.
3. Analysis of circuits having current mirror.
CO4:Plot the frequency response of single stage and differential amplifiers

1. Calculation of poles associated with the nodes in a circuit
2. Calculate the voltage transfer function of common source stage
3. Modelling the high frequency equivalent circuit of various configurations.
CO5:Analyse the effect of noise in single stage amplifiers

1. Modelling of noise in circuits.
2. Calculation of Input referred noise and output noise in various circuits.
3. Calculation of noise bandwidth
CO6: Implement PLL for various applications
1. Describe the implementation of PLL for Frequency Multiplication, Frequency
synthesizer and Skew reduction
SYLLABUS
Module I
Basic MOS Device physics- Review of MOS Characteristics and Second order effects(only
basic theoretical concepts).
Single Stage Amplifiers. Common Source Stage with Different Load types , Source Follower,
Common Gate and Cascode Stage
Module II
Differential Amplifiers - Single-ended and differential operation, Basic differential pair,

Common-mode response, Differential pair with MOS load, Gilbert Cell.
Current Mirror: Simple, Cascode and Basic concepts of active current Mirror
Module III
Frequency Response of Amplifiers: Miller Effect, Poles and Zeros, Frequency Response
Analysis of Common Source, Source Follower, Common Gate and Differential Pair.
Module IV
Noise in Amplifiers: Noise in Single Stage amplifier (CS,CG,Source Follower), Noise in

Differential Pair, Noise Band Width.
Module V
Phase Locked Loops- Mathematical model of VCO, Phase Detector, Basic PLL Topology,
Type I and Type II(Charge Pump) PLL, Stability Analysis of PLL, Non Ideal Effects in PLL,
Application of PLL- Frequency Multiplication, Frequency synthesizer and Skew reduction.
Block Diagram of Digital PLL.
Text Books:
1. Behzad Razavi, “Design of Analog CMOS Integrated Circuits”, McGraw-Hill, 2/e,
2002
References:
1. Phillip E. Allen, Douglas R. Holbery, CMOS Analog Circuit Design, Oxford, 2004.
2. Razavi B., Fundamentals of Microelectronics, Wiley student Edition2014.
3. Baker, Li, Boyce, CMOS: Circuits Design, Layout and Simulation, PHI, 2000
No. Topic Hrs.

1 CMOS Amplifiers
Review of MOS Characteristics, Second order effects( Subtreshold conduction,
1.1 1
DIBL,Velocity Saturation etc..)
1.3 Single Stage Amplifiers-Basic Concepts 1
CS with resistive, Diode Connected and Current Source Load, CS with source
1.4 3
Degeneration
1.5 Source Follower and common Gate Stage 2
1.6 Cascode Stage 1
2 Differential Amplifier
2.1 Single Ended and Differential Operation 1
2.2 Common Mode Response, Differential pair with MOS Load 2
2.3 Concept of Gilbert Cell and Introduction to Basic Current Mirror 1
2.4 Cascode current Mirrors and Basic Concepts of Active Current Mirrors 2
3 Frequency Response of Amplifiers
3.1 Miller Effect, Poles and Zeros 1
3.2 Calculation of poles and zeros of CS, CG and Source follower stage 2
3.3 Stability Analysis of CS, CG and Source Follower 2
3.4 Frequency Response of Differential Pair 1
4 Noise In Amplifiers
4.1 Noise analysis in CS, CG and Source Follower 4
4.2 Noise In differential Pair 2
4.3 Noise Bandwidth 1
5 Phase Locked Loops
5.1 Mathematical model of VCO, Phase Detector, Basic PLL Topology 1
5.2 Type I and Type II(Charge Pump) PLL, Stability Analysis of PLL 2
5.3 Non Ideal Effects in PLL 2
Application of PLL- Frequency Multiplication, Frequency synthesizer and Skew
5.4 2
reduction
5.5 Block Diagram of Digital PLL 1
Total Hours 35
Atleast one assignment should be simulation of the circuits. Simulations can be done in
QUCS, KiCad or PSPICE or LT Spice or CADENCE

EIGHTH SEMESTER B.TECH DEGREE EXAMINATION, (Model Question Paper)
Course Code: ECT466
Course Name: ANALOG CMOS DESIGN
PART A
1 Explain Body effect. How body Effect affect the Threshold voltage K1
2 Draw the small signal equivalent circuit of a common source stage with K2/CO1
diode connected load?
3 Calculate the Common mode Gain of a differential Pair. K2/CO2
4 Explain the working of Gilbert Cell as Analog voltage Multiplier K2/CO3
5 Explain how the addition of capacitor at output node of a single stage K2/CO4
amplifier affect the pole zero plot.
6 Draw the Thevinin Equivalent of a Differential Pair with active current K3/CO4
Mirror
7 Draw the circuit model for a resistor thermal noise and draw its spectral K3/CO5
density.
8 Explain Flicker Noise? K1/CO5
9 Explain the working of Phase Detectors? K1
10 Explain the Block diagram of Digital PLL? K1
PART – B
Module – I
11a. Derive the expression of a common source stage with diode connected load. 7
CO1/
K3
b. Calculate the voltage gain of the circuit 7
CO1/
K3
.
OR
12a. Derive the expression of Voltage gain of Common Gate Stage? 14
CO1/
K3
Module – II
13a. Explain the working of a basic differential pair 4
CO2/
K1
b. Derive the expression of the voltage gain of a differential pair with MOS 10
Load CO2/
K3
OR
14 Calculate the small signal voltage gain of the circuit shown below. 14
CO3/
K3
Module – III
4
15a. Explain Miller Effect
K1
b. Calculate the input and output impedance of common source stage 10
CO4/K3
OR
16 Derive the expression for voltage transfer function and input impedance of 14
common gate configuration. CO4/
K3
Module - IV
17a. Calculate the total input referred thermal noise voltage of the amplifier 14
shown below. CO5/K3
OR
18 Calculate the total output noise of the circuit shown below. 14
CO5/
K3
Module – V
19a. Explain Type 1 and charge pump PLL? 5
K1
b. Explain various non ideal effects in PLL? 9
K1
OR
10
20a. Describe various applications of PLL CO6/
K3
b. Describe the causes of stability degradation in charge pump PLL. 4/K2

ECT476 ROBOTICS
PEC 2 1 0 3
Preamble:The objective of this course is to introduce to the students the emerging field of
robotics by imparting the fundamental knowledge on the design and control of robots,
theirmulti-disciplinary engineering aspects and applications.
Prerequisite: Nil
Course Outcome: After the successful completion of the course, the student will be able to
CO1 Attain a thorough understanding of different types of Robots and their applications
CO2 Select appropriate sensors and actuators based on the robotic applications
CO3 Perform kinematic and dynamic analyses for robots.
CO4 Carry out the design and control of a simple robot.
CO5 Integrate mechanical and electrical hardware for making a robotic device

CO1 3 3
CO2 3 3
CO3 3 3
CO4 3 3 2
CO5 3 3 2
Assessment Pattern
Remember 10 10 20
Understand 30 30 60
Apply 10 10 20
Analyse
Evaluate
Create
Mark distribution
Total ESE
CIE ESE
Marks Duration
150 50 100 3 hours
Semester Examination Pattern: There will be two parts; Part A and Part B. Part A contain
should answer anyone. Each question can have a maximum of two sub-divisions and carry 14
marks.
Course Outcome 1 (CO1): Appreciate the classification of robots, fundamental systems and
their applications in various domains.
1. Write down the brief history and growth of robotics.

2. Describe the different basic components of a robotic system and their functions.
3. Explain the principle of degree of freedom or connectivity in terms of robotic joints.
Course Outcome 2(CO2): Compare and contrast the working principles and applications of
various sensors and actuators used in robotic systems.
1. With neat sketches elucidate the working of any one type of tactile sensor used for
contact and proximity assessment.
2. Describe the imaging, sensing and digitization processes in a basic robotic vision
system.
3. List and justify any two applications where pneumatic actuators are preferred over
hydraulic ones.
Course Outcome 3 (CO3): Apply the principles and techniques of kinematic and dynamic
modelling in robotics.
1. Describe the techniques and methods for the representation of position and orientation
of objects, their translation and rotation, as well as the coordinate transformation in
the workspace of a robot.
2. Explain the Denavit-Hartenberg (D-H) convention for selecting frames of
reference in robotics applications.
3. Apply the D-H convention to represent the different serial kinematic arrangements
fitted with various end effectors.
Course Outcome 4 (CO4): Perform basic programming for the control of robotic devices.
1. Explain the process of control of position and force of manipulators in robots.

2. Illustrate the working of a robotic device using the closed-loop control system
with a suitable example.
3. Describe the commonly used methods for robot programming.
Course Outcome 5 (CO5): Design robotic devices by integrating mechanical and electrical
hardware.
1. List out the various industrial Applications of Robots with examples.

2. Illustrate the significance of Artificial Intelligence (AI) in Robotics
3. Evaluate the role of robotics and automation in Industry 4.0.
SYLLABUS
MODULE I
Introduction to Robotics: Definition and Origin of Robotics. Robot Anatomy. Robot
Specifications. Robot Characteristics – Accuracy, Precision, and Repeatability. Classification
of Robots. Advantages and Disadvantages of Robots. Robot Structure - Types of Joints and
End Effectors, Mechanisms and Manipulators. Common Kinematic Arrangements. Degree of
Freedom. Robot Coordinates. Reference Frames.Robot Workspace.Areas of Application for
Robots.
MODULE II
Introduction to Sensors and Actuation Systems for Robots: Actuators: Types of Robotic
Drive Systems and Actuators: Hydraulic, Pneumatic and Electric drives. Transmission:
Gears, Timing Belts and Bearings. Parameters for selection of actuators. Specification. Areas
of Application for: Stepper Motor, Servo Motor and Brushless DC Motor. Microprocessor
Control of Motors. Speed Control using PWM and Direction Control using H- Bridge.
Sensors: Types and Applications of Sensors in Robotics: Position, Displacement and Velocity
Sensors. Tactile Sensors for Contact and Proximity Assessment. Strain Gauge based Force
and Torque Sensors. Tachometers, etc. Robotic Vision Systems- Introduction to Cameras,
Imaging, Sensing and Digitization. Vision Applications in Robotics.
MODULE III
Introduction to Robot Kinematics and Dynamics: Introduction to Kinematics: Position
and Orientation of Objects. Rotation. Euler Angles. Rigid Motion Representation using
Homogenous Transformation Matrix. Kinematic Modelling: Translation and Rotation
Representation, Coordinate Transformation, Forward and Inverse Kinematics. Forward
Kinematics-Link Coordinates, Denavit-Hartenberg Representation, Application of DH
Convention to Different Serial Kinematic Arrangements. Inverse Kinematics – General
Properties of Solutions, Kinematic Decoupling, Velocity Kinematics – Derivation of the
Jacobian, Application of Velocity Kinematics for Serial Manipulators, Importance of
Singularities. Introduction to Dynamic Modelling:Forward and Inverse Dynamics- Equations
of Motion using Euler-Lagrange formulation, Newton Euler Formulation.
MODULE IV
Introduction to Robot Control: Basics of Control: Open Loop- Closed Loop, Transfer
Functions, Control Laws: P, PD, PID, Linear and Non-linear Controls; Control Hardware and
Interfacing; Embedded Systems: Microcontroller Architecture and Integration with Sensors,
Actuators, Components.Introduction to Robot Programming – Programming Methods, Robot
Language Classification, Robot Language Structure, Elements and its Functions. Motion,
End-Effecter and Sensor Commands in VAL Programming Language. Simple Programs.
MODULE V
Recent Developments in Robotics. Mobile Robots: Mobile Robot Kinematics, Navigation.
Humanoid Robotics: Biped Locomotion, Imitation Learning. Collaborative Robots:
Collaborative Robot, Collaborative Operation, Applications. Artificial Intelligence in
Robotics: Applications in Unmanned Systems, Defense, Medical, Industries, etc. Industrial
Applications of Robots in Material Handling and Assembly. Robotics and Automation for
Industry 4.0., Robot Safety. Social Robotics.
Text Books:
1. S.K. Saha, Introduction to Robotics, Tata McGraw Hill, 2nd Edition, 2014
2. Saeed B. Niku, Introduction to Robotics: Analysis, Systems, Applications, John
Wiley & Sons, 2nd Edition, 2011.
3. Spong and Vidyasagar, Robot Dynamics and Control, John Wiley & Sons, 1990.
4. Mikell P. Groover, et al., Industrial Robotics – Technology, Programming and
Applications, McGraw Hill, 2nd Edition, 2012
Reference Books:
1. John. J.Craig, Introduction to Robotics: Mechanics and Control, PHI, 2005.

2. Ashitava Ghosal, Robotics, Fundamental concepts and analysis, OXFORD University
Press, 2006
3. Fu, K.S,Gonzalez,R.C,Lee, C.S.G.,Robotics, Control, Sensing, Vision and
Intelligence, McGraw-Hill, 1987.
4. Asada, H., and J. J. Slotine. Robot Analysis and Control. New York, NY: Wiley, 1986.
5. Robert J. Schilling, Fundamentals of Robotics: Analysis & Control, Pearson
Education, 2000
6. Klafter, R.D., Chmielewski, T.A, Negin, M, Robotic Engineering An Integrated
Approach, PHI, 2007
7. S. R. Deb, Robotics Technology and Flexible Automation, Tata McGraw Hill, New
Delhi, 1994.
Course PlanCourse Contents and Lecture Schedule
No Topic No. of
Lectures
1 Module 1: Introduction to Robotics
Definition and Origin of Robotics:
What is the basic definition of a robot? How the field of robotics
1.1 1
originated? What are the basic components of a robot? How to specify a
robot?
Characteristics, Classification, Advantages and Disadvantages of Robots:
1.2 1
What are the different characteristic parameters of robots? How robots are
classified? What are the advantages of using robots in various
applications?Are there any disadvantages to employing robots?
Robot Structure, and Common Kinematic Arrangements:
What are the different structural arrangements for robots? What are the
1.3 different types of joints, end effectors, mechanisms and manipulators 1
commonly used in robotics? How to express the structure of robots in
terms of common kinematic arrangements?
Concepts of Degree of Freedom (DOF), Coordinates, Reference Frames,
Workspace in Robotics:
1.4 How to define the degree of freedom of any robot? What are the 1
commonly used coordinate systems for robots? How the concept of
reference frames help in a robot design? How to determine the workspace
of a robot?
Areas of Application for Robots: 1
1.5 What are different fields/areas where robots find applications? How the
size, structure, sensors, DOF and end effector change with applications?
Areas of Application for Robots:

1.6 Suggest some new or futuristic fields/areas where robots may find 1
applications?
2 Module 2: Introduction to Robotic Sensors and Actuators
Robotic Drive Systems and Actuators:
2.1 What are the different types of drive systems used in robotics? Describe 1
the different transmission systems used in robots and their specific
applications.
Types and Applications of Actuators in Robotics:
What are the different deciding parameters for selecting appropriate
2.2 actuators for robots? How areactuators specified? What are the specific 1
applications for stepper motors, servo motors and brushless DC motors in
robotics?
Types and Applications of Sensors in Robotics:
What are the different position, displacement and velocity sensors used in
2.3 robots? How do the tactical sensors used in robotic devices sense contact 1
and proximity of objects? What are the commonly used force and torque
sensors in robots? How do tachometers help in robotic operation and
application?
Control of Motors in Robotics:
2.4 How to perform microprocessor-based control in electricmotors? 1

How speed control is carried out using pulse-width modulation?
Describe direction control using H-Bridge.
Robotic Vision Systems:
2.5 1
What is the role of cameras in robots? Describe how imaging, sensing and
digitization processes are performed in robotic applications.
What are the vision applications ofrobots?
Control of Robotics:
2.6 Conduct exercises to develop small control programs for joints/links/end 1
effectors of robots.
3 Module 3: Introduction to Robot Kinematics and Dynamics
Introduction to Kinematics:
How to specify the position and orientation of links and joints in robotics?
3.1 What are the common methods for describing robot orientations? Describe 1
how rigid motion representation can be made using a homogenous
transformation matrix.
Kinematic Modelling:
How to determine the position and orientation of an end effector of a robot
3.2 under translation and/or rotation? What is the coordinate transformation 1
method? How transformations can be performed between
the coordinate frames attached to different robotic links and joints. What
arethe purposes for forward and inverse kinematics in robotics?
First Series Examination
Forward Kinematics:
3.3 How to compute the position of the end effector from joint parameters? 1
What is Denavit-Hartenberg representation? How the D-H convention can
be applied to different serial kinematic arrangements.
Inverse Kinematics:
3.4 How to predict the joint angles from the known coordinates of the end 1
effector of a robot? How kinematic decoupling is performed
in robotic manipulators?
Velocity Kinematics:
How can the linear and angular velocities of the end effector get related to
3.5 the joint velocities to form the velocity relationship? How can velocity 1
kinematics be applied to serial robots?What are the different singularities
that affect the degree of freedom of robots?
Introduction to Dynamic Modelling:
What are the functions of forward and inverse dynamicsin robotics? How
3.6 can we develop the equations of motion using the Euler-Lagrange 2
formulation? What is the role of Newton-Euler formulation in the dynamic
modelling of robots?
4 Module 4: Introduction to Robot Control
Basics of Control:
4.1 Describe the basic control parameters and systems used in robotics? How 2
P, PD, PID, Linear and Non-linear Controls are employed in robotic
practices?
4.2 Control Hardware and Interfacing: 2
What are the advantages of using the embedded system in robotics? How
microcontrollers can integrate sensors, actuators and components within a
robotic system?
Introduction to Robot Programming:
4.3 What is robot programming? What are different programming methods for 2
robots? How the robot languages are classified? Describe the structure,
elements, and functions of robot language.
4.4 What is the role of variable assembly language (VAL) programming in 1

robotics? What are the common commands used for motion, end effector
and sensors?
4.5 Using simple programs, conduct exercises to develop the robot 2
programming skills of students.
5 Module 5: Recent Developments in Robotics.
Mobile Robots:
5.1 What are mobile robots? How the kinematics change with mobile robots? 1
Describe the navigation of mobile robots.
Humanoid Robotics:
How to humanoid robots are different from other types? What is biped
5.2 locomotion? What are the challenges involved in the static and dynamic 1
balance of biped robots?What is the application of imitation learning in
humanoid robots?
Collaborative Robots:
5.3 What are collaborative robots? How can collaborative operation put it into 1
practice for robots? What are the different applications of collaborative
robots?
Artificial Intelligence (AI) in Robotics:.
What are the different applications of AI in robotics? How AI helps in the
5.4 development of unmanned robotic systems What are the different 2
applications of AI-based robots in the defense, medical, industrial and
other domains?
Industrial Applications of Robots:
5.5 What are the applications of robots in different industries? How robots 1
have a greater role today in material handling and assembly? What is the
contribution of robotics towards Industry 4.0.
Robot Ethics, Robot Safety and Social Robotics
What the ethical practices necessary for the design, production and
5.6 application of robots today? What are the aspects of occupational safety 1
and health of humans when robots are used in the workplace? What are
social robots? How are social robots suppose to help humans?
Second Series Examination

COURSE: ECT476 ROBOTICS
PART A
1 List out the different criteria based on which robots are classified. 3
2 What are the basic components of a robot? 3
3 Determine the advantages of using electric drive systems in robots. 3
4 Identify the sensors used in robots for sensing position and velocity. 3
5 Recognize the need for Denavit-Hartenberg convention in robotics. 3
6 Describe joint angle, joint distance, link length and link twist. 3
7 How is the speed of an electric motor controlled using a microprocessor? 3
8 Distinguish between linear and rotary hydraulic actuation mechanisms. 3
9 Find any four non-industrial applications of robots 3
10 Substantiate the need for robot ethics. 3
PART B
Module I
11(A) Describe the commonly used types of joints and end effectors in robots. 8
11(B) Explain the basic structure of anyrobotic system. How each component is 6
different from the others in terms of its functionality?
OR
12(A) Discuss the common kinematic arrangements in robots and find out the 8
degree of freedom for each.
12(B) Write notes on terms like accuracy, precision, and repeatability in 6
connection with a robotic system.
Module II
13(A) Compare among hydraulic, pneumatic and electric types of robotic drives 8
and mention the specific area of application for each.
13(B) Describe how direction control is carried out on electric motors in robots 6
using H- Bridge.
OR
14(A) Discuss the different characteristics of tactile sensors. Describe with the 8
help of a neat diagram the working of commonly used tactile sensors
14(B) Elaborate on the imaging, sensing and digitization processes in robotic 6
vision systems.
Module III
15(A) A frame 'B' was rotated about the x-axis 90ο, then, it was translated about 8
the current a-axis 3 inches before it was rotated about z-axis 90ο. Finally,
it was translated about the current a-axis 5 inches.
a) Write an equation that describes the motion.
b) Find the final location of a point P (1, 5, 4)T attached to the frame
relative to the reference frame.
15(B) Distinguish between rotation matrix and homogenous transformation 6
matrix.
OR
16(A) Find the Denavit-Hartenberg representation parameters of a spherical arm 8
shown in the figure below:
16(B) Describe the common kinematic arrangements of robots based on 6

Cartesian-coordinate and Cylindrical-coordinate systems
Module IV
17(A) Discuss the different control schemes of robots 8

17(B) Describe the basic structure of any robot programming language. 6
OR
18(A) Elaborate the processes involved in robot actuation and the control 8
methods used with block diagrams
18(B) Differentiate between textual and lead through programming methods 6
Module V
19(A) What are mobile robots: Describe how kinematics involved in mobile 8
robots are different from others.
19(B) Enumerate the challenges involved in biped motion of humanoid robots. 6
OR
20(A) Discuss the significant roles played by robotics in different areas for 8
realizing Industry 4.0.
20(B) Examine the involvement of artificial intelligence in Robotics 6
SEMESTER VIII
PROGRAM ELECTIVE V
ECT418 MECHATRONICS
PEC 2 1 0 3
Preamble: This course introduces students to the rapidly emerging, multi-disciplinary, and
exciting field of Mechatronics.
Prerequisite: Nil
Understand the working principles of various sensors and actuators in Mechatronics

CO1
systems and be able to choose the suitable one for the real world application
CO2 Formulate and simulate models of mechatronics systems
CO3 Explain the implementation of PLC in mechatronics applications
CO4 Explain the standard fabrication techniques and principle of operation of MEMS devices
Design and Analysis of commonly encountered mechatronics systems for real time
CO5 applications
CO1 3 3
CO2 3 3
CO3 3 3 2
CO4 3 3
CO5 3 3
Assessment Pattern
Remember 10 10 20
Understand 30 30 60
Apply 10 10 20
Analyse
Evaluate
Create
Mark distribution
Total ESE
CIE ESE
Marks Duration
150 50 100 3 hours

: 10 marks
: 25 marks
: 15 marks
Course Outcome 1 (CO1):Understand the working principles of various sensors and actuators in
Mechatronics systems and be able to choose the suitable one for the real world application
1. Illustrate the working of a strain gauged load cell

2. Explain the working of any one non-contact temperature measurement system
3. Explain the principle of operation and suggest two applications of Hall effect sensor in
mechatronic systems.
4. With neat sketches explain the working of a double acting hydraulic actuator.
5. Design a hydraulic circuit to operate a winch fitted with a hydraulic motor. The
motor should be run clockwise, counter clockwise and stopped. Use a manually
operated valve.
6. Explain any two situations when pneumatic actuators are preferred over
hydraulic ones.
Course Outcome 2 (CO2): Formulate models of mechatronics systems
1. Derive the mathematical model of a general electrical system and draw its analogy with a
mechanical system.
2. Explain the working of a mechanical device using closed loop control system
with the help of a suitable example.
Course Outcome 3 (CO3): Explain the implementation of PLC in mechatronics applications
1. Explain ‘latching’ in PLC logic with an example.

2. Illustrate the significance of Internal Relays in PLC program
3. Consider a pneumatic system with single-solenoid controlled valves and
involving two cylinders A and B, with limit switches a–, a+, b–, b+ detecting
the limits of the piston rod movements. Design a ladder programme with the
requirement being when the start switch is triggered, the sequence A+, B+, A–,
10s time delay, B– occurs and stop at that point until the start switch is triggered
again.
Course Outcome 4(CO4): Explain the standard fabrication techniques and principle of operation
of MEMS devices
1. Explain the steps involved in photolithography. State the chemicals used in each
of the stages along with the operating conditions.
2. Explain the criteria for choice of surface or bulk micromachining techniques in the design
of micro systems.
3. Explain with block diagram the steps in LIGA process. State two advantages of LIGA
process over other micro machining techniques.
Course Outcome 5 (CO5): Design and Analysis of commonly encountered mechatronics systems
for real time applications
1. With the help of a neat sketch explain the different mechatronics modules used
in automatic car park barrier system
2. Explain with a neat sketch the mechatronic implementation of a household weighing
machine
3. With a neat sketch, explain the physical system and working of a pick and place
robot.
SYLLABUS
MODULE I
Introduction to Mechatronics: Structure of Mechatronics system. Comparison between traditional

and mechatronics approach. Sensors - Characteristics -Temperature, flow, pressure sensors.
Displacement, position and proximity sensing by magnetic, optical, ultrasonic, inductive,
capacitive and eddy current methods. Encoders: incremental and absolute. Resolvers and
synchros. Piezoelectric sensors. Acoustic Emission sensors. vibration sensors.Force and tactile
sensors. Range finders: ultrasonic and light based range finders
MODULE II
Actuators: Hydraulic and Pneumatic actuators - Directional control valves,

pressure control valves, process control valves. Rotary actuators.
Development of simple hydraulic and pneumatic circuits using standard
Symbols. Electrical drives: DC, AC, brushless, servo and stepper motors. Harmonic
drive.Magnetostrictive actuators and piezoelectric actuators.
MODULE III
System modeling - Mathematical models and basic building blocks of general mechanical,
electrical, fluid and thermal systems. Typical elements of open and closed loop control systems.
Adaptive controllers for machine tools.
Programmable Logic Controllers (PLC) –Basic structure, input/ output processing. Programming:
Timers, Internal Relays, Counters and Shift registers. Development of simple ladder programs for
specific purposes.
MODULE IV
Micro Electro Mechanical Systems (MEMS): Fabrication: Deposition, Lithography,

Micromachining methods for MEMS -Surface and Bulk, Deep Reactive Ion Etching (DRIE) and
LIGA processes. Principle, fabrication and working of MEMS based pressure sensor,
accelerometer and gyroscope.
MODULE V
Mechatronics in Robotics- choice of Sensors and Actuators. Robotic vision system - Image
acquisition: Vidicon, charge coupled device (CCD) and charge injection device (CID) cameras.
Image processing techniques: histogram processing: sliding, stretching, equalization and
thresholding.
Case studies of Mechatronics systems: Automatic camera, bar code reader, simple weighing
machine, pick and place robot, automatic car park barrier system, automobileengine management
system.
Text Books:
1. Bolton W., Mechatronics: Electronic Control Systems in Mechanical and Electrical

Engineering, Person Education Limited, New Delhi, 2007
2. Ramachandran K. P., G. K. Vijayaraghavan, M. S. Balasundaram, Mechatronics:

IntegratedMechanical Electronic Systems, Wiley India Pvt. Ltd., New Delhi, 2008.
3. Saeed B. Niku, Introduction to Robotics: Analysis, Systems, Applications, Person

Education ,Inc., New Delhi, 2006.
4. Devdas Shetty, Richard A. Kolk, “Mechatronics System Design”, Thomson Learning

Publishing Company, Vikas publishing house, Second edition, 2001.
Reference Books:
1. David G. Aldatore, Michael B. Histand, Introduction to Mechatronics and Measurement

Systems, McGraw-Hill Inc., USA, 2003.
2. Gordon M. Mair, Industrial Robotics, Prentice Hall International, UK, 1998.
3. HMT, Mechatronics, Tata McGraw-Hill Publishing Company Ltd., New Delhi, 2004.
4. Vijay K. Varadan, K. J. Vinoy, S. Gopalakrishnan, Smart Material Systems and MEMS:

Design and Development Methodologies, John Wiley & Sons Ltd., England, 2006.
5. Bishop, Robert H. The Mechatronics Handbook-2 Volume Set. CRC press, 2002.
No Topic No. of
Lectures
Introduction to Mechatronics: Structure of Mechatronics system. 1
Comparison between traditional and mechatronics approach
Sensors - Characteristics -Temperature, flow, pressure sensors. 1
Displacement, position and proximity sensing by magnetic, 1
1 optical, ultrasonic, inductive, capacitive and eddy current methods
Encoders: incremental and absolute. Resolvers and synchros. 1
Piezoelectric sensors. Acoustic Emission sensors. vibration 1
sensors, Force and tactile sensors
Range finders: ultrasonic and light based range finders 1
Actuators: Hydraulic and Pneumatic actuators - Directional control 1

valves
pressure control valves, process control valves, 1
Rotary actuators. 1
2 Development of simple hydraulic and pneumatic circuits using 1
standard Symbols.
Electrical drives: DC, AC, and 1
brushless, servo 1
stepper motors. Harmonic drive. 1
System modeling - Mathematical models and basic building 2

blocks of general mechanical, electrical, fluid and thermal
systems.
Typical elements of open and closed loop control systems, 1
Adaptive controllers for machine tools
3
Programmable Logic Controllers (PLC) –Basic structure, input/ 1
output processing.
Programming: Timers, Internal Relays, Counters and Shift 2
registers.
Development of simple ladder programs for specific purposes 1
Micro Electro Mechanical Systems (MEMS): Fabrication: 1

Deposition, Lithography
Micromachining methods for MEMS -Surface and Bulk, 2
4
Deep Reactive Ion Etching (DRIE) and LIGA processes. 1
Principle, fabrication and working of MEMS based pressure 3
sensor, accelerometer and gyroscope
Mechatronics in Robotics- choice of Sensors and Actuators. 1

5 Robotic vision system - Image acquisition: Vidicon, charge 2
coupled device (CCD) and charge injection device (CID) cameras.
Image processing techniques: histogram processing: sliding, 2

stretching, equalization and thresholding.
Case studies of Mechatronics systems: Automatic camera, bar 2
code reader, simple weighing machine, picks and place robot,
Automatic car park barrier system, automobile engine 1
management system.

COURSE: ECT418 MECHATRONICS
PART A
1 Differentiate between absolute and incremental encoders 3

2 List six examples of temperature sensors 3
3 Explain how cushioning is achieved in pneumatic actuators with a sketch. 3
4 Mention any two differences between finite position and infinite position 3
valves
5 List any 2 controlling factors in wet etching. 3
6 Sketch and label a MEMS based pressure sensor 3
7 What is latching? Draw a simple latched circuit 3
8 Write down the describing equations of basic mechanical building blocks 3
9 Illustrate the histogram processing technique for enhancing the image 3
contrast
10 Bring out any 3 difference between CCD and CID camera. 3
PART B
Module I
11(A) Explain the working of an optical absolute encoder. How the number of 6
tracks and sectors of absolute encoder is related to the resolution of the
encoder?
11(B) Explain the structure of a mechatronics system. How is it different form 8
the traditional approach?
OR
12(A) Explain the sensor characteristics to be considered when choosing a 8
sensor for a mechatronics application
12(B) Compare the working of resolver and synchro 6
Module II
13(A) Develop a pneumatic circuit with standard symbols, to operate two 8

cylinders in sequence. Explain its working.
13(B) Explain the constructional features and working of brushless DC motor 6
OR
14(A) Illustrate the working of Harmonic Drives with neat sketches 8

14(B) Design a hydraulic circuit to operate a winch fitted with a hydraulic 6
motor. The motor should be run clockwise, counter clockwise and
stopped. Use a manually operated valve.
Module III
15(A) Draw and explain the block diagram of a feedback control system. 4
15(B) Develop a PLC ladder program for the following sequence: Start a motor 10
with push switch, and then after a delay of 90s, start a pump. When the
motor is switched off, the pump will get switched off after a delay of 5s.
Mention the logic used for each rung in the program to substantiate your
answer.
OR
16(A) Explain how a PLC can be used to handle analog inputs? 4

16(B) Explain the model a fluid flow system with basic building blocks, clearly 10
mention all assumptions
Module IV
17(A) Explain the steps involved in photolithography. State the chemicals used 6
in each of the stages along with the operating conditions
17(B) Compare and contrast various micro manufacturing techniques 8
OR
18(A) Describe the various mechanical problems associated with surface 6

micromachining
18(B) Explain the LIGA process associated with MEMS fabrication 8
Module V
19(A) With the help of a neat sketch explain the different mechatronics modules 10
used in automatic car park barrier system
19(B) List any fourapplications of robotic vision systems 4
OR
20(A) Explain the working of Barcode reader with reference to the coding 10
schemes. Mention the steps to process the digits in a barcode for a
particular product. Develop the steps in a program for reading the barcode.
20(B) List the steps in thresholding technique in image processing 4

ECT428 OPTIMIZATION TECHNIQUES
PEC 2 1 0 3
Preamble: This course aims to provide a broad picture of various applications of

optimization methods used in engineering.
Prerequisite: NIL
CO 1
Formulate and classify different optimisation problems.
K4
CO 2 Apply classical and numerical methods solving linear and non-linear optimisation
K3 problems.
CO 3
Apply modern methods of optimisation for solving optimisation problems.
K3
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
CO 3 3 2
1
CO 3 3 2
2
CO 3 3 2
3
Assessment Pattern

Tests
1 2
Apply K3 20 20 70
Analyse
Evaluate
Create
Mark distribution
Total ESE
CIE ESE
Marks Duration
150 50 100 3 hours
14 marks.
Course Outcome 1 (CO1): Formulate optimisation problems. (K3)
1. Understand the different classification of optimization problems

2. Apply basic concepts of mathematics to formulate an optimization problem.
3. Formulation of real world problems as linear programming problems.
Course Outcome 2 (CO2) :Obtain optimised solution using classical methods for
constrained and unconstrained problems. (K3)
1. Identify extreme points of a given function and classify as minimum, maximum or saddle
point.
2. Formulate Lagragian equation for constrained problems and solution using KKT
conditions.
3. Find optimum solution using Simplex method for the given problem.
Course Outcome 2 (CO2): Obtain optimised solution using numerical methods for non-
linear problems. (K3)
1. Apply elimination search and direct root methods for finding the optimal solution
2. Find optimal point of a given function using gradient methods.
Course Outcome 3 (CO3): (K3)
1. Explain different steps in the genetic algorithm.

2. Evaluate the strategies to be adopted for players using game theory.

3. Using algorithms find minimum spanning tree and shortest distance for given network
path.
4. Two identical sections of the given networks are connected in parallel. Obtain the two port
network parameters of the combination.
SYLLABUS
Module 1 : Introduction to classical method

Engineering applications of optimization, Formulation of design problems as mathematical
programming problems.
Classification of optimization problems/techniques.
Classical optimization: unconstrained single and multivariable optimisation, Constrained
optimization. Linear, Convex and non-convex optimization problems. KKT conditions.
Module 2 : Linear programming problems

Mathematical formulation of LP Problems, Solving using Simplex method and Graphical
method
Module 3 :Game Theory, Network path models

Game Theory: Introduction, 2- person zero – sum game -Saddle point; Mini-Max and Maxi-
Min Theorems (statement only)- Graphical solution (2x n, m x 2 game), dominance property.
Introduction to network tree - Minimal Spanning Tree - Prim’s Algorithm.
Shortest path problems- solution methods – Dijkstra’s Method.
Module 4 : Nonlinear unconstrained optimization

Single variable optimization methods- Fibonacci search method, Newton Raphson method
Multi-variable methods- Hook-Jeeves pattern search method, Cauchy’s (steepest descent)
method
Module 5 : Modern methods of optimization

Introduction to Genetic algorithm, Basic GA framework
GA operators: Encoding, Crossover, Selection, Mutation
Introduction to Fuzzy logic. Fuzzy sets and membership functions. Operations on Fuzzy sets.
Optimization of Fuzzy Systems.
Text Books
1. S.S.Rao, Engineering Optimization.; Theory and Practice; Revised 3rd Edition, New Age
International Publishers, New Delhi
2.H.A. Taha, “ Operations Research”, 5/e, Macmillan Publishing Company, 1992.
Kanti Swarup, P.K.Gupta and Man Mohan, Operations Research, Sultan Chand and Sons
Reference Books
1. Kalynamoy Deb. “Optimization for Engineering Design‐ Algorithms and Examples”,

Prentice‐Hall of India Pvt. Ltd., New Delhi.
2. A. Ravindran, D. T. Phillips, J. J. Solberg, Operations Research – Principles and
Practice, John Wiley and Sons.
3. Ashok D Belegundu, Tirupathi R Chandrupatla, “Optimization concepts and Application
in Engineering”, Pearson Education.
4. Hadley, G. “Linear programming”, Narosa Publishing House, New Delhi
5. J. S. Arora, Introduction to Optimum Design, McGraw-Hill Book Company.

No. of
No Topic
Lectures
1 Introduction:
1.1 Engineering applications of optimization, Formulation of design problems 1
as mathematical programming problems, objective function, constraints
1.2 Classification of optimization problems/techniques. Linear, convex, and 2
non-convex.
1.3 Unconstrained optimization: Unconstrained one dimensional necessary 2
and sufficient conditions for optimality
1.4 Algorithms for one-dimensional unconstrained optimization problem – 2
Fibonnacci, golden section
7
2 Algorithms and Constrained Optimization
2.1 Unconstrained multi-dimensional necessary and sufficient conditions for 2
optimality
2.2 Algorithms for multi-dimensional unconstrained optimization problems – 2
Steepest Descent, Newton’s methods
2.3 Constrained optimization: Lagrangian method - First order Necessary 3
KKT Conditions, Second order sufficient conditions, Duality (Concept)
7
3 Linear programming problems
3.1 Mathematical formulation of LP Problems 1
3.2 Slack, surplus and artificial variables, Reduction of a LPP to the standard 1
form, feasible solutions.
3.3 Graphical solution method 2
3.4 simplex algorithm and solution using tabular method, 1
3.5 optimality conditions and degeneracy 1
3.6 Duality in linear programming 1
7
4 Nonlinear unconstrained optimization

4.1 Single variable optimization methods- Fibonacci search method, 2
4.2 Newton Raphson method 2
4.3 Multi-variable methods- Hook-Jeeves pattern search method, 3
7
5 Modern methods of optimization
5.1 Introduction to Genetic algorithm, Basic GA framework 1
5.2 GA operators: Encoding, Crossover, Selection, Mutation 2
5.3 Introduction to Fuzzy logic. 1
5.4 Fuzzy sets and membership functions. 1
5.5 Operations on Fuzzy sets. 1
5.6 Optimization of Fuzzy Systems 1
7
Atleast one assignment should be simulation of optimization Problems using MATLAB/

Scilab/ Python. The following simulations .
1. Find the solution of the linear programming problem using simplex method.
Refer MATLAB Solution of LP Problems SS Rao.
2.
Ashok D. Belegundu, Tirupathi R. Chandrupatla
3.
Ashok D. Belegundu, Tirupathi R. Chandrupatla


Course Code: ECT428
Course Name: OPTIMIZATION TECHNIQUES
PART A
1 What are the necessary and sufficient conditions for the relative minimum of a K2
function of a single variable?
2 Find the extreme points of the function K3
3 Give five typical applications of optimization techniques in engineering discipline. K1
4 What is the significance of gradient function in minimization problem? K2
5 State the duality principle and write the dual of the following LPP. K3
6 Write a short note on Dijkstra’s shortest path algorithm K1
7 Explain the transformations needed to represent an LPP in standard form K1
8 State dominance property in game theory K1
9 Discuss membership function in fuzzy logic K2
10 Name and describe the main five features of Genetic Algorithm K2
PART – B
Module - I
11 7
a.
K3
b. 7
K3
OR
12 7
a. K3
b. 7
K3
Module - II
13 14
a.
K3
OR
14 14
K3
Module - III
15 7
a.
K3
b. 7
K3
OR
16 7
a.
K3
b.
K3
Module - IV
17 14
CO3
K3
OR
18 Using Fibonacci method, minimise in the interval (0,5) in six steps. 14

K3
Module - V
19 . 14
K3
OR
20 7
K3
b. Explain the working principles of Genetic Algorithms.

7,K2
CATEGORY L T P ENGINEERING
CREDIT
ECT438 COMPUTER VISION
PEC 2 1 0 3
Preamble: This course aims to develop the knowledge of various methods, algorithms and
applications of Computer Vision,
Prerequisite:Digital Image Processing
Course objectives:
• To review image processing techniques for computer vision
• To understand shape and region analysis
• To understand three-dimensional image analysis techniques and motion analysis
• To study some applications of computer vision algorithms
• To introduce methods and concepts which will enable the student to implement computer
vision systems with emphasis on applications and problem solving
CO1 Understand digital filtering operations for CV applications.
Apply basic morphological and boundary operators for Computer vision

CO 2 applications
CO3 Apply edge, corner detection algorithms to locate objects in an image.
CO 4 Apply optical flow algorithms to detect moving objects in a video.
Analyse a given scene using appropriate computer vision algorithms to

CO5 detect/recognize objects and to implement it in real time practical applications.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
CO 1 3 3 2 2 2 3
CO 2 3 3 2 2 2 3
CO 3 3 3 3 2 2 3
CO 4 3 3 3 2 2 3
CO 5 3 3 3 2 2 3
Assessment Pattern

Tests
1 2
UnderstandK2 10 10 20
Apply K3 20 20 70
Analyse K4 10 10
Evaluate
Create
Mark distribution
Total ESE
CIE ESE
Marks Duration
150 50 100 3 hours
Assignment/Quiz/Course project) : 15 marks
14 marks.
Course Outcome 1 (CO1): Apply digital filtering operations for Computer vision
applications
1. Why histogram transformations are applied in a grey scale image and what output
is observed in that case.
2. Find filtered image using LP/HP/Smoothing/Median filter.
3. Describe the working principle of Homomorphic filter.
4. Role of thresholding in CV applications
Course Outcome 2 (CO2): Apply basic morphological and boundary operators for
Computer vision applications
1. Apply various algorithms for morphological operations and binary shape analysis
2. List different morphological operators and describe about each one in detail.
3. To describe connected component labelling and to apply it in a given image pixel
set.
4. Find 8-point connectivity and Chain code of a given image pixel diagram.
Course Outcome 3 (CO3):Apply edge, corner detection algorithms to locate objects in an

image.
1. What is the role of edge detection and corner detection in Computer Vision
applications?
2. Describe Canny’s edge detection algorithm.
3. Mention the steps in Harris corner detection algorithm and explain how it is employed
to detect corners in an image.
4. State with necessary mathematical steps, how Hough transform is employed for
detecting lines and curves in detecting an image.
Course Outcome 4 (CO4):Apply optical flow algorithms to detect moving objects in a

video.
1. To identify shapes from –X in Computer Vision applications?

2. Derive brightness constancy equation
3. Derive Horn-Shunk algorithm.
4. Illustrate the steps in Lucas-Kannade algorithm to detect optical flow.
5. To identify a structure from a moving object.
Course Outcome 5 (CO5): Analyse a given scene using appropriate computer vision
algorithms to detect/recognize objects and to implement it in real time practical applications
1. Find Eigen values and Eigen Vectors of agiven square matrix

9 4 0
A = �4 3 0�
0 0 0
2. To apply PCA for face recognition and face detection.
3. To apply SVM, LDA, Bayes rule andML methods
4. Analyse a given video to track a moving object in it.
5. To detect a particular object from the background.
6. To detect signboards/ pedestrian crossings/pedestrians from a moving vehicle.
7. To classify/segment a particular set of image using CV algorithms.
8. Analyse a given image/video using Machine learning/Deep learning algorithms.
9. Use trained networks to analyse a video using ML algorithms.
10. To use Deep neural networks/CNN/YOLOvx, to analyse images/videos
SYLLABUS
Module 1
Review of image processing techniques: Digital filters, linear filters-Homomorphic filtering,
Point operators- Histogram, neighbourhood operators, thresholding
Module 2
Mathematical morphology, Binary shape analysis, Binary shape analysis, Erosion, Dilation,
Opening and Closing, Hit-or-Miss Transform ,connectedness, object labelling and counting,
Boundary descriptors – Chain codes. Properties of Binary Regions, Geometric Features,
Statistical Shape Properties.
Module 3
Feature Detection and Image Synthesis,Edge detection – edges, lines, active contours,
Split and merge, Mean shift and mode finding, Normalized cuts, Graph cuts, energy-
based methods- Cranny’s Algorithm, Corner detection, Harris corner detection
algorithm. Hough transform-Line and curve detection.
Module 4
Shape from X - Shape from shading, Photometric stereo, Texture Occluding contour
detection. Motion Analysis- Regularization theory,Optical Flow: brightness constancy
equation, aperture problem, Horn-Shunck method, Lucas-Kanade method. Structure from
motion
Module 5
Object recognition-Shape correspondence and shape matching PCA,SVM, LDA, Bayes rule
andML methods. Eigen faces,Face detection, Face recognition, Application: Scene analysis
Examples of real time applications: In-vehicle vision system.
Text Books
1. E. R .Davies, Computer and Machine Vision -Theory Algorithm and Practicalities,
Academic Press, 2012
2. Richard Szeliski, Computer Vision: Algorithms and Applications, ISBN 978-1-
84882-935-0, Springer 2011.
3. David Forsyth and Jean Ponce, Computer Vision: A Modern Approach, Pearson India,
2002.
Reference Books
1. Goodfellow, Bengio, and Courville, Deep Learning, MIT Press, 2006.
2. Daniel Lelis Baggio, KhvedcheniaIevgen, Shervin Emam, David Millan Escriva,
NaureenMahmoo, Jason Saragi, Roy Shilkrot, Mastering OpenCV with Practical
Computer Vision Projects, Packt Publishing Limited, 2012
3. Simon J D Prince, Computer Vision: Models, Learning, and Inference, Cambridge
University Press, 2012.
4. R. J. Schalkoff, Digital Image Processing and Computer Vision, John Wiley, 2004.
5. D. L. Baggio et al., ―Mastering OpenCV with Practical Computer Vision Projects,
Packt Publishing, 2012. ELECTRONICS & COMMUNICATION ENGINEERING
6. Jan Erik Solem, ―Programming Computer Vision with Python: Tools and algorithms
for analyzing images‖, O'Reilly Media, 2012.
No. of
No. Topic
Lectures
1 Introduction
1.1 Review of image processing techniques 1
1.2 Digital filters, Linear filtering-Homomorphic filtering 2
1.3 Point operators- Histogram, neighbourhood operators, Thesholding 2
2 Binary operations
Erosion, Dilation, Opening and Closing, Hit-or-Miss Transform,
2.1 2
structuring element
Binary shape analysis, Connected components- Connected
2.2 2
component labelling,Boundary descriptors – Chain codes.
Properties of Binary Regions , Geometric Features ,Statistical Shape
2.3 2
Properties
3 Feature Detection:
Edge detection – edges, lines, active contours, Split and
merge,Mean shift and mode finding, Normalized cuts, Graph
3.1 cuts, energy-based method- Canny’s edge detection 2
Algorithm
3.2 Corner detection, Harris corner detection algorithm, 1

3.3 Hough transform Algorithm for Line and curve detection. 2
4 Motion Analysis
4.1 Shape from X - Shape from shading, Photometric stereo, Texture 2
Motion Analysis- Regularization theory, Optical Flow: brightness 3
4.2
constancy equation, aperture problem,
Horn-Shunck Algorithm and Lucas-
4.3 3
Kanade Algorithm for detection of optical flow.
4.4 Structure from motion 2
5. Applications of Computer Vision
Object Detection and Object classification algorithms:
5.1 3
SVM,PCA,Linear discriminant analysis, Bayes rule, ML methods.
5.2 Face detection, Face Recognition, Eigen faces, 3D face models 3
Applications of computer vision: Scene Analysis and scene
5.3 understanding, Examples of real time applications: In-vehicle vision 3
system
The following simulations can be done in Open CV/SciLab/ MatLab
1. Design and implementation of basic digital filters.
2. Apply thresholding operations in a digital image.
3. Apply point operators in an image –averaging/smoothing, 2D- masks(3 types),
4. Apply morphological operations in a selected image like fingerprint/ archaeological

scripts.
5. Implement filters in 2D-frequency domain using Gaussian/Homomorphic filters in a

particular satellite image or forensic image.
6. Write algorithms for connected component labelling in a given image pixel set.
7. Detect a coin/ball against the background using background subtraction and with
appropriate edge detection algorithms.
8. Locate iris from an image of human eye, using Hough transform algorithm.
9. Locate corners of a particular image like boxes/ building/TV screen etc
10. Write a program to implement brightness constancy equation.
11. Analyse the optical flow of a given video using Horn-Schunk method or/and Lucas-
Kannade method/s.
12. Use PCA for dimensionality reduction in detecting faces using Eigen values.
13. Implement SVM/LDA for any practical application.
14. Apply ML/Bayes’ rule for CV applications.
15. Create an attendance system by implementing face recognition method, among a set
of students.
16. With OpenCV library, implement real time scene analysis for traffic regulation.
(Cases such as detecting road signs/ pedestrians/track a particular vehicle/ detect
traffic lights/detect number plate of a vehicle/ detect accidents/ accident scene
analysisetc., etc.).
17. Use ML/DL algorithms to implement object detection/identification/classification,

with trained neural networks for applications in medical/agricultural/sports fields.
18. Write algorithms for the gait analysis of a person with walking difficulty to monitor
improvements in his daily activities.
19. Identify a person from his moving mannerisms, using Gait analysis.
20. Use gait analysis to monitor a ELECTRONICS & COMMUNICATION
sports person in any athletic/boxing/powerENGINEERING
lifting/any
sports activity.

Course Code: ECT438
Course Name: COMPUTER VISION

PART A
Answer ALL Questions. Each carries 3 marks.
1 Write down the Sobel, Robert and Prewitt masks K1
2 Give a 3x3 convolution mask to shift a 256x256 image one pixel position to K2
right.
3 Name three computer vision applications where object labelling and counting is K2
applied.
4 Describe steps in identifying connected components in an 8- connectivity case. K2
5 Write down basic Hough transform algorithm K2
6 Compare and contrast normalised cut and graph cut methods. K2
7 Mention the concept of identifying structure from motion. K2
8 Define texture? What is its role in object recognition? K2
9 Define Eigen values and Eigen vectors. K2
10 Differentiate between SVM and LDA. K2
PART – B
Module - I
11a Describe point operators with illustrative diagrams. (6)

CO1
K1
11b What is linear filtering? Describe Homomorphic filtering. (8)
CO1
K1
ELECTRONICS
OR & COMMUNICATION ENGINEERING
12a What is thresholding? Briefly describe different methods of thresholding (6)

CO1
K1
12b List different histogram operations and explain each one in detail. (8)
CO1
K1
Module - II
13 a Describe Geometric features and Statistical properties of a binary region. (6)

CO2
K1
13b A structuring element Aand an image B are given. Apply A on B, to find (8)
resultant images after the dilation and erosion process. Origin is given as ‘O’ and
‘x’ indicates 1 of the binary image, and note that ‘O’it is not part of the CO2
structuring element. K3
x O x
A =
x x x
x x
x x x
B =
x x
OR
14a List the standard binary morphological operators, with description and give its (8)
applications. CO2
K1
14 b. Using Hoshen–Kopelman algorithm, assign connected component labelling for (6)

the given image pixels marked
as ‘x’in the diagram below.
x x CO2
x x x x K3
x x x x x x x x
x x x x
x x x x x
x
ELECTRONICS
Module III & COMMUNICATION ENGINEERING
15 a Describe how Mean shift algorithm locate maxima of a density function in (7)
computer vision applications. CO3
K2
15 b Interpret different steps involved in Harris corner detection algorithm and (7)
describe how it is applied to detect corners in an image CO3
K3
OR
16a Give Canny’s algorithm and describe how it can be applied to detect edges of an (7)
image. CO3
K3
16b Write down Hough Transform algorithm and explain how it can be can be (7)
employed to locate coins in a given image. CO3
K3
Module - IV
17a Give Lucas-Kannade algorithmic with each steps and explain how it is employed (6)
for motion detection. CO4
K3
17 b Briefly explain the following concepts (8)
CO4
(i) Photometric stereo K3
(ii) Shape from -X
OR
18 a. Derive brightness constancy equation. (6)

CO4
K3
18 b. Describe with algorithmic steps, the Horn-Shunk method used for the estimation (8)
of optical flow. CO4
K3
Module - V
19 a Describe how LDA is employed for dimensionality reduction, with different (7)
mathematical steps involved. CO5
K3
19 b Find Principal components of the following matrix (7)

CO5
K3
8 −8 −2 ENGINEERING
A = �4 −3 −2�
3 −4 1
OR
20 a What is an Eigen face? Derive the equation for Eigen faces and Explain its (7)
importance in a face recognition system. CO5
K3
20b. Illustrate the operation of an in-vehicle vision system, for locating roadways and (7)
pedestrians, as a real time practical application of computer vision. CO5
K3
ECT448 LOW POWER VLSI
PEC 2 1 0 3
Preamble: This course aims to impart the basic knowledge in designing of Low power VLSI
Circuits .
Prerequisite: Solid State Devices, VLSI Design, Digital Circuit Design.
Identify various short channel effects and various sources of power

CO 1
dissipation in MOSFET
CO 2 Apply various power reduction techniques to circuits.
CO 3 Apply various clocked and non clocked design styles for logic implementation.
CO 4 Apply Adiabatic and reversible logic for circuit implementation.
CO 1 3 2
CO 2 3 2
CO 3 3 3 2
CO 4 3 3
Assessment Pattern
Continuous End Semester
Bloom’s Category Assessment Tests Examination
1 2
Remember 10 10 10
Understand 20 20 20
Apply 20 20 70
Analyse
Evaluate
Create
Mark distribution
150 50 100 3 hours

Course project/Assignment : 15 marks
Students should answer all questions. Part B contains 2 questions from each module of
which student should answer any one. Each question can have maximum 2 sub-divisions
and carry 14 marks. Mark patterns are as per the syllabus with 60% for theory and 40% for
Course Outcome 1 (CO1): Identify various short channel effects and various sources of
power dissipation in MOSFET
1. Derive the expression of switching power in static CMOS circuit.
2. Explain impact ionization and Hot electron effect.
3. Explain the various factors causing leakage power in MOSET.
Course Outcome 2 (CO2): Apply various power reduction techniques to circuits.

1. Describe the use of transistor and Gate sizing for power deduction.
2. Describe supply voltage scaling method for power reduction.
3. Apply various power reduction schemes to memory cells..
Course Outcome 3 (CO3) : Apply various clocked and non clocked design styles for logic
implementation
1. Implement XOR gate in domino logic.
2. Implement the function F= [AB+CD] in DCVS.
3. Implement basic gates in nmos and pseudo nmos logic.
Course Outcome 4 (CO4): Apply Adiabatic and reversible logic for circuit implementation.
1. Implement Y=AB using adiabatic logic
2. Explain one stage adiabatic buffer.
3. Implement logic functions using different Reversible logic structures.
Syllabus
Module 1: Physics of Power dissipation in MOSFET devices

Need for low power circuit design, MIS Structure, Short channel effects-surface scattering, punch
through, velocity saturation, impact ionization Hot electron effects, Drain Induced Barrier
Lowering, Deep submicron transistor design issues.
Module 2: Sources of power dissipation in CMOS-Dynamic Power Dissipation: Charging and

Discharging capacitance power dissipation , Short Circuit Power: Short Circuit Current of
Inverter , Short circuit current dependency with input and output load , Glitching Power, Static
Power Dissipation, Leakage Power Dissipation,
Gate level power analysis : Capacitive, internal and Static power dissipation of gate level circuit.
Module 3: Power Reduction Techniques :Supply voltage Scaling Approaches: Multi VDD
and Dynamic VDD, leakage power reduction Techniques – Transistor stacking,
VTCMOS,MTCMOS, DTCMOS, Power gating, Clock gating for Dynamic power dissipation,
Transistor and Gate Sizing for Dynamic and Leakage Power Reduction.
Module 4: Circuit design style- clocked design style- Basic concept, Domino logic (domino
NAND gate), Differential Current Switch Logic. Non clocked circuit design style-fully
complementary logic. NMOS and pseudo –NMOS logic, differential cascade voltage switch
logic(DCVS)
Module 5: Adiabatic switching – Adiabatic charging, adiabatic amplification, One stage and
two stage adiabatic buffer, Adiabatic logic gates, pulsed power supplies, Reversible logic basic
concepts.
Text Books:
1. Gray Yeap, Practical low power digital VLSI design, Springer, 1998
2. Kaushik Roy, Sharat C Prasad, Low power CMOS VLSI circuit design, Wiley India,
2000
References:
1. Abdellatif Bellaouar, Mohamed I Elmasry, Low power digital VLSI design, Kluwer
Academic, 1995
2. Anatha P Chandrakasan, Robert W Brodersen, Low power digital CMOS Design,
Kluwer Academic, 1995
3. Christian Piguet, Low power CMOS circuits, Taylor & Francis, 2006
4. Kiat Seng Yeo, Kaushik Roy, Low voltage, low power VLSI sub systems, Tata
McGraw Hill, 2004
No Topic No. of
Lecture
1 Physics of Power dissipation in MOSFET devices
1.1 Need for low power circuit design, MIS Structure. 2

Short channel effects-surface scattering, punch through, velocity saturation,
1.2 3
impact ionization, Hot electron effects, Drain Induced Barrier Lowering.
1.3 Deep submicron transistor design issues. 1
2 Sources of power dissipation in CMOS

Dynamic Power Dissipation: Charging and Discharging capacitance power
2.1 1
dissipation
Short Circuit Power: Short Circuit Current of Inverter , Short circuit current
2.2 2
dependency with input and output load .
2.3 Glitching Power, Static Power Dissipation, Leakage Power Dissipation, 4

Gate level power analysis : Capacitive, internal and Static power dissipation
2.4 2
of gate level circuit.
3 Power Reduction Techniques
3.1 Supply voltage Scaling Approaches: Multi VDD and Dynamic VDD 1
Leakage power reduction Techniques – Transistor stacking

3.2 2
VTCMOS,MTCMOS, DTCMOS
3.3 Power gating, Clock gating for Dynamic power dissipation, 2
3.4 Transistor and Gate Sizing for Dynamic and Leakage Power Reduction 2
4 Circuit design style
4.1 Clocked design style- Basic concept, Domino logic 2
4.2 Differential Current Switch Logic 1

Non clocked circuit design style-fully complementary logic. NMOS and
4.3 pseudo –NMOS logic 2
4.4 Differential Cascade Voltage Switch logic(DCVS) 1
5 Adiabatic switching
5.1 Adiabatic charging, adiabatic amplification,. 3

5.2 One stage and two stage adiabatic buffer 2
5.3 Adiabatic logic gates, pulsed power supplies 1
5.4 Reversible logic basic concepts.. 1
Atleast one assignment should be simulation based using any simulation software. It
can be the design of a circuit in any one of the clocked or non clocked style and perform
power analysis. Samples of simulation assignments are given below.
1. Implement NAND gate in conventional CMOS and domino logic and

perform power analysis in each case.
2. Implement any sample logic function in DCVS.
3. Apply threshold voltage scaling method to a logic function implemented
in conventional style and perform power analysis.

A P J Abdul Kalam Technological University
BRANCH: ELECTRONICS AND COMMUNICATION ENGINEERING
COURSE: ECT448 LOW POWER VLSI
Time: 3 Hrs Max. Marks: 100
PART A
1. Define the terms (3)

a) DIBL
b) Velocity Saturation
2. Discuss the need for low power VLSI Design (3)

3. Explain the dependency of short circuit current with output load? (3)
4. Explain dynamic power dissipation? (3)
5 Describe leakage power reduction using MTCMOS (3)
6. Define Slack time of logic gate . (3)
7. List the advantages and Disadvantages of Clocked design. (3)
8. Explain the methods to overcome charge sharing problem. (3)
9. Draw the schematic and logic symbol of an Adiabatic amplifier.. (3)
10. List the disadvantages of Retractile cascade of Adiabatic logic Gates. (3)
PART B
Answer one question from each module. Each question carries 14 mark
Module I
11(A) Explain the energy band diagram of MIS structure. (8)
11(B) Describe various transistor leakage mechanisms in deep submicron (6)
transistors .
OR
12(A) Explain various short channel effects. (8)

12(B) Explain how the power efficiency of a chip can be measured? (6)
Module II
13(A) Explain how capacitance can be estimated at gate level? (7)
13(B) Explain the formation of glitches in circuits ? Explain various methods (7)
for eliminating the glitches
OR
14(A) Explain the various sources of leakage power in MOSFET (7)
14(B) A 16 bit bus operating in 5V and 66MHz clock rate is driving (7)
capacitance of 2pF/Bit. Each bit is estimated to have a toggling
probability of 0.25 at each clock cycle. Calculate the power
dissipated in operating the bus.
Module III
15(A) Illustrate with examples how low threshold device and high threshold (7)
device can be effectively used for power reduction.
15(B) Explain dynamic supply voltage scaling mechanism for power (7)
reduction.
OR
16(A) Briefly explain dynamic and leakage power reduction using (7)
transistor sizing.
16(B) Illustrate various mechanisms by which power consumption of (7)
6T RAM cells can be reduced.
Module IV
17(A) Implement the function F= [(a+b)(c+d)]’ in NMOS logic and (7)
domino logic.
17(B) Implement the function F= (A+CD) in DCVS logic (7)

OR
18(A) Explain how charge sharing problem occur in logic design. How it can (7)
be eliminated?
18(B) Differentiate precharge high and precharge low DCSL. (7)
Module V
19(A) Describe the working of one stage adiabatic buffer. (7)
19(B) Explain pulsed power supply? Describe its importance in adiabatic (7)
logic.
OR
20(A) Describe various reversible gate structures. (7)

20(B) Implement OR and AND function using Fredkin gate. (7)
ECT458 INTERNET OF THINGS
OEC 2 1 0 3
Preamble: This course aims to develop skills in IoT system development and to apply the same
in real life applications.
Prerequisite: ECT342 Embedded systems
Course Outcomes: After the completion of the course,a student will be able to
CO 1
Understand the IoT fundamentals and architecture modelling (K1)
K1
CO 2
Understand the smart things in IoT and functional blocks (K2)
K2
CO3
To understand the communication networks and protocols used in IoT. (K2)
K2
CO 4
To understand the cloud resources, data analysis and applications. (K3)
K3
CO5
To apply the IoT processes in embedded applications. (K3)
K3
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
CO 3 3 2 1 2 2
1
CO 3 3 3 3 2 2
2
CO 3 3 3 3 2 3 2
3
Assessment Pattern

1 2
Apply K3 0 20 40
Analyse
Evaluate
Create
Mark distribution
Total ESE
CIE ESE
Marks Duration
150 50 100 3 hours
Course Outcome 1 (CO1): Understand the IoT fundamentals and architecture modelling (K1)
1. What is the definition of IoT and different characteristics of IoT
2. Define the architectural view of IoT and functional blocks
3. What are the different levels of IoT
Course Outcome 2 (CO2): Understand the smart things in IoT and functional blocks (K2)
1. What are the different smart things in IoT
2. How the communication is established among nodes and nodes and cloud.
3. What are the protocols that are used in IoT
Course Outcome 3 (CO3): To understand the communication networks and protocols used in
IoT. (K2)
1. Differentiate between IEEE standard protocols
2. Explain the advantages of next generation IP based protocols used in ioT
3. Define different layers used in embedded protocols

Course Outcome 4 (CO4): To understand the cloud resources, data analysis and applications.
(K3)
1. Explain how data is stored in IoT environment and processed
2. How to use cloud resources and different options available
3. How end devices can be used to control input and output devices
Course Outcome 5 (CO5): To apply the IoT processes in embedded applications. (K3)
1. What are the security and privacy concerns of IoT
2. Explain the typical applications of IoT.
3. Describe the processes involved in implementing a smart city.
SYLLABUS
Module 1 (7 Hours)
Introduction to IoT technology: Definitions and Characteristics of IoT, IoT Architectural View,
Physical Design of IOT, Logical Design of IoT- IoT Functional blocks, IoT communication
models, IoT Enabling Technologies, IoT Levels & Deployment Templates.
Module 2 (7 Hours)
IoT and M2M- M2M, Difference between IoT and M2M, SDN and NFV for IoT, Smart Objects:
The “Things” in IoT: Sensors, Actuators, and Smart Objects, Sensor Networks- Wireless Sensor
Networks (WSNs), Communication Protocols for Wireless Sensor Networks- Connecting Smart
Objects- Communication Criteria.
Module 3 (7 Hours)
Unified Data Standards –Protocols –IEEE 802.15.4 -The Physical Layer, The Media-Access
Control Layer, Uses of 802.15.4 ,The Future of 802.15.4: 802.15.4e and 802.15.4g–Modbus–
ZigBee-Zigbee Architecture- LoRaWAN -Standardization and Alliances, Physical Layer, MAC
Layer, Topology, LTE-M, NB-IoT-Network layer –The next generation: IP-based protocols -
6LoWPAN and RPL, Overview of the 6LoWPAN Adaptation Layer .
Module 4 (9 hours)
Data Collection, storage and computing Using a Cloud Platform-Introduction, Cloud Computing
Paradigm for Data Collection, Storage and Computing-Cloud Computing Paradigm, Cloud
Deployment Models-Everything as a Service and Cloud Service Models-SaaS, PaaS, IaaS, DaaS.
Cloud based platforms-XIVELY, NIMBITS.
IoT Physical Devices & Endpoints-IoT Device-Building blocks –Raspberry-Pi -Board-Linux on

Raspberry-Pi-Raspberry-Pi Interfaces (serial, SPI, I2C). Raspberry Pi interfacing and
programming examples using python (LED, switch, sensor, serial, SPI, I2C devices). Controlling
GPIO outputs and displaying sensor readings using web interface/cloud (Python programming is
required only for assignments and projects and not for examinations. Other end nodes and
platforms can also be used).
Module 5 (6 Hours)
IoT privacy, security and vulnerabilities solutions, vulnerabilities, security requirements, threat
analysis, security tomography, layered attacker model, Identity management, access control,
secure message communication.
Smart and Connected Cities-An IoT Strategy for Smarter Cities-Vertical IoT Needs for Smarter
Cities, Global vs. Siloed Strategies-Smart City IoT Architecture-Street Layer, City Layer, Data
Center Layer, Services Layer- Smart City Security Architecture - Smart City Use-Case Examples
– Street lighting, smart parking, smart traffic and air pollution monitoring
Maximum 35 /36 Hours
Text Books
1. Vijay Madisetti and ArshdeepBahga, “Internet of Things (A Hands-on- Approach)”, 1st
Edition, VPT, 2014 ( Module1,2,4)
2. David Hanes, Gonzalo Salgueiro, Patrick Grossetete, Rob Barton and Jerome Henry,
―IoT Fundamentals: Networking Technologies, Protocols and Use Cases for Internet of
Things, Cisco Press, 2017. (Module2,3,5)
3. Rajkamal, “Internet of Things : Architecture and Design Principles”, McGraw Hill (India)
Private Limited.
4. Raspberry Pi Cookbook, Software and Hardware Problems and solutions,
SimonMonk, O'Reilly (SPD), 2016, ISBN.
Reference Books/Papers
1. Olivier Hersent, David Boswarthick, Omar Elloumi , “The Internet of Things –Key
applications and Protocols”, Wiley, 2012 (Module 3)
2. Al-Fuqaha et al. Internet of things: A survey on enabling technologies, protocols, and
applications. IEEE Communications Surveys & Tutorials (2015), pp. 2347- 2376.
3. The Internet of Things (The MIT Press Essential Knowledge series) Paperback –
March 20, 2015 by SamuelGreengard
4. The Internet of Things: Converging Technologies for Smart Environments and
Integrated Ecosystems, OviduVermesan and Peter Friess, RiverPublishers.
5. Internet of Things - From Research and Innovation to Market Deployment-RIVER
PUBLISHERS, PETER FRIESS, OVIDIU VERMESAN (Editors)
6. Internet of Things Security and Data Protection, Sébastien Ziegler,Springer
International Publishing 2019.
No Topic No. of Lectures

1 Introduction to Internet of Things- 7Hrs
1.1 Introduction, definition and characteristics 1

1.2 IoT architectural view, functional blocks 2
1.3 IoT Communication models, enabling technologies 2
1.4 IoT deployment levels 2
2 Essential components of IoT- 7Hrs
2.1 IoT and M2M 2

2.2 Smart objects 2
2.3 Wireless sensor networks 3
3 IoT protocols- 7Hrs
3.1 IEEE 802.15.4 protocols 2

3.2 Zigbee 1
3.3 6LoWPAN and RPL 2
3.4 LoraWAN, LTE-M and NB-IoT 2
4 Cloud storage and Programming the end device- 9Hrs
4.1 Data storage and computation 3
4.2 Physical devices and end points 2
4.3 Raspberry pi programming 4
5 Security and Applications-6 Hrs
5.1 Security and Privacy 2
5.2 Smart city application 2
5.3 Use case examples 2
1. At least one assignment should be programming examples (python or any other language)
using Raspberry pi (Other options like arduino, node mcu etc. can also be used) Include
I/O interfacing, SPI, I2C, serial, sensor interfacing and web interface.
2. Another assignment shall be an IoT system implementation of mini project consisting of
a sensor, processing device, communication device and cloud storage (This can be
individual or group projects). Mini project is essential for understanding the concepts of
IoT.
3. Mini project can be done in the following areas.
a) Smart city (b) Weather monitoring system (c) air pollution monitoring (d)
Smart parking (e) smart traffic (f) any other application/s where
sensors/actuators devices are used.
4. Programming and mini project are essential for understanding the concepts of IoT.

(Model Question Paper)
Course Code: ECT458
Course Name: INTERNET OF THINGS
PART A
(Answer for all questions. Each Question Carries 3 marks)
1. List any five characteristics of IoT

2. What are the IoT enabling technologies?
3. What is a wireless sensor network?
4. What are the limitations of smart objects in WSNs??
5. Explain the need for IP optimization in IoTs?
6. What are the transmission modes used in modbus?
7. What are the 4 different cloud deployment models? Explain
8. What is cloud computing? Explain.
9. List the five functional units of security
10. What is message integrity? How it is checked? [ 10 X 3 = 30 Marks]
PART – B
(Answer one question from each module; each question carries 14 Marks)
Module – I
11. (a) Write a note on physical design of IoT. [06 Marks]

(b) Give a detailed description of the link layer, network layer, transport layer and
application layer protocols. [08 Marks]
OR
12. (a) What are the functional blocks of IoT? Explain? [07 Marks]
(b) Discuss different communication models used in IoT. [07 Marks]
Module – II
13. (a) What are the differences between IoT and M2M? [07 Marks]
(b) What are the issues of conventional networking architectures? How is it solved in
SDN? [07 Marks]
OR
14. (a) What are smart objects? What are their characteristics and the trends in smart
objects? [07 Marks]
(b) What are the characteristics and attributes to be considered for connecting smart
objects ? [07 Marks]
Module – III
15. (a) Explain IEEE 802.15.4 physical layer, MAC layer and security implementation with
the help of frame formats. [09 Marks]
(b) What are the modifications included in IEEE 802.15.4 e and g versions as compared
to IEEE 802.15.4? [05 Marks]
OR
16. (a) With the help of a diagram explain the Zigbee protocol architecture. [07 Marks]
(b) Explain LoraWAN architecture. Give a detailed description of the physical layer and
MAC layer of LoraWAN [07 Marks]
Module – IV
17. (a) Write a note on different cloud service models [06 Marks]
(b) What is virtualization in cloud computing? Explain the features, advantages and
concerns of cloud computing. [08 Marks]
OR
18. (a) With the help of a diagram explain the basic building blocks of an IoT device
[07 Marks]
(b) Explain cloud based data collection, storage and computing services provided by
XIVELY cloud platform. [07 Marks]
Module – V
19. (a) What is security and Privacy? List the 10 vulnerabilities of IoT. [07 Marks]
(b) Explain the layered attacker model. [07 Marks]
OR
20. (a) With the help of a diagram explain the 4 layer smart city architecture. [07 Marks]
(b) Write a note on street lighting architecture with the help of a diagram [07 Marks]
RENEWABLE ENRGY CATEGORY L T P CREDIT
ECT468
SYSTEMS PEC 2 1 0 3
Preamble: This course helps the students to understand environmental issues with
conventional fuels, the new methodologies/technologies for the effective utilization of
renewable energy sources. They will be conversant with the characteristics of solar PV and
wind power sources. Also, they will have an in-depth understanding of electronic conversion
systems application to renewable energy generation systems and the synchronization with
smart grid systems. The courses equip the students to pursue further specialized areas of study
such as renewable energy and green consumer electronics, industrial control systems and smart
grid, and renewable energy system which are essentially based on this course.
Prerequisite: Nil
Course Outcomes - After the completion of the course the student will be able to
CO1 Understand the need, importance and scope of various Non-Conventional sources of
energy
CO2 Outline the concepts and technologies related to renewable energy systems using
wind and Solar-PV
CO3
Understand the integration of smart grid with renewable energy systems
CO4
Explain the concept of distribution management system.
CO5
Describe the fundamentals of Smart metering
CO1 2 2 1
CO2 2
CO3 2 1
CO4 2
CO5 3
Assessment Pattern
Bloom’s Continuous Assessment Tests End Semester Examination

taxonomy Test 1 (Marks) Test II (Marks) (Marks)
Remember 10 10 20
Understand 30 30 60
Apply 10 10 20
Analyse
Evaluate
Create
Mark distribution
Total ESE
CIE ESE
Marks Duration
150 50 100 3 hours
Continuous Internal Evaluation (CIE) Pattern:
Attendance 10 marks
Regular class work/tutorials/assignments 15 marks
Continuous Assessment Test (Minimum 2 numbers) 25 marks
End semester pattern:-There will be two parts; Part A and Part B. Part A contain
10questions with 2 questions from each module, having 3 marks for each question.Students
should answer all questions. Part B contains 2 questions from each module ofwhich student
should answer any one. Each question can have maximum 2 subdivisionsand carry 14 marks.
Course Outcome 1
1. Describe the energy scenario in India. What are the various non-conventional energy
resources relevant to India?
2. Explain how current scenario of world energy consumption leads to the exploitation
of renewable energy sources.
Course Outcome 2
1. Explain grid connected solar PV systems with block diagram.

2. Explain solar power extraction using PV-Cells.
Course Outcome 3
1. Describe the sources and potentialsof wind energy power system in India?
2. Give the classification of wind turbines and explainit with neat sketches?
Course Outcome 4
1. Draw and explain intelligent islanding detection techniques.

2. Explain the influence of WECS on system transient response
Course Outcome 5
1. Give the classification of SCADAsystem and what is it application in industry.

2. Draw and explain a smart meter
SYLLABUS
Module I
Introduction to Renewable Energy (RE)Sources:World energy scenario, Over view of
conventional energy sources, their limitation, need of renewable energy, potential &
development of renewable energy sources,Renewable energy in India, An overview of types
of renewable energy systems - Wind power, Hydropower (micro and mini), Solar energy,
Biomass, Bio-fuel, Geothermal Heat energy, Pros and cons; Applications.
Module II
Solar Energy: Introduction to photovoltaic (PV) systems - Principle of PV conversion;
Commercial solar cell, Thin film PV device fabrication - LPCVD, APCVD, PECVD;
Tandem Solar cell fabrication; Solar power extraction using PV-Cells, I-V Characteristics,
PV-Inverters without D.C. to D.C. converters, stand alone and grid collected PV systems,
Grid interfacing-with isolation, without isolation, Maximum power point tracking-
Methods(MPPT), PV-Inverters with D.C. to D.C. converters-on low frequency side and high
frequency side with isolation, without isolation.
Module III
Wind Energy: Sources and potentials, Evaluation of Wind Intensity, Topography, General
Classification of Wind Turbines-Rotor Turbines, Multiple-Blade Turbines, Drag Turbines,
Lifting Turbines, System Toroidal Rotor Amplifier Platform (TARP)–Wind amplified rotor
platform (WARP), Generators and speed control used in wind power energy: Fixed speed
with capacitor bank, Rotor resistance control, SCIG and DFIG, Synchronous Generator-
external magnetized, Synchronous Generator-permanent magnets.
Module IV
Electronic conversion systems application to renewable energy generation systems: Basic
schemes and functional advantages, Power control and management systems for grid
integration, island detection systems, synchronizing with the grid; Issues in integration of
converter based sources; Network voltage management; Power quality management and
Frequency management; Influence of PV/WECS on system transient response
Module V
Introduction to grid connectivity of RE systems, smart grid and emerging technologies,
operating principles and models of smart gird components, key technologies for generation,
networks, loads and their control capabilities; Evolution of electricity metering, key
components of smart metering, overview of the hardware used for smart meters, smart
metering protocols. Structure and main components of a distribution management system,
Supervisory control and data acquisition (SCADA), distribution system modelling, new
trends for smart grids, topology analysis, power flow analysis.
Text books:
1. Nayak J. K. and Sukhatme S. P. (2006), Solar Energy: Principles of Thermal

Collection and Storage, Tata McGraw Hill.
2. Muhannad H. R. (2004); Power Electronics: Circuits, Devices and Applications,
Pearson Prentice Hall.
3. Nick Jenkins, JanakaEkanayake, [et al.] Smart Grid Technology and Applications,
Wiley India Ltd.
4. Ali Keyhani, Design of Smart Power Grid Renewable Energy Systems, Wiley-IEEE
Press 2016.
Suggested Readings:
1. Non-Conventional Energy Sources /G.D. Rai

2. Renewable Energy Technologies /Ramesh & Kumar /Narosa
3. Integration of alternative sources of energy /Felix A. Farret, M. Godoy simoes
4. Wind power plants and projects developments, Joshua Earnest and T Wizelius, PHI,
New Delhi, 2011.
5. Handbook of renewable energy technology, World Scientific, Singapore, 2011.
6. Garg H. P. and Prakash S. (2000); Solar Energy: Fundamental and Application, Tata
McGraw Hill
7. Goswami D. Y. (2015); Principles of Solar Engineering, Taylor and Francis
8. Gellings C. W. (2009); The Smart Grid: Enabling Energy Efficiency and Demand
Response, First Edition, CRC Press
9. Teodorescu R. Liserre M. Rodriguez P. (2011); Grid Converters for Photovoltaic and
Wind Power Systems, First Edition, Wiley-IEEE Press
10. Ali Keyhani, Muhammad Marwali, Smart Power Grids 2011, Springer-Verlag Berlin
Heidelberg 2012.
Course Contents And Lecture Schedule
SI No. of
Topic
No. lectures
1 Module 1:Introduction to Renewable Energy (RE) Sources 7
World energy scenario, Over view of conventional energy sources,
1.1 1
their limitation
1.2 Over view of conventional energy sources, their limitation, 1
need of renewable energy, need, potential & development of renewable
1.3 1
energy sources, Renewable Energy in India
1.4 An overview of types of renewable energy systems 1
1.5 Wind power, Hydropower (micro and mini) 1
1.6 Solar energy, Biomass, Bio-fuel, Geothermal Heat energy 1
1.7 Pros and cons; Applications 1

2 Module 2:Solar Energy 8

Introduction to photovoltaic (PV) systems and Principle of PV
2.1 1
conversion
2.2 Commercial solar cell, Tandem Solar cell fabrication 1
2.3 Solar power extraction using PV-Cells 1
2.4 PV-Inverters without D.C. to D.C. converters 1
2.5 Stand alone and grid collected PV systems 1
2.6 Grid interfacing-with isolation, without isolation 1
2.7 Maximum power point tracking-Methods 1

PV-Inverters with D.C. to D.C. converters-on low frequency side and
2.8 1
high frequency side with isolation, without isolation.
3 Module 3: Wind energy 6
Wind energy: Sources and potentials, Evaluation of Wind Intensity,
3.1 1
Topography
General Classification of Wind Turbines-Rotor Turbines, Multiple-
3.2 1
Blade Turbines, Drag Turbines, Lifting Turbines
Toroidal Rotor Amplifier Platform (TARP)– Wind amplified rotor
3.3 1
platform (WARP)
3.4 Introduction: Generators used in wind power energy 1
SCIG, DFIG, Synchronous Generator-external magnetized,
3.5 1
Synchronous Generator-permanent magnets
Speed control used in wind power energy, Fixed speed with capacitor
3.6 1
bank, Rotor resistance control,
4 Module 4:Electronic conversion systems 6
Electronic conversion systems application to renewable energy
4.1 1
generation systems, Basic schemes and functional advantages
Power control and management systems for grid integration, island
4.2 1
detection systems, synchronizing with the grid
4.3 Issues in integration of converter based sources 1
4.4 Network voltage management 1
4.5 Power quality management and Frequency management 1
4.6 Influence of PV/WECS on system transient response 1
5 Module 5:Grid connectivity of RE systems 8

Introduction to grid connectivity of RE systems, Emerging
5.1 1
technologies, operating principles and models of smart gird
Key technologies for generation, networks, loads and their control
5.2 1
capabilities
5.3 Evolution of electricity metering, key components of smart metering, 1
An overview of the hardware used for smart meters, smart metering
5.4 1
protocols.
5.5 Structure and main components of a distribution management system 1
5.6 Supervisory control and data acquisition (SCADA) 1
5.7 Distribution system modelling 1
5.8 New trends for smart grids, topology analysis, power flow analysis. 1

EIGHTH SEMESTERB.TECH DEGREE EXAMINATION
Course Code: ECT468
Course Name: Renewable Energy Systems
PART – A
(ANSWER ALL QUESTIONS, EACH QUESTION CARRIES 3 MARKS)
1. Explain the present status of various modes of renewable power generations in India?
2. List the merits and de-merits of non-conventional energy resources
3. Explain the principle and working of photo voltaic system.
4. Explain any one method for maximum power point tracking for solar energy system.
5. Draw the basic block diagram of a wind energy conversion system.
6. Explain the principle of DFIG?
7. Discuss the main issues involved with power qualities?
8. Discuss the issues in connecting renewable energy systems to the grid?
9. Describe the future of smart grid.
10. Discuss the distribution management system in power system.
PART – B
(ANSWER ONE FULL QUESTION FROM EACH MODULE)
MODULE – 1
11. a) Explain with a neat sketch, the working of hydropower plant system.
(7 marks)
b) List out various types of Biomass resources and the applications of biofuels?
(7 marks)
OR
12. a) Briefly explain the energy resources in India
(7 marks)
b) Explain how current scenario of world energy consumption leads to the
exploitation of renewable energy sources?
(7 marks)
MODULE – 2
13. a) Draw and explain the VI characteristics of a solar cell. How does temperature
affect the performance of solar cell?
(7 marks)
b) Explain stand-alone and grid connectedsolar PV systems? Explain each type with
the help of block diagram and bring out their relative merits.
(7 marks)
OR
14. a) Explain single crystal silicon and tandem solar cell with neat sketches.
(7 marks)
b) Explain the PV invertors with DC – DC converters on high frequency side with
isolation.
(7 marks)
MODULE – 3
15. a) Explain the stand alone operation of a fixed speed wind energy conversion system
with a neat diagram.
(7 marks)
b) Classify the WECS based on the rotational speed of turbines
(7 marks)
OR
16. a) Differentiate between TARP –WARP systems.

(7 marks)
b) Give the classification of wind turbines. Explain with neat sketches.
(7 marks)
MODULE – 4
17. a) Explain the key issue in generation, integration and control of off shore wind
energy conversion systems.
(7 marks)
b) What are the problems that occur whileintegrating renewable energy source in DC
– DC converter?
(7 marks)
OR
18. a) Give the classification of island detection systems. With a neat diagram explain
intelligent islanding detection techniques.
(7 marks)
b) Explain the transient stability analysis of PV system with shading effects.
(7 marks)
MODULE – 5
19. a)With a neat block diagram explain a smart meter

(7 marks)
b)Explain the power flow analysis in power system.
(7 marks)
OR
20. a) Describe the open control SCADA network architecture.

(7 marks)
b) List the challenges and emerging technologies of smart grid
(7 marks)
ECT478 ORGANIC ELECTRONICS
PEC 2 1 0 3
Preamble: This course aims to impart the basic knowledge in organic electronics.
Prerequisite: Solid State Devices
CO 1 Describe the principle of charge transport in organic semiconductors.
CO 2 Explain the structure and working of multilayer OLEDs, OFETs and OPVs
Distinguish the action of different layers used in organic devices with
CO 3
reference to the materials used.
Explain different techniques employed in making organic electronic devices
CO 4
like OLEDs, OPVs and OFETs
CO 1 3 3
CO 2 3 3
CO 3 3 3
CO 4 3 3
Assessment Pattern
Bloom’s Category Continuous End Semester
Assessment Tests Examination
1 2
Remember 10 10 20
Understand 30 30 60
Apply 10 10 20
Analyse
Evaluate
Create
Mark distribution
150 50 100 3 hours

Continuous Assessment Test(2numbers: 25 marks

Course project/Assignment : 15 marks
contain 10 questions with 2 questions from each module, having 3 marks for each
question. Students should answer all questions. Part B contains 2 questions from each
module of which student should answer any one. Each question can have maximum 2 sub-
divisions and carry 14 marks. Mark patterns are as per the syllabus with 50% for theory
and 50% for logical/numerical problems, derivation and proof.
CO-1
1.Explain the HOMO and LUMO and correlate with similar terms in inorganic semiconductors.
2.Discuss how soliton causes transport of charges in conjugated polymers
CO-2
1.Explain the construction and working of bilayer OLEDs.
2.With the help of energy band diagram, explain why work function matching is required
between hole transport layer and emissive layer in PLEDs.
3.Describe the working mechanism of organic FET with relevant diagrams.
CO-3
1.Explain the importance of buffer layers in organic electronic devices.
2.Discuss the features of ITO and also its effect on the performance of organic electronic devices.
3.Explain the different methods by which the efficiency of the organic electronics devices can be
improved.
CO-4
1.Compare the vapor deposition and spin coating methods.
2.Explain the screen printing technique.
3.Describe the RF and microwave plasma assisted coating method.
4.Distinguish between doctor blading and ink jet printing methods.
Syllabus
Module 1
Conducting polymer, Organic semiconductor, conduction mechanism, Pi and Sigma electron
bandtheory. Polymers fundamentals-conducting polymers. Organic semiconductors, charge transport in
conjugated polymers. Conduction mechanism in doped polymeric semiconductors. Physics of organic
semiconductors (Luminescence, injection and transports properties)Methods of developing organic
semiconductors.
Module 2
Basic device architecture in organic devices. Historical review. Organic light emitting diodes(OLED)
and Polymer light emitting diodes (PLED). Multilayer architecture. Single layer architecture. Bulk
hetero-junctions. Operating characteristics and electrical characterization. Flexible electronics : new
display media. Flexible displays device architecture. Fabrication and characterization. Organic
transistors. FETs: Principle and device architecture.
Module 3
Plastic solar cells. Basic principles. Multilayer and heterojunction structures, cell architecture. Charge
transport and exciton formation–effects of exciton diffusion, dissociation and luminescence.
Photogeneration process in organic heterojunction photovoltaic cells. Processing of organic solar cells.
Dyesensitization– dyesensitized solar cell.
Module 4
Essential characteristics of electrode materials for organic electronic devices – work function.
Conductivity and transparency factors. Indium Tin Oxide (ITO) as anode material. Effect of ITO
oxidative properties on efficiency and shelf life of organic electronic devices, novelinorganic anode
materials and their limitations. Buffer organic layer protection to the active layer. Doping the device
and annealing the device for increased efficiency and shelf life– architecture.
Module 5
Techniques in Organic electronic Device materials. Thin film coating techniques for devices
fabrication. Spin coating, dip coating, doctor blading screen printing, inkjet printing, vapor deposition.
R.F and microwave plasma assisted film coating.
Text Books
1. Bernier. Advancn syntheticcmetals.Elsevier(1999)
2. R.Farchioni(Editor)G.Grosso(Editor) Organic Electronic Materials. Conjugated polymers and low
molecular weight organic solids. Springer series in materials science (2007)
3. Gregory Crawford. Flexible flat panel display, Wiley series indisplay technology(2005)
4. Klauk Hagen(ED).Wiley VCH. Organic electronics(2006
References:
1. Gil. Semi conductors and Organic Materials for Opto electronic Application. Elsevier (1997)
2. Nalwa. Supra molecular photo sensitive and electro–active materials Elsevier(2001)
3. Equer. Thin film materials for large area electronics. Elsevier(1999)
No. of
No Topic
Lectures
1 Conducting Polymers
Conducting polymer, Organic semiconductor, conduction mechanism, Pi and
1.1 Sigma electron bandtheory. Conduction mechanism indoped polymeric 3
semiconductors.
Polymers fundamentals-conducting polymers. Organic semiconductors, charge
1.2 3
transport in conjugated polymers.
Physics of organic semiconductors (Luminescence, injection and transports
1.3 2
properties) Methods of developing organic semiconductors.
2 Organic Electronic Devices
Basic device architecture inorganic devices. Historical review. Organic light
2.1 3
emitting diodes(OLED) and Polymer light emitting diodes (PLED).
Multilayer architecture. Single layer architecture. Bulk hetero-junctions.
2.2 Operating characteristics and electrical characterization. Flexible electronics : 3
new display media. Flexible displays device architecture.
Fabrication and characterization. Organic transistors. FETs: Principle and
2.3 2
device architecture.
3 Organic Solar Cells
Plastic solar cells. Basic principles. Multilayer and heterojunction

3.1 2
structures, cell architecture.
Charge transport and exciton formation–effects of exciton diffusion,
3.2 dissociation and luminescence. Photogeneration process in organic 3
heterojunction photovoltaic cells.
Processing of organic solar cells. Dyesensitization– dyesensitized solar cell.
3.3 2
4 Organic Electronics-Materials
Essential characteristics of electrode materials for organic electronic

4.1 2
devices – work function. Conductivity and transparency factors.
Indium Tin Oxide (ITO) as anode material. Effect of ITO oxidative properties
4.2 on efficiency and shelf life of organic electronic devices, novel inorganic 2
anode materials and their limitations
Buffer organic layer protection to the active layer. Doping the device and
4.3 3
annealing the device for increased efficiency and shelf life– architecture.
5 Techniques in Device making
Techniques in Organic electronic Device materials. Thin film coating
5.1 techniques for devices fabrication. Spin coating, dipcoating, doctor blading 3
screen printing, inkjet printing,
Vapor deposition. R.F and microwave plasma assisted film coating.
5.2 2
Vacuum Deposition Techniques

EIGHTH SEMESTER B. TECH DEGREE EXAMINATION
COURSE: ECT478 ORGANIC ELECTRONICS
TIME:3HRS. MAX. MARKS: 100
PART A
1. Explain the concept of pi and sigma bond formation. (3)
2. Define the terms a) conjugated polymers (3)
b) luminescence
3. Explain the working principle of OLEDs. (3)
4.Obtain the electrical characterization of OLEDs. (3)
5. Give the significance of hetrojunctions in plastic solar cell. (3)
6. Briefly explain the theoretical concept of the working of dye sensitized solar cell (3)
7. Distinguish between electron affinity and ionization potential with reference to energy
bands. (3)
8. Mention the basic properties needed for an anode material. (3)
9. Write down the advantages of vapor deposition method? (3)
10. What is spin coating? Where is it applicable? (3)
PART B
Answer one question from each module. Each question carries 14 mark
Module I
11(A) Explain the HOMO and LUMO and correlate with similar terms in inorganic
semiconductors. (7)
11(B)Discuss how soliton causes transport of charges in conjugated polymers. (7)
OR
12(A)Describe the methods for developing organic semiconductors. (7)
12(B)Explain the conduction mechanisms in organic semiconductors. (7)
Module II
13(A) Explain the construction and working of bilayer OLEDs. (7)
13(B) With the help of energy band diagram, explain why work function matching is
required between hole transport layer and emissive layer in PLEDs. (7)
OR
14(A) Describe the working mechanism of organic FET with relevant diagrams. (7)
14(B) Discuss the construction and features of flexible displays. (7)
Module III
15(A) What are the photovoltaic process in plastic solar cells? Discuss each. (7)
15(B) What are the different types of plastic solar cells? Explain each with its structure.(7)
OR
16(A)Explain the fabrication steps involved in the construction of plastic solar cells. (7)
16(B) Describe the electrical characterization of plastic solar cells. (7)
Module IV
17(A) What are the essential characteristics needed for materials to act as electrodes?
(7)
17(B)Explain the importance of buffer layers in organic electronic devices. (7)
OR
18(A) Discuss the features of ITO and also its effect on the performance of organic
electronic devices. (7)
18(B)Explain the different methods by which the efficiency of the organic electronics
devices can be improved. (7)
Module V
19(A) Compare the vapor deposition and spin coating methods. (7)
19(B)Explain the screen printing technique. (7)
OR
20(A) Describe the RF and microwave plasma assisted coating method. (7)
20(B) Distinguish between doctor blading and ink jet printing methods. (7)
SEMESTER VIII
MINOR
ECD482 MINIPROJECT
PWS 0 0 3 2

small projects.
Course Plan

into consideration.

Course Outcomes
CO3 projects.

CO5 findings.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
CO 1 3 3 3 2 3 2
CO 2 3 3 3 2 3 3 2
CO 3 3 3 3 2 3 3 2
CO 4 3 3 3 2
CO 5 3 3 3 2
Evaluation

involvement.
Mark distribution

150 75 75 1 hour
Split-up of CIE
Component Marks
Attendance 10
Project Report 10
Split-up of ESE
Component Marks
Demonstration of 25
functionality
Project Report 10
Viva-voce 20
Presentation 10
SEMESTER VIII
HONOURS
ECD496 MINIPROJECT
PWS 0 0 3 2

small projects.
Course Plan

into consideration.

Course Outcomes
CO3 projects.

CO5 findings.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
CO 1 3 3 3 2 3 2
CO 2 3 3 3 2 3 3 2
CO 3 3 3 3 2 3 3 2
CO 4 3 3 3 2
CO 5 3 3 3 2
Evaluation

involvement.
Mark distribution

150 75 75 1 hour
Split-up of CIE
Component Marks
Attendance 10
Project Report 10
Split-up of ESE
Component Marks
Demonstration of 25
functionality
Project Report 10
Viva-voce 20
Presentation 10

EC2019s7s8 Syllabus

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

EC2019s7s8 Syllabus

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

EC2019s7s8 Syllabus

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

ELECTRONICS & COMMUNICATION ENGINEERING

Prerequisite: ECT 302 ELECTROMAGNETICS

CO1-K2 Understand the basic conceptofantennas anditsparameters.

Mapping of course outcomes with program outcomes:

Bloom’s Category Continuous Assessment

Total Marks CIE ESE ESE Duration

Continuous Internal Evaluation Pattern:

End Semester Examination Pattern

Maximum Marks: 100 Time: 3 hours

Course Level Assessment Questions

Course Outcome 1 (CO1):

Course Outcome 3 (CO3):

Course Outcome 4 (CO4):

Course Outcome 5 (CO5):

1. Explain S-parameters and its properties.

Module Course contents Hours

Microwave Hybrid circuits: Scattering parameters, Waveguide Tees- Magic tees,

1. Balanis, Antenna Theory and Design, 3/e, Wiley Publications.

Course Contents and Lecture Schedule.

5.3 Microwave Semiconductor Devices: Amplifiers using MESFET. 1

Principle of Gunn diodes: Different modes, Principle of operation Gunn Diode

Simulation Assignments (ECT 401)

Model Question paper

APJ ABDUL KALAM TECHNOLOGICAL UNIVERSITY

Max. Marks:100 Duration: 3 Hours

Preamble: This course aims to

Familiarize the basic Microwave components and to analyse few microwave

Mapping of course outcomes with program outcomes

Assessment Mark distribution

Total Marks CIE ESE ESE Duration

Continuous Internal Evaluation Pattern:

General instructions: End-semester practical examination is to be conducted immediately after

Course Level Assessment Questions (Examples only):

Course Outcome 1 (CO1): Microwave Experiments

1) Verify the relation λc = 2a .

Course Outcome 2 (CO2): Optical Experiments

1. Reflex Klystron Mode Characteristics.

II. OPTICAL EXPERIMENTS (Minimum Three Experiments are mandatory)

1. Setting up of Fiber optic Digital link.

III. ANTENNA EXPERIMENTS (Minimum Three Experiments are mandatory)

1. Familiarization of any antenna simulation software.

 To do literature survey in a selected area of study.

CO5 Prepare a technical report (Cognitive knowledge level: Create).

Mapping of course outcomes with program outcomes:

PO# Broad PO PO# Broad PO

PO5 Modern tool usage PO11 Project Management and Finance

PO6 The Engineer and Society PO12 Life long learning

Total marks: 100, only CIE, minimum required to pass 50

Seminar Coordinator: 20 marks (Seminar Diary – 10 (Each student shall maintain a

Presentation: 40 marks to be awarded by the IEC (Clarity of presentation – 10,

Mapping of course outcomes with program outcomes

PO# Broad PO PO# Broad PO

PO1 Engineering Knowledge PO7 Environment and Sustainability

PO2 Problem Analysis PO8 Ethics

PO3 Design/Development of solutions PO9 Individual and team work

PO6 The Engineer and Society PO12 Lifelong learning

 Literature study/survey of published literature on the assigned topic

Evaluation Guidelines & Rubrics

Total: 100 marks (Minimum required to pass: 50 marks).